Foreword

Introduction The type and amount of data recorded varies

depending on how the vehicle is equipped (such as
This manual provides information needed to operate the brand of engine, if an air bag is installed, or if the
and understand the vehicle and its components. vehicle features a collision avoidance system, etc.).
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s GPS location data, fault codes, and other technical
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and data may be recorded.
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals. This data may help provide a better understanding of
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with the circumstances of a crash.
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the Personal data such as name, gender, and age are
information contained in this manual applies to every not recorded. However, other parties such as law
vehicle. For details about components in your enforcement, could combine the data logger’s
vehicle, refer to the chassis specification pages contents with the type of personally identifying data
included in all new vehicles and to the vehicle routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
specification decal, located inside the vehicle.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle Emissions and Energy
at all times.
Efficiency Compliance
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in
this manual were in effect at the time of printing. This vehicle must be regularly inspected and
For the most up-to-date information visit maintained as indicated in the eCascadia
www.freightliner.com for the latest version of Maintenance Manual, and in the Pre- and Post-Trip
the driver’s and maintenance manuals. Inspections and Maintenance chapter in this manual,
in order to continue satisfactory performance and
Freightliner Trucks reserves the right to ensure coverage of the vehicle under the
discontinue models and to change specifications manufacturer’s warranty.
or design at any time without notice and without Many maintenance procedures ensure that the
incurring obligation. Descriptions and vehicle continues to comply with applicable
specifications contained in this publication emissions and energy efficiency standards.
provide no warranty, expressed or implied, and Maintenance procedures, using components
are subject to revisions and editions without engineered to comply with energy efficiency
notice. regulations, may be performed by an authorized
Daimler Trucks North America dealer, an
independent outlet, or the vehicle owner or operator.
Environmental Concerns and
The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the
Recommendations suitability of replacement components to maintain
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to compliance with federal and local jurisdictional
discard materials, you should first attempt to reclaim regulations. Components including, but not limited to,
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings,
follow appropriate environmental rules and bumper, hood, and vehicle speed limiters are
regulations when disposing of materials. specifically designed and manufactured to exacting
standards for regulatory energy efficiency. It is
important that these components are always
Data Logging replaced with components that meet or exceed the
This vehicle is equipped with a control module that performance of the originally installed components.
performs data logging capabilities. It is a violation of U.S. federal law to modify vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices or powertrain components in any way that would
that record specific vehicle data and may perform bring the vehicle out of compliance with certification
some of the same functionality as a regulated Event requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. § 7522(a)(3)]. It is the
Data Recorder but the device(s) are not subject to, owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that
nor designed pursuant to, 49 C.F.R. Part 563.

STI-511-1 (11-01-2022)
Part Number STI-511
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword

it conforms to EPA and, where applicable, ARB Center at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
regulations. Concern Form.
Vehicles domiciled in Canada thought to have a
Customer Assistance Center defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death,
Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer should immediately be reported to Transport
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTL- Canada and Daimler Trucks North America LLC.
HELP. For dealer referrals and breakdown support,
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it
call night or day, weekdays or weekends. For
may open an investigation; if it finds that a safety
specification requests and all other concerns and
inquiries, the Customer Assistance Center is defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
available 6:00 A.M. to 3:30 P.M. PST Monday recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport
through Friday. Our people are knowledgeable, Canada cannot become involved in individual
professional, and committed to following through to problems between you, your dealer, or Daimler
help you keep your truck moving. Trucks North America LLC.
To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
Reporting Safety Defects specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
Vehicles domiciled in the USA thought to have a
Concern Form.
defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death,
should immediately be reported to the National To contact Transport Canada, call the Defect
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in
and Daimler Trucks North America LLC. Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the
Gatinuau-Ottawa area or internationally.
If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation; if it finds that a safety You can also contact Transport Canada by mail at:
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a Transport Canada, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa,
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Ontario, K1A 0N5 Canada.
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Daimler Trucks North The following websites contain more information
America LLC. on Canadian recalls:

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.

toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153). French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels.
To e-mail NHTSA, go to www.safertruck.gov/. For additional road safety information, please visit
You can contact NHTSA by mail at: Administrator, the Road Transportation website:
NHTSA Headquarters, 1200 New Jersey Avenue English: www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road
SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590.
French: www.tc.gc.ca/fr/services/routier
For more information about motor vehicle safety,
go to www.safertruck.gov/.
To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance
© 2022–2023 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208–3849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.com and www.FreightlinerTrucks.com.

STI-511-1 (11-01-2022)
Part Number STI-511
Printed in U.S.A.
 Contents
Chapter Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Data Logging, Emissions and Energy Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
2 Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
4 Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
5 Detroit Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
6 Driver Assistance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
7 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
8 Cab Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
9 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
10 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
11 Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
12 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
13 eAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
14 Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
15 Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
16 Vehicle Appearance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
17 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
18 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
19 In An Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
20 Emissions Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
21 Telematics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
 1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Component Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Canada Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Vehicle Identification

Component Information Label

NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are
examples only. Actual specifications may vary
from vehicle to vehicle.
A component information label, as shown in Fig. 1.1,
lists the vehicle model, identification number, and
major component models and serial numbers.

COMPONENT INFORMATION
SEE VEHICLE ID NO.
WHEN ORDERING PARTS

MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC 1

MODEL: PX113064S T BASE MODEL: CA113DC DATE OF MFR: 07/15
VEHICLE ID NO: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 CUSTOMER: N00000 WHEELBASE: 164

ENGINE MOD: DETROIT DD13 12.8L 410 HP / 1800 RPM, 20 ENGINE NO: 999999S9999999
MAIN TRANS MOD: DT12-DB-1450 HEAVY DUTY 12-SPEED DIRECT TRANS NO: 99999999999999
PTO. MOD: PTO. NO:
FRONT AXLE MOD: MFS-12-143A 12,000# FF1 SINGLE FRONT AXL FRONT AXLE NO: MON99999999
1ST INT AXLE MOD: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7 1ST INT AXLE NO: FOR99999999
2ND INT AXLE MOD: 2ND INT AXLE NO:
3RD INT AXLE MOD: 3RD INT AXLE NO:
4TH INT AXLE MOD: 4TH INT AXLE NO:
5TH INT AXLE MOD: 5TH INT AXLE NO:
6TH INT AXLE MOD: 6TH INT AXLE NO:
REAR AXLE MOD: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7 REAR AXLE NO: FOR99999999
RATIO: 2.47
PAINT MFR: ELITE BC PAINT C
PAINT CODE: CAB COLOR A: L0306EB
FOR COMPLETE PAINT INFORMATION
SEE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION SHEET.

06/21/2016 f080196

Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label 09/29/2020 f080212

The component information label is attached to the Fig. 1.2, Component Information Label Location
outside of the ziplock document bag and the right-
hand door. See Fig. 1.2 for label location. given gross axle weight rating. Tires and rims
installed on the vehicle at the time of manufacture
may have a higher load capacity than that certified
Component Gross Vehicle by the tire and rim label.
Weight Rating Label If the tires and rims currently on the vehicle have a
NOTE: Vehicles manufactured for the Canada lower load capacity than that shown on the tire and
market will have a Canada Certification label rim label, then the tires and rims determine the load
limitations on each of the axles.
instead of a component gross vehicle weight
rating (GWR) label. An FMVSS label is attached to the left-hand B-pillar
as shown in Fig. 1.4. It is applied on the interior
A component GWR label, as shown in Fig. 1.3, edge for vehicles domiciled in the United States or
provides maximum GWR ratings for each manufactured for U.S./Canada operation.
component.
Tractors built without a fifth wheel for U.S. operations
The component GWR label is located on the right- will have an incomplete FMVSS vehicle certification
hand B-pillar as illustrated in Fig. 1.4. label. The incomplete vehicle documentation included
with the vehicle will certify the vehicle conforms to all
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety applicable regulations in effect on the date of
completion. The final certification label must be
Standard Label attached by the final-stage manufacturer.
Tractors with or without fifth wheels manufactured for
the U.S. are marked as certified by means of an Canada Certification Label
FMVSS certification label, shown in Fig. 1.5, which
also lists suitable tire and rim combinations. Complete tractors with fifth wheels manufactured for
Canada are marked with a Canada certification label,
The tire and rim combinations listed on these labels shown in Fig. 1.6, attached to the left-hand B-pillar.
are those that can be installed on the vehicle for the

1.1
 Vehicle Identification

COMPONENT (KG)LBS COMPONENT FRONT AXLE 1ST INT AXLE 2ND INT AXLE 3RD INT AXLE 4TH INT AXLE 5TH INT AXLE 6TH INT AXLE REAR AXLE COMPONENT GVWR
MAXIMUM GWR BY

AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

SUSPENSION: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 ENG/TRANS:
TIRES: ( 5601) 12350 ( 9253) 20400 ( 9253) 20400 5TH WHEEL:
RIMS: ( 6713) 14800 (11612) 25600 (11612) 25600 PARK BRAKE:
HUBS/SPOKES: ( 6032) 13300 (10432) 23000 (10432) 23000 AXLE:
BRAKES: ( 6032) 13300 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000
STEERING: ( 6032) 13300 VIN: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999

06/21/2016 f080200

Fig. 1.3, Component GWR Label

6 7

4
5

A B C

08/18/2021 f720776g
A. Left-Hand B-Pillar B. Left-Hand Door C. Right-Hand B-Pillar
1. Noise Emission Control Label 5. Entry/Exit Warning Decal 7. Component GWR Label
2. Customer Assistance Label 6. Vehicle Emission Control
3. FMVSS Certification Label Information Label
4. Canada Certification Label
Fig. 1.4, Label Locations

Complete tractors with fifth wheels manufactured for a FMVSS certification label and Canada certification
dual Canada/United States operations will have both label. In this case the FMVSS certification label will

1.2
Vehicle Identification

MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS N.A. LLC GAWR/PNBE GAWR/PNBE TIRES RIMS KPA PSI "S"
KGS LBS COLD COLD
DATE OF MFR: 07/15
GVWR/PNBV-KG: 23,587 FRONT AXLE: 5,443 12,000 275/80R22.5(G) 22.5X8.25 758 110 S
GVWR/PNBV-LBS: 52,000 1ST INT AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH ALL 2ND INT AXLE:
APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE 3RD INT AXLE:
SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT AT THE DATE
OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 4TH INT AXLE:
VEHICLE ID NO: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 5TH INT AXLE:
TYPE: TRUCK/TRACTOR TT/CT 6TH INT AXLE:
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: U.S.A. REAR AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
08/31/2020 f080199

Fig. 1.5, FMVSS Vehicle Certification Label (complete vehicle)

VIN/NIV: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CANADA CERTIFICATION DATE OF MFR: 01/20

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS PRESCRIBED UNDER THE CANADIAN MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY REGULATIONS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE / CE VEHICULE EST CONFORME A TOUTES LES NORMES QUI LUI SONT APPLICABLES EN VERTU DU
REGLEMENT SUR LA SECURITE DES VEHICULES AUTOMOBILES DU CANADA EN VIGUEUR A LA DATE DE SA FABRICATION.

08/31/2020 f080218a

Fig. 1.6, Canadian Certification Label

be applied on the interior edge of the B-pillar and the Components may include, but are not limited to, low-
Canada certification label will be applied on the rolling resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as
exterior edge as shown in Fig. 1.4. hood, cab side extenders, and fuel tank fairings;
vehicle speed limiters; and idle shutdown timers.
Trucks built without a cargo body and tractors built
without a fifth wheel that are intended for service in See Table 1.1 and Table 1.2 for additional
Canada will have an incomplete Canada vehicle information on what EPA and GHG regulations apply
certification label attached to the left-hand B-pillar. to different model years.
After completion of the vehicle, a complete Canada
certification label must be attached by the final-stage EPA Regulations
manufacturer to certify that the vehicle conforms to Regulation Emissions Components
all applicable vehicle safety regulations in effect on EPA07-type ATD, with additional
the date of completion. EPA10
selective catalyst reduction (SCR)
(Reduction of
technology that utilizes diesel exhaust
NOx emissions
Emissions Labels to 0.2 g/bhp-hr)
fluid (DEF) to convert NOx to nitrogen
and water vapor.
Vehicle Emission Control Information GHG14/17 components plus additional
components including, but not limited
Label to, transmissions, axles, predictive
GHG21
technologies, idle reduction
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet technologies for vocational vehicles,
requirements as specified by GHG14, GHG17 and and tire pressure monitoring systems.
GHG21 regulations. These vehicles are equipped
with components that increase fuel efficiency and Table 1.1, EPA Regulations
reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.

Emission Regulations by Model Year

Model Year Engine Regulation Vehicle Regulation
2021–and later EPA10, GHG21 GHG21
Table 1.2, Emission Regulations by Model Year

1.3
 Vehicle Identification

It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter complete the vehicle in conformity to the
components that would bring the vehicle out of applicable regulations and label it for
compliance with certification requirements [Ref: 42 compliance.
U.S.C. S7522(a) (3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility
to maintain the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 01/16
regulations. THIS INCOMPLETE VEHICLE AS DELIVERED BY DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC
CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM
A vehicle emission control information label is located AND HEAVY TRUCKS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FINAL STAGE MANUFACTURER
TO COMPLETE THIS VEHICLE WHILE MAINTAINING CONFORMANCE TO 40 CFR PART 205,
on the left-hand door. See Fig. 1.4. Among other INCLUDING LABELING FOR COMPLIANCE (SEC. 205.55-41).

GHG relevant information the label, as shown in

Fig. 1.7, indicates the emission model year of the
vehicle. 10/17/2016 f080201a

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION Fig. 1.9, EPA Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
Manufactured By: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC Date of Manufacture: 07/15
VIN/NIV: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 REGULATORY CLASS: High-roof day cab tractors above 33,000
(incomplete vehicle)
VEH FAMILY CD: GDTN2TRAC13C pounds GVWR.
GVWR-PNBV-KG: 23,587
GVWR-PNBV-LBS: 52,000 EMISSION CONTROL IDENTIFIERS: LRRA, ARF, TGR Customer Assistance Label
The customer assistance center telephone number is
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH U.S. EPA AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS FOR 2016 printed on the customer assistance label as shown in
HEAVY DUTY VEHICLES. See owner's manual for proper maintenance of this vehicle.
Fig. 1.10. The label also includes a QR code
06/21/2016 f080198
encoded with the VIN, readable by dealer apps, to
Fig. 1.7, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label
bring up information about the vehicle.

Noise Emission Control Labels

FOR CUSTOMER
For vehicles manufactured for operation in the United ASSISTANCE CENTER:
States, an EPA noise emission control label, shown 1-800-FTL-HELP
in Fig. 1.8, is applied to attest that the vehicle 1-800-385-4357
conforms to United States EPA regulations for noise. 24 HRS/DAY

The noise emission control label is applied to the left- 7 DAYS/WEEK

hand B-pillar as show in Fig. 1.4.

09/28/2020 f080207
It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle
so it conforms to all applicable regulations. Fig. 1.10, Customer Assistance Label

VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION The customer assistance label is located on the left-
DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 07/15
THIS COMPLETE VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS hand B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS. THE FOLLOWING ACTS, OR THE CAUSING
THEREOF BY ANY PERSON ARE PROHIBITED BY THE NOISE CONTROL ACT OF 1972.
A. THE REMOVAL OR RENDERING INOPERABLE OF, OTHER THAN FOR PURPOSES OF
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY NOISE CONTROL DEVICE OR
ELEMENT OF DESIGN (LISTED IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL) INCORPORATED INTO THIS
VEHICLE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NOISE CONTROL ACT.
B. THE USE OF THIS VEHICLE AFTER SUCH DEVICE OR ELEMENT OF DESIGN HAS BEEN
REMOVED OR RENDERED INOPERABLE.

06/21/2016 f080197

Fig. 1.8, EPA Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

(complete vehicle)

IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete

vehicles may be produced for the United States
market with incomplete noise control hardware.
Such vehicles will have an incomplete vehicle
noise emission control information label as
shown in Fig. 1.9. For such vehicles, it is the
final-stage manufacturer’s responsibility to

1.4
 2
Vehicle Access
Using the Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Opening the Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Entering and Exiting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Accessing the Back of the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
External Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Opening and Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Vehicle Access

Using the Key Fob • To start or end the pre-trip light check, press
the lamp check button.
Key Fob Use
Key Fob Programming
DANGER A maximum of four fobs can be programmed to work
on one vehicle. Whenever a new fob is needed, all
Do not ingest the key fob battery. The button cell existing fobs must be reprogrammed at the same
battery in this key fob is a chemical burn hazard. time. Any existing fobs that were previously
Always keep the key fob and button cell batteries programmed will no longer work on the vehicle
away from children. unless they are all reprogrammed at the same time.
To have the key fobs programmed, take the vehicle
Always safely dispose of used batteries.
to an authorized Freightliner dealer or service facility.
If the button cell battery in this key fob is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns Specifications
within two hours and can lead to death. If you
think a battery might have been swallowed or This system consists of a key fob that uses a radio
otherwise placed inside any part of the body, frequency link for communication between the fob
seek immediate medical attention. and the vehicle.

If the battery compartment does not close

securely, stop using the key fob.
Opening the Doors
Keyless entry is standard on eCascadia vehicles. The physical key can be used to lock and unlock the
The key fob can be used to remotely lock and unlock doors and activate the electrical system.
the doors, start and end the pre-trip light check, and IMPORTANT: Record the key number so, if
open the side windows. See Fig. 2.1.
needed, a duplicate key can be made.
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated
2 1 when the doors are open.
3
To unlock the driver’s door from outside the cab,
insert the key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise. To remove the key, turn it
counterclockwise to the original position. Pull the
door pull handle, shown in Fig. 2.2, to open the door.
To unlock the passenger’s door from outside the cab,
insert the key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise. Turn the key clockwise to the
original position to remove it.
To lock a door from outside the cab, close the door if
it is open, insert the key in the lock, and turn it in the
direction opposite to the unlocking direction
(counterclockwise for the driver’s door, clockwise for
10/23/2019 f546880a
the passenger’s door).
1. Lock Button 3. Lamp Check Button
2. Unlock Button To lock either door from inside the cab, push the lock
button downwards. See Fig. 2.3.
Fig. 2.1, Key Fob
To open the door from the inside, lift up on the door
• To lock both doors, press the lock button. lever. This will unlatch the door whether or not it is
locked.
• To unlock both doors, press the unlock button.
To unlock the door without unlatching it, pull the lock
• To open the side windows, press the unlock button upwards.
button for three seconds.

2.1
 Vehicle Access

Entering and Exiting the

Vehicle
CAUTION
1
Slipping or falling from the vehicle can result in
personal injury or property damage.
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
be especially careful when entering or exiting the
vehicle.
2
Always maintain three-point contact with the
vehicle when entering or exiting the cab. Three-
point contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot.
Do not jump from the vehicle.
For ease of entry and exit, grab handles are attached
to both the A- and B-pillar. In addition, the steering
11/26/2019 f720397a wheel may be used to provide a secure handhold. At
least two access steps provide secure footholds.
1. Lock 2. Door Pull Handle
Follow the instructions on the warning labels as
Fig. 2.2, Exterior Door Handle shown in Fig. 2.4 when entering and exiting the cab.

1
2 3
4

10/04/2021 f080329

Fig. 2.4, Cab Access Warning Label

6
Entering the Driver Side
5 1. Open the driver-side door and place anything
10/25/2021 f720769b that you are carrying in the cab.
1. Lock Button 4. Control Panel 2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar
2. Integral Grab Handle 5. Door Light grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.5.
3. Opening Lever 6. Storage Pocket
3. Step up on the bottom step with your right foot.
Fig. 2.3, Door Interior
4. Step up on the top step with your left foot,
grasping the grab handles higher as you move
up.
5. Step into the cab with your right foot first, and
grasp the steering wheel with your left hand.

2.2
Vehicle Access

4. Step to the ground with your left foot first.

Entering the Passenger Side

3 1. Open the passenger-side door and place
anything that you are carrying in the cab.
2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar
grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.6.

2
1
1
2
09/27/2021 f720770b
1. B-Pillar Grab Handle 3. Steering Wheel
2. A-Pillar Grab Handle
Fig. 2.5, Driver-Side Cab Access

Exiting the Driver Side

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
have exited the cab.

CAUTION 09/27/2021 f720771b

Always face in when exiting the vehicle. Do not 1. B-Pillar Grab Handle
exit the vehicle as you would going down a flight 2. A-Pillar Grab Handle
of stairs as this makes it more likely you’ll slip or
Fig. 2.6, Passenger-Side Cab Access
lose your balance. In addition, if you slip when
exiting the vehicle facing outwards there is a 3. Step up on the bottom step with your left foot.
greater likelihood of personal injury.
4. Step up on the top step with your right foot,
1. Grasp the steering wheel with your right hand grasping the grab handles higher as you move
and the A-pillar grab handle with your left hand, up.
and place your left foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.5. 5. Step into the cab with your left foot first, while
holding on to the grab handle with your right
2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab hand.
handle with your right hand.
3. Step down on the bottom step with your right Exiting the Passenger Side
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you
move down.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
while carrying any items in your hands. Place

2.3
 Vehicle Access

them in an accessible location on the seat or

cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
have exited the cab.

CAUTION
3
Always face in when exiting the vehicle. Do not
exit the vehicle as you would going down a flight
of stairs as this makes it more likely you’ll slip or
lose your balance. In addition, if you slip when
exiting the vehicle facing outwards there is a
greater likelihood of personal injury.
1. Grasp the A-pillar grab handle with both hands, 4
and place your right foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.6.
2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab 2
handle with your left hand.
3. Step down on the bottom step with your right
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you
move down. 1
4. Step to the ground with your left foot first.
08/26/2021 f720772c
Accessing the Back of the Cab 1. Steps 3. Grab Handles
2. Battery Protection 4. Deck Plates
When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be Deck Plate
reached conveniently from the ground, Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations require back-of-cab Fig. 2.7, Back-of-Cab Access
access.
A grab handle is typically located on the back wall of
the cab. Steps are built into impact protection plates
that surround the high-voltage batteries and deck
plates cover the top of the batteries and frame rails
as shown in Fig. 2.7.
Do not step on areas marked by warning labels as
shown in Fig. 2.8.
10/04/2021 f080328
CAUTION
Fig. 2.8, No Step Warning Label
Failure to follow the following rules for back-of-
cab access could lead to a fall and possible Do not climb up or down facing out away from
personal injury. the vehicle.
Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab Never step on any exterior part unless it has a
access, maintaining three-point contact—both slip-resistant surface meant for safe stepping. If
hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand— the surface is movable, make certain it is firmly
whenever moving around. secured before stepping on it.
Always face in toward the deck plate when Be careful not to trip on items such as chains or
climbing up or down. air lines.

2.4
Vehicle Access

Wet or dirty shoes, steps, or grab rails greatly

increase the chance of slipping or falling. If your 1
shoes or the contact areas are wet or dirty, clean
and dry them as much as possible before
accessing the back of cab area, and be especially 2
careful when climbing or standing on the vehicle.
Never jump onto, or off of, a vehicle; doing so
creates a very high likelihood of a fall and
personal injury.

Accessing Back-of-Cab Area

1. Facing the back of the cab, grasp the grab
handle with both hands. Reach up as far as is
comfortable.
2. Place one foot on the bottom step and pull
yourself up. 09/13/2021 f720829

3. Place your other foot on the top step. 1. Turning Vane 2. "No Handhold" Mark
4. Move your lower hand to a higher position on the Fig. 2.9, A-Pillar Turning Vane
grab handle.
5. Step onto the deck plate. Opening and Closing the Hood
The hood can be raised to a fully open position. Tilt-
Exiting Back-of-Cab Area assist struts help to both raise the hood and lower it.
1. Facing toward the center of the vehicle, grasp If equipped with a locking right-hand hood strut, the
the grab handle with both hands. hood can be secured in the fully open position by
2. Step one foot at a time onto the top step. engaging the yellow lever located midway up the
strut. To lower the hood, the yellow lever must be
3. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the flipped up.
grab handle.
Before operating the vehicle, the hood must be
4. Move one foot to the bottom step. secured to the cab-mounted cowl by hold-down
5. Step to the ground with your upper foot first. latches on both sides.

Opening the Hood

External Cab Access
1. Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling
A-Pillar Turning Vane the handles outward.
2. Slowly tilt the hood with both hands on the grab
WARNING handle.
When accessing the outside of the cab to clean 3. As the hood starts to open, walk backwards as
the door’s windows or windshield, do not grab or you pull. The hood will stop in the full-open
hold onto the A-pillar turning vane. This feature position.
is not designed as a steadying device or 4. Lock the right-hand hood strut. See Fig. 2.10.
handhold.
Misuse of the turning vane may result in injury to Closing the Hood
the operator or damage to the truck.
1. Disengage the locking hood-strut.
2. Push on the hood above the grille, tilting it
toward the closed position.

2.5
 Vehicle Access

02/09/2021 f880967
A. Flip up the hood strut lever to unlock.
Fig. 2.10, Lockable Right-Hand Hood Strut

3. As the hood goes over center, allow it to settle

on the rear supports.
4. Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then
secure the hood by engaging both hood hold-
down latches.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that both hood hold-
down latches are fully engaged before operating
the vehicle.

2.6
 3
Instruments
Instrumentation Cluster Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
ICC5 Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Indicators, Warnings, and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
ICC5 Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
ICC5 Instrument and Infotainment Screen Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
ICC5 Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
ICC5 Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
ICC5 Infotainment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Instruments

Instrumentation Cluster The driver display, or A-panel, provides the driver

with current information about the vehicle and vehicle
Overview systems. The digital instrument and infotainment
display, or B-panel, provides access to digital
A typical eCascadia instrument cluster layout is instruments and gauges, charging, phone, and radio
shown in Fig. 3.1.

10
9

8
2 3 4 5
1 6
7

11

12

15

13
14
.07/11/2022 f612073
1. Steering Wheel Switch Pods 6. Dash Top Trays 11. Power Outlets
2. Driver Display 7. USB Ports 12. Passenger Storage Pocket
3. Digital Instrument and 8. Camera and Rain/Light Sensor 13. eStop Button
Infotainment Display 9. Bendix SafetyDirect® Camera 14. Cup Holders
4. HVAC Controls 10. Side Guard Assist Warning Light 15. Storage Trays
5. Dash Storage Pocket
Fig. 3.1, Standard and Common Cab Features

The eCascadia instrument cluster unit (ICU) is controls. The B-panel display is mounted above a
named Instrument Cluster Connect 5 (ICC5). menu of physical switches.
The ICC5 consists of the driver display screen, a The Optical Finger Navigation (OFN) controls on the
touch screen, steering wheel optical finger navigation steering wheel can be used to navigate screens and
(OFN) controls, two USB2 ports, and multiple visual feature settings. The buttons in the left-hand pod
and audible warning systems. control the driver display features. The buttons in the
right-hand pod provide access to infotainment
features and menus.

3.1
 Instruments

Start Sequence Basic Driver Display Functions

When the keyswitch is turned ON, the ICU runs a Alert Messages
self-check. Observing the self-check sequence is a
Alert messages appear at the center of the driver
good way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
display when certain conditions occur. They include
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Lane warnings, cautions, and notices that require the
Departure Warning, there will be no audible self- driver’s attention. Not all alert messages are critical
test. to the operation of the vehicle. More important
messages take priority over less important
IMPORTANT: If any red warnings or amber messages. The header text and color indicates the
cautions do not go out after the self-check priority of the on-screen message, listed from the
completes, take the action outlined in the highest to the lowest:
warning or caution. Dismissed warnings and • Warning (red)
cautions can be found under ’Active Driver
Alerts’ on the infotainment screen under the • Caution (amber)
’Chassis’ menu. If necessary, take the vehicle to • Status/Informational (blue, green, white, and
an authorized Freightliner service facility. grey)
Warnings alert the driver to situations or conditions
ICC5 Driver Display that may pose a threat to control of the vehicle.
NOTE: Units of measure can be set as metric or Follow all instructions given in the message.
imperial and the clock as 12 or 24 hour under Cautions alert the driver to situations or conditions
’Settings’ on the infotainment display screen. that may result in damage to vehicle components, or
derating of engine power.
The ICC5 driver display is used to communicate
current information about the vehicle. The information Status notices alert the driver to situations or
shown depends on the status of the vehicle (such as conditions that may improve fuel efficiency or vehicle
charging or driving), the features the vehicle is handling.
equipped with, and the status of available features.
Software Updates
An driver display of an eCascadia powered on with
the powertrain not ready would look similar to A software update consists of three steps:
Fig. 3.2. Telltales may display at the top, bottom,
1. Downloading the software.
right, and left side of the screen.
2. Installing the software.
A stationary vehicle with the powertrain on would
show the powertrain status of READY, the 3. Activating the software by restarting the system.
speedometer and power gauge needles at 0, and
applicable telltales. A popup message and a blue folder will appear in
one of the dynamic telltale locations on the driver
When driving, the center of driver display shows display when an update is available. In addition the
driving assistance information as shown in Fig. 3.3. software update option in the diagnostics menu will
A quick access menu within the IC display has a be active.
short cuts to the most used features in the truck. See The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the parking
Fig. 3.4. brake set, and the engine off before a software
update can start. Once started, a software update
ICC5 OFN Steering Wheel Buttons cannot be cancelled.
To navigate features and screens, use the Optical During the software update process, progress
Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons on the messages will be provided.
steering wheel. See Fig. 3.5.
If a software update is interrupted, the system will
In general the buttons in the left-hand pod control the ask if you want to restart the process or inform you
driver display features and the buttons in the right- that the vehicle cannot be driven until the update is
hand pod provide access to infotainment features. complete. If a software update fails, the system will

3.2
Instruments

1 13
21

6 7

8 17

2 14 18
9

3 10 19
4 20
11
12 15
5 16 22

07/21/2022 f612039a
1. Speedometer 9. Odometer 16. Low-Voltage Battery Problem
2. Current Speed 10. ACC Not Available 17. Park Brake Set
3. Projected Range 11. Primary Air Gauge 18. Transmission Gear
4. High-Voltage (HV) Battery Status 12. Secondary Air Gauge 19. Transmission Mode
5. HV Battery State of Charge (SOC) 13. Power Gauge 20. Driving Mode
6. Current Time 14. Regenerative Braking Gauge 21. Available Power Gauge
7. Ambient Outside Temperature 15. Powertrain OFF 22. Boost Gauge
8. Trip Meter
Fig. 3.2, eCascadia Driver Display: Parked, Powertrain Off, Trip Meter Selected

attempt to revert to the previous version. A temperature. The snowflake icon will display until the
notification will appear when a software update has ambient air temperature rises to 37°F (3°C).
been successfully installed.
Failure to install software updates may make data Indicators, Warnings, and
less secure and/or mean vehicle systems are not
operating at their best.
Messages
NOTE: An estimation of installation time will be Warnings, Indicators, and Messages
given before the software update starts.
Indicators (telltales) and warnings (pop-ups, gauges)
Installation can take several minutes. During
appear on the driver display. The positions of the
installation individual functions and controls will indicators and warnings vary, but most indicators use
not be available or only available to a limited standard telltale symbols.
degree.
The colors of telltales and warnings indicate the
Temperature hazard level: red (warning), amber (caution), green
and blue (active status), grey (passive status), white
NOTE: Pay attention to road conditions when air (informational). Blue is currently used to indicate an
temperatures are near freezing. active phone call, that a software download is
available, and that utility lamps and high beams are
In the ICC5 the ambient air temperature displays at on.
the top and slightly to the right on the driver display
screen. The temperature can be set to display in °F See Table 3.1 for ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and
or °C in Settings. Messages.
When ambient air temperature drops below 34°F See Table 3.2 for Braking and Traction Telltale
(1°C), a snowflake icon will appear below the display Lamps and Messages.

3.3
 Instruments

5 10
9
6
11 12
1

13
2 14
3
7 8
15
4
07/21/2022 f612040
1. Current Speed 9. Maximum Regenerative Braking Level Requested
2. High-Voltage Battery Status 10. Current Power Usage
3. Projected Range on Current State of Charge 11. Suggested Transmission Gear
4. High-Voltage Batteries State of Charge 12. Current Transmission Gear
5. Speed of Vehicle Ahead 13. Current Driving Mode
6. Distance to Vehicle Ahead 14. Powertrain Ready Telltale
7. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Active Telltale 15. Power Limit in Current Driving Mode
8. Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Active Telltale
Fig. 3.3, eCascadia Driver Display - Driving

See Table 3.3 for Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps

and Messages.
See Table 3.4 for Coolant Level Telltale Lamps and
4 Messages.
3
See Table 3.5 for Steering Telltale Lamps and
5 Messages.
See Table 3.6 for Driving Safety Related Icons.
2
See Table 3.7 for Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Telltales and Messages.
See Table 3.8 for Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps
1 7 6 and Messages.
See Table 3.9 for Exterior-Lamps Telltale Lamps and
Messages.
See Table 3.10 for Outside Ambient Temperature
08/11/2022 f612186 Icon.
1. Coolant Temp 5. Range See Table 3.11 for ICU Application Icons.
2. Phone 6. Audio
3. Odometer 7. Driving Assistance
4. Trip Computer
Fig. 3.4, eCascadia Driver Display: Quick Access Menu

3.4
Instruments

3 7 8
2
9
1

6 5 A 4 12 11 A 10

05/03/2022 f612076
A. Swipe a finger to the left or right over the light in the center switch pod button to page through screens when a multiple
screen telltale (...) appears below an image or when making menu selections. There will be a click when the finger motion
is read.
A. Menu Buttons—The left Menu button accesses the driver display. The right Menu button accesses the instrument and
infotainment screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set 10. Volume Increment Down
2. Back Button 7. Phone Pick-Up 11. Mute Button
3. Quick Access System Settings 8. Back Button 12. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
4. Marker Interrupt** 9. Volume Increment Up ** Not available in all markets.
5. Cruise Cancel

Fig. 3.5, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Optical Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons - ICC5

ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
A flashing telltale indicates the vehicle is
actively charging. When a charging coupler
Charger
is plugged into the
Blue Connected to Solid illumination indicates the desired SOC vehicle, the vehicle’s
Vehicle has been reached and that the charger is ability to drive is inhibited.
connected to the vehicle.
If a door is opened when
the parking brake is
Signals that the ePowertrain is activated and
Blue Powertrain Active disengaged and the
the vehicle is ready to drive.
powertrain is active, a
popup appears.

Low-Voltage A low-voltage battery problem has been

Amber
Battery Problem detected.

3.5
 Instruments

ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Low-Voltage The low-voltage batteries have failed or

Red
Battery Failure cannot be detected.

High-Voltage
The high-voltage batteries have a high enough
White Battery Charge
charge to operate the vehicle.
Normal Operation
Indicates an state of charge warning is active.
High-Voltage
Turn off unneeded features drawing power.
Amber Battery Charge
Low Drive the vehicle for 30-60 minutes, or
manually charge the low-voltage batteries.
Indicates a non-critical battery fault, such as
High-Voltage one of the high-voltage batteries going offline.
Amber
Battery Problem
Take the vehicle in for service.
A thermal event has been detected inside a
high-voltage battery. The vehicle must be on
for the high-voltage
High-Voltage Bring the vehicle to a safe stop, apply the park
Red battery thermal event
Battery Failure brake, turn the keyswitch to off, and exit the
detection system to be
cab within the next five minutes.
active.
If there is time, press in the eStop button.
A high-voltage battery or ePowertrain problem
has been detected.
ePowertrain
Amber A derate program has been activated or the
problem
driving range has been reduced.
Take the vehicle in for service.

A high-voltage battery or ePowertrain problem

Red ePowertrain Error
has been detected. Stop immediately.

Amber eDrive problem An eDrive problem has been detected

Red eDrive error And eDrive error has been detected

Table 3.1, ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and Messages

3.6
Instruments

Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale
Color Description Related Information
Lamp
A blue line will appear on
Indicates regenerative braking has been the charge portion of the
Regenerative activated by moving the right-hand power gauge showing the
Green
Braking multifunctional control stalk into position 1, 2, amount of available
or 3 (low, medium, or high). regenerative braking
requested.
The driver should always
be ready to intervene by
applying the service
Descent Control
Green Indicates descent control mode is active. brakes. On steep roads
Mode
regenerative braking may
not be able to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
A blinking telltale indicates hill start aid is To turn on HSA, press the
Hill Start Aid inactive. HSA OFF switch again or
Amber
Disengaged A solid telltale indicates a fault with the cycle the vehicle
system. keyswitch.
Brake hold mode is
Indicates brake hold mode is active. released when the
Brake Hold Mode accelerator pedal is
Grey The service brake will be maintained when the
Engaged pressed, the work brake
driver takes their foot off the brake pedal. is set, or the park brake
is set.
Park Brake Always engage the park
Red Engaged Indicates the park brake is engaged. brake before exiting the
vehicle.
Indicates air pressure in the primary or A buzzer will sound if the
secondary reservoir has dropped below park brake is released or
Low Brake Air approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Red the vehicle is moving
Pressure
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the when the air pressure has
air system repaired before continuing. dropped below 70 psi.
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle
ABS is engaged.
Even if the ABS is
Tractor Anti-Lock
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the completely inoperative,
Amber Braking System
vehicle ABS. normal braking ability is
(ABS)
maintained.
Repair the ABS to ensure full braking
capability.
If the telltale lamp
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer illuminates momentarily
ABS is engaged. during vehicle operation,
Trailer Anti-Lock then shuts off, a fault was
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the detected and corrected.
Amber Braking System
trailer ABS.
(ABS) The telltale will not
Repair the trailer ABS immediately to illuminate if an
ensure full braking capability. incompatible trailer is
connected to the tractor.

3.7
 Instruments

Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale
Color Description Related Information
Lamp
Automatic Traction A flashing telltale lamp indicates a wheel spin
Amber Control (ATC) event has been detected, and the ATC system
Active is active.

Automatic Traction
Indicates the ATC SPIN switch has been Press the switch again to
Amber Control (ATC)
pressed to allow wheel slip. active ATC.
Deactivated
Solid telltale.
Indicates a fault or malfunction with the
Antilock Braking System/Electronic Braking
Brake System
Amber System (ABS/EBS) or the electronic air
Caution
processing unit (EAPU).
Take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
Service Center as soon as possible.
Solid telltale.
Indicates a failure in the Antilock Braking
Brake System
Red System/Electronic Braking System (ABS/EBS)
Warning
or the electronic air processing unit (EAPU).
Stop the vehicle and call for service.
Table 3.2, Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps and Messages

Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Adaptive Cruise
Indicates that adaptive cruise control is on and
Green Control (ACC)
active.
Active

Adaptive Cruise
Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Amber Control
is not available
Unavailable

Active Brake Assist Indicates the Active Brake Assist system is not
Amber
Unavailable available.

Lane Departure Indicates that lane departure warning is

Amber Warning disabled due to minimum speed, lack of lane
Unavailable markings, or system not being available.
NOTE: When Lane Keep
Assist is off there is no
Lane Keep Assist is on and making micro- steering wheel telltale.
Lane Keep Assist
Blue steering adjustments to keep the vehicle in the
(LKA) Active Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
preferred lane position.
is a component of Active
Lane Assist (ALA).

3.8
Instruments

Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Lane Keep Assist is on but inactive. Reasons If Adaptive Cruise Control
for inactivity include: (ACC) is not available,
Lane Keep Assist
Active Lane Assist (ALA)
Grey (LKA) on but • Lane markings cannot be identified.
is not available. Lane
inactive
• There has been a significant change in Keep Assist (LKA) is a
load with the ignition switched on. component of ALA.
When Auto Stop activates at the end of the The Auto Stop warning
Lane Keep Assist warning cascade, the Auto window: "Auto Stop
Red Auto Stop Active Stop telltale appears. Started Throttle to
When Auto Stop has brought the vehicle to a Cancel" appears when
standstill, the Auto Stop telltale clears. Auto Stop initiates.

Table 3.3, Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

Coolant Level Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Information
The battery coolant level is low.
OR A pop-up message will
Amber Low Coolant Level The eDrive coolant level is low. specify which coolant
level is low.
Fill the low cooling system reservoir at the first
opportunity.
The battery coolant level is very low.
OR A pop-up message will
Very Low Coolant
Red The eDrive coolant level is very low. specify which coolant
Level
level is low.
Stop the vehicle and fill the low cooling system
reservoir.
Table 3.4, Coolant Level Telltale Lamps and Messages

Steering Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Information
Adaptive Power An active power steering
There is an error with the adaptive power
Red Steering (APS) error deactivates Active
steering (APS) unit.
Error Lane Assist (ALA).

Electro-hydraulic One reason this telltale appears if is the power

Amber Power Steering to the EHPS pumps exceeds a set current
(EHPS) Error level.

Table 3.5, Steering Telltale Lamps and Messages

3.9
 Instruments

Driving Safety Related Icons

Telltale Color Description
Flashing indicates a stability event has been detected, and the ESC
Electronic Stability system is active.
Amber Control (ESC) Solid illumination indicates a problem with the stability system.
Active Repair the ESC system immediately to ensure full stability
capability.
Electronically
Controlled Air
Amber Indicates and active ECAS fault.
Suspension (ECAS)
Error

Amber IPPC Error

Green AERO active Indicates that aerodynamic height control (AERO) is active.

Table 3.6, Driving Safety Related Icons

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltales and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Tire Pressure At least one tire has very low tire pressure, The TPMS screen will
Red Monitoring System very high tire pressure, or a high tire highlight which tire and
(TPMS) Warning temperature. what the issue is.

Tire Pressure At least one tire has high tire pressure or a The TPMS screen will
Amber Monitoring System TPMS battery is low and needs to be highlight which tire is
(TPMS) Caution replaced. affected.

Table 3.7, Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltales and Messages

Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Message
When the system detects
that the parking brake is
Unfastened Seat
Red Indicates the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. off and the driver seat belt
Belt
is not fastened an audible
alert activates.
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the If the SRS telltale
Supplemental restraint system and restraint system appears, have the
Amber Restraint System components may be triggered restraint system
(SRS) Error unintentionally or may not deploy as checked and repaired
intended during an accident. immediately.

Left-Hand Door Indicates the left-hand door on two door cab

White
Unlatched is unlatched.

3.10
Instruments

Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Message

Right-Hand Door Indicates the right-hand door on two door

White
Unlatched cab is unlatched.

Both Doors Indicates both doors on a two door cab are

White
Unlatched unlatched.

Table 3.8, Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

Exterior-Lamps Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description

Right-Turn
Green Flashing indicates the right-turn signal lamps are activated.
Indicator On

Left-Turn Indicator
Green Flashing indicates the left-turn signal lamps are activated.
On

Blue High-Beams On Indicates the high-beam headlights are on.

Green Low-Beams On Indicates the low-beam headlights are on.

Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been set to automatic and are
Blue
Beams On on.

Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been set to automatic and are
Grey
Beams Off off.

Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been set to automatic and are
Green
Beams On on.

Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been set to automatic and are
Grey
Beams Off off.

Taillights / Marker
Green Indicates the taillights, aka marker lamps, are on.
Lamps On

Table 3.9, Exterior-Lamps Telltale Lamps and Messages

3.11
 Instruments

Outside Ambient Temperature Icon

Weather
Related Pop-Up
Telltale Color Description
Message

Indicates ambient air temperature has

dropped below 34°F (1°C).
White Snowflake
Pay attention to road conditions and watch
for ice.

05/29/2019 f611753a

ICUC Caution
Table 3.10, Outside Ambient Temperature Icon

Application Icons
Telltale Color Description Related Information
The phone screen in the
infotainment section of
Indicates a phone is connected to the ICU and the ICU will also show an
Blue Active Phone Call
a call is active. active call, including the
number being called and
call length.
Indicates a software download is available.
Software Download For reasons of security and optimal vehicle A pop-up message will
Blue
Available functioning, software updates should be also appear.
quickly installed.
Table 3.11, ICU Application Icons

ICC5 Time and Date • Prognostics

Time and Date Time and Date Settings

Time and date are set automatically when the The following settings can be controlled under ’Time
vehicle is equipped with a tachograph. When a and Date:’ selecting a time zone, turning ’Automatic
vehicle is equipped with a tachograph only the Summer Time’ on or off, turning ’Summer Time’ on or
time zone can be changed. off, and setting the date and time format.

ICC5 time and alarm clock settings can be found ’Automatic Summer Time’ is another name for
under the Settings menu. automatic daylight saving time. If this is set to on
then the controls for ’Summer Time’ are unavailable.
The correct time and date is required for the
following features to work: Dates can be displayed as: DD.MM.YYYY, MM/DD/
YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD. Selection is made using
• Alarm clock either/or radio buttons.
• Navigation guidance with time-dependent traffic Time can be displayed in 12 AM/PM or 24 hour
routing format.
• Calculation of the expected time of arrival
• Maintenance

3.12
Instruments

Alarm Settings manages the integration of phone, smart phone and

media sources. Each corner of the instrument and
NOTE: The ability to set the alarm clock and infotainment display has a quick access icon for
timers is only available when the parking brake commonly used features. For an overview of menu
is engaged. category icons as well as quick access icons, see
Fig. 3.6.
Alarm Clock Controls and Features:
• Time of Day
NOTE: Screens may vary depending on vehicle
options. Some screens are accessible only
• Repeat when the vehicle is parked.
• Audio Source
General Information
• Light Alarm
Information and controls available on the ICC5
Tapping on a bar at the bottom of the screen in the instrument and infotainment (B-panel) display:
alarm clock menu switches between alarm clocks
and the sleep timers. If alarms have been set, the • Shortcut icons, statusline, and climate bar
corresponding icon in the bar indicates this with the • Gauges
number of active alarms shown inside a circle.
• Cab Controls and Information
Up to fifteen alarms can be shown in a carousel view
on the screen. They are sorted from the beginning of • Chassis Information
the day on the left and the end of the day on the • Lighting Controls
right. If less than fifteen alarms have been set, a
’Add Alarm’ icon will be available in carousel display • Navigation System [not available on the
at the far right. If fifteen alarms have been created, eCascadia]
the ’Add Alarm’ icon is not available.
• Phone Controls
New alarms are set to be ’On’ when created. Alarms
• Radio Controls
can be toggled off and on by pressing on an alarm
tile. An active alarm has a red line at the top of the • Media
alarm tile.
• Smartphone Controls [see phone controls]
If an alarm has been set to repeat, the selected days
of the week will be listed below the time. System Settings
The audio of an alarm can be set under ’Audio Select the gear icon to open the Settings menu.
Source.’ Options include up to 15 preset alarm Settings is also available within the Cab menu.
sounds and any available radio station.
If an alarm includes turning on lights, a light icon is ICC5 Touch Screen Operation
shown on the alarm tile at the bottom right. Wake up
lighting can be set to be turned on at 10% to 100% Tapping
brightness. IMPORTANT: All keyboard entries are locked
Alarms can be edited by pressing on the pencil icon when the parking brake is disengaged. Other
below the alarm tile. To delete an alarm, press on the touch screen options still function.
edit pencil icon and choose ’Delete.’
Tap the touch screen to:
ICC5 Instrument and • Select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol
or an entry.
Infotainment Screen Overview • Enter characters with keyboard by tapping on a
ICC5 Infotainment Screen character buttons.
The instrument and infotainment screen is a touch
screen; it displays charging information, instrument
gauges, and cab and chassis information. It also
provides access to lighting and radio controls and

3.13
 Instruments

1 2 3

5 4
06/278/2019 f611757
1. Home 3. Digital Switches 5. Settings
2. Status Line 4. Saved Favorites

Fig. 3.6, Infotainment Menu Options, Icons, Status Line - ICC5

Touching and Holding ICC5 Digital Instruments

Touch and hold to:
ICC5 Gauges
• Call up a global menu in the applications:
touch the touchscreen and hold until the The digital gauges shown in Fig. 3.7 can be
OPTIONS menu appears. accessed under the ’Gauges’ menu on the
infotainment display. They are informational only.
Single-Finger Swipe
1
Use a single-finger swipe to: 3
2 4
• Navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or
right.
• Scroll through screens.
• Select a menu item, icon, or entry.
08/07/2019 f611763
Touching, Holding and Moving 1. Gauge Screen Name 3. Gauge Name
Touch, hold, and move the finger to: 2. Gauge Icon 4. Gauge Value

• Change the value on a slider control: touch the Fig. 3.7, Example Gauge Screen - ICC5
touchscreen and move the finger to the left or
right. The default order of the gauge display can be
changed. Pressing on an existing gauge will cause a
popup window to appear with the option to either
Remove or Replace the gauge. Choosing Replace
will bring up a radio button list of all available gauges
from which to choose; replacing a gauge will move

3.14
Instruments

the first gauge into a different screen placement. Application Air Pressure Gauge
Removing a gauge removes the gauge from the
gauge screens. A removed gauge can be added An application air pressure gauge registers the air
back by pressing the Add or plus sign button. Doing pressure being used to apply the brakes. The gauge
so will cause a radio button list to appear listing the will not register air pressure until the foot brake pedal
gauges available to be added. is depressed or the trailer brake is applied.
Gauge units of measurements are controlled under
Settings which can be accessed under the Cab
Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
menu or by pressing the star menu icon in the lower The suspension air pressure gauge registers the air
left corner. pressure applied to the vehicle air suspension.
Moving between gauge screens can be
accomplished by pressing the gauge screen name at Trailer Application Air Pressure Gauge
the top of the screen. The trailer application air pressure registers the
In the ICC5, if a value measured by a digital gauge applied air pressure in the brake circuit.
exceeds the normal range, the gauge icon, display
bar graph color, and gauge value will change color to Trailer Suspension Air Pressure
amber to indicate caution or red to indicate danger. Gauge
See Fig. 3.8.
The trailer suspension air pressure gauge registers
the air pressure applied to the trailer air suspension.
1 2 3
Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges
Outside of the gauges screen, the ICC5 displays a
number of other digital gauges and instruments.

Battery Voltage
08/07/2019 f611764
There are two battery systems on the eCascadia: a
1. Red Gauge Icon 3. Red Gauge Value
2. Red Gauge Bar Graph
low-voltage (LV) system and a high-voltage (HV)
system.
Fig. 3.8, Gauge Caution & Warning Indicator Display - The right-hand side of the driver display screen
ICC5
shows the state of charge of the HV system.
Batter and eDrive Coolant Levels The LV charging system telltales appear in the upper
left corner of the driver display. A yellow telltale
There are two coolant systems on the eCascadia: indicates a low battery; a red telltale indicates a
the battery coolant and the eDrive coolant. The dangerously low charge.
coolant level sensors report the coolant levels as
either full or low. Speedometer
eAxle Oil Temperature Popups In the ICC5 the speedometer is shown on the left-
hand side of the driver display. The speedometer
The driver display will show a yellow caution window measure miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
if the gear box oil temperature is too high. (km/h), depending on the option selected in the
A red warning window will display on the driver system settings.
screen if the rotational direction of the oil pump is
unexpected. Primary and Secondary Air Gauges
Red warning windows will also display is the Primary and secondary air gauges are stacked at the
operation of the oil pump is limited or not operating. bottom center of the driver display. When the air
pressure drops too low, both the air pressure
measurement and the air pressure icon will change
color. A complete lack of air pressure will result in

3.15
 Instruments

only the icon being either amber (caution) or red The option to Set Pressure is available on the tire
(danger). pressure screen. Selecting this option allows you to
change default settings.
ICC5 Chassis Status Information
In addition to digital instruments and gauges,
instrument and infotainment screens provides access 1
to chassis status information such as:
• Tire pressure monitoring 2
3
• Axle gear and lock information
• Maintenance information and prompts
08/07/2019 f611761
• Diagnostic information and fault codes 1. Tire Temperature 3. Screen Indicator
2. Unit of Measurement
• List of active driver alerts
Fig. 3.10, TPMS: Tire Temperature- ICC5
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Selecting the temperature icon will show an image of
(TPMS) the vehicle on the screen showing the temperature of
The tire pressure monitoring system displays tire each tire. Tire temperature can be displayed in
pressure, temperature, and sensor status. Fahrenheit or Celsius. The unit of measure is
Maintaining correct tire pressure increases fuel displayed behind the rear left tire on the vehicle
economy. Sustained high tire temperature can cause image. Units of measure are set under Settings.
a tire to deteriorate, leading to tread separation and Tires on the truck image will change color if tire
blowouts. temperature is too high. Red indicates a condition
Tire Pressure has three submenu options: tire that may pose a threat to the vehicle. Amber
pressure, tire temperature, and sensor status. indicates a condition that may result in damage.
Selecting the tire icon image will display a vehicle Selecting the battery icon will show the battery
image on the screen showing the tire pressure for strength of each tire sensor.
each tire. Tire pressure can be displayed in psi or
bar units. The unit of measure is displayed behind If a sensor’s battery life is low, both the tire and the
the rear left tire on the vehicle image. See Fig. 3.9. sensor icon on the truck image will change color to
Units of measure are set under Settings. amber. If sensor battery status is critically low they
will become red. See Fig. 3.11.

2
1 1

4
2
08/07/2019 f611760
08/07/2019 f611762
1. Set Pressure button 4. Submenu Screen
2. Tire Pressure Value Indicator 1. Sensor Battery Icon 2. Screen Indicator
3. Units of Measurement
Fig. 3.11, TPMS: Sensor Status - ICC5
Fig. 3.9, TPMS: Tire Pressure - ICC5
Axles
Tires on the truck image will change color if tire
pressure is too high or too low based on factory This menu provides access to the axle locks status
settings. Red indicates a condition that may pose a screen showing engaged locks and allows the driver
threat to the control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a to lock or unlock the axles by touching the screen.
condition that may result in damage. See Fig. 3.10, For more information see Chapter 14 Drive Axles.

3.16
Instruments

Diagnostics that may result in damage to vehicle components or

derating of engine power. Grey is used for notices.
The Diagnostics screen communicates fault codes
and other diagnostic information about the vehicle. Instrument and Infotainment Screen
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity Controls
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a In addition to the features described above, the
condition that may result in damage to vehicle instrument and infotainment screen provides access
components or derating of engine power. Grey to a number of digital switches and ICC5 system
indicates a condition that may affect vehicle handling. settings. Under the Cab menu this includes:
• Digital Switches
Active Driver Alerts
• Lighting
The Active Driver Alerts screen stores the current
active alerts. • Settings

Alerts are color-coded to indicate severity. Red Digital Switches

indicates a condition that may pose a threat to
control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a condition

Example of Digital Switch Icons and Layout

Lane Departure Air Suspension Level

Active Traction Control Power Takeoff 1
Warning Up

Lane Keep Assist Air Suspension Level

Power Takeoff 2
Active Down
Table 3.12, Example of Digital Switch Icons

Digital switches can be used to turn different vehicle Exterior lighting

functions on or off. An indicator at the top of the
digital button shows the status of the switch. A red The exterior lighting screen presents an image of the
line indicates the switch has been selected. front of a eCascadia vehicle showing lights and
digital switches for those lights. Touching a switch
Lighting lights up the switch, activates the lights on the image
of the truck, and turns on that light on the truck itself;
The lighting menu provides controls for a set of touching the switch again turns all these lights off.
interior and exterior lights using the touch screen.
Touching the intelligent high-beam headlights control
at the bottom of the screen will change its status. For

3.17
 Instruments

this switch the status of On is indicated by a lighted Settings: Language

bar at the top of the icon.
Language options currently include English
When intelligent high-beam headlights are on, the (American), Francçais (Canadian), and Español
high-beam headlights will switch to low-beam (Mexican).
headlights when a vehicle approaches from the
opposite direction. They will switch back to high- Settings: Units
beam headlights when no vehicles are approaching
from the opposite direction. NOTE: Setting a Distance unit to either imperial
(miles) or metric (kilometers) will auto-populate
The intelligent headlights can also be controlled by the Consumption to the same system of
using the headlight switch and turn signal lever; see
measurement.
Chapter 4 Driver Controls for more information.
Touching the courtesy lighting icon will open a popup Units refers to units of measurement and are
showing the current lighting duration and allowing the selected using an either/or radio buttons in each
lighting duration to be adjusted. category.

Exterior lighting controlled by the rotary dial cannot Units are set for Speed (km/h or mph), Fuel
be controlled through the exterior light screen. Consumption (1/100km or mpg), and Distance
(kilometers or miles). Other units include:
Interior Lighting • Following Distance: either distance or time
The interior lighting menu shows an image of an • Pressure: either kPa or PSI
interior of a eCascadia cab. The digital switches for
interior lighting allow for the control of overhead, foot • Temperature: either Celsius or Fahrenheit
well, and sleeper lights.
Settings: Brightness
Touching any of the light icons on the screen will
lights up the digital switch, activate the lights on the Brightness levels for the instrument display,
interior image of the truck, and turn on those lights in infotainment display, and the dash can be adjusted
the truck itself. here using touch-screen slider controls.

All interior lights can be dimmed using the slider next Settings: Key Alert
to the light icon.
This setting turns the audible lock alert on or off.
All available lights in the cab can be turned off and
on by touching the Off button. Settings: Display Off and On
Entrance lighting can be controlled by the settings Selecting this setting turns the display off. Touching
icon. Touching the settings icon will open a popup anywhere on the display screen turns it on again.
window where the entrance lighting can be toggled
off or on and entrance light timing controls can be Settings: Controls
accessed. Choosing entrance light timing will be
open a slider that allows modification of the length of Controls provides the ability to change keyboards to
time the entrance light is on. accommodate different languages and scripts as well
as change the sensitivity levels of touch controls.
Settings Touch control settings include slow, medium, and
fast.
The settings menu allows you to choose system
Audible system feedback controls can also be
features such as display language, units of
accessed here as well as under audio settings.
measurement, and sound levels.
Tap on the settings (gear) icon in the lower left hand Settings: Audio
corner of the infotainment screen to access Settings.
Audio Settings control the volume of navigation and
Settings can also be accessed under the Cab menu.
traffic announcements, audible system feedback, and
NOTE: Settings options will change based on phone ringtone and speech volume.
the features installed on the vehicle.

3.18
Instruments

Audible system feedback setting choices include Active and authorized devices will have an options
normal, loud, and off. All other audio settings provide menu (opened by selecting the three dots to the right
touch-screen slider controls to set volume. of a device name) to manage device call logs,
contacts, and deauthorization.
Settings: Licence Activation
Up to two phones can be active and connected via
License Activation lists all activated software licences Bluetooth.
with activation and expiration dates.
Bluetooth
Settings: Reset
Bluetooth is a wireless technology standard for
The Reset option under Settings allows you to delete exchanging data over short distances, typically less
all data from the system. than 33 feet (10 m).

Driving Assistance Settings A phone connected via Bluetooth will disconnect from
the system when taken far enough away from the
The Driving Assistance menu is only available if at vehicle or turned off. It will automatically reconnect
least one driving assistant setting is available. when in range of an active system if it has not been
deauthorized.
The Driving Assistance menu in Settings allows you
to turn available features on or off and/or change Device Manager
setting parameters.
Under the Device Manager menu you can:
Possible Driving Assistance menu options include:
• Connect a new device
• Side Guard Assist
• See a list of active and authorized devices
• Active Lane Assist
• Control transmission volume
• Traffic Sign Display
• Control reception volume
• eCoast
• Deauthorize a device
Climate Control Information The last three options can be accessed by selecting
NOTE: See Chapter 4 Driver Controls for the three dots to right of the device name. Both the
detailed climate control panel operating reception and transmission volume consist of a slider
instructions. control with a range of -2 to 2.

Climate control information will briefly appear on the Connecting and Disconnecting a
Instrument and Infotainment display whenever the
physical climate controls are adjusted. Changes to
Phone Using Bluetooth®
the following controls should cause the climate bar to One can connect or authorize a mobile device such
appear: recirculation settings, fan speed, air as a smartphone to interact with the ICC5
conditioning status, temperature setting, and blower infotainment system through the Phone menu.
selection.
Up to fifteen mobile phones can be authorized at a
time.
ICC5 Infotainment Controls
NOTE: The Smartphone menu is for connecting
Phone Connection Overview a device via MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ or
Connectivity Apple CarPlay™.
Connectivity settings control the on or off status of Requirements:
the following features: • Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth • The phone is visible to Bluetooth.
• NFC (Near Field Communication) • Bluetooth is activated on the infotainment
• Wi-Fi system.

3.19
 Instruments

1
4
2 3 5 6

07/30/2019 f611769
1. Recirculation Status
2. Fan Speed
3. Air Conditioning Status
4. Temperature Settings
5. Blower Selection
6. Sleeper Override
Fig. 3.12, Informational Climate Bar

Activating Bluetooth® 5. Select the My Device Was Not Found message

or press the reload icon at the top right to have
NOTE: An iPhone may be connected to the the vehicle rescan for devices.
infotainment system via Apple CarPlay.
6. When a device is found, the name of that device
1. Open Settings by selecting the gear shortcut icon will appear on the screen in addition to the
in the lefthand corner of the screen. message My Device Was Not Found. Select the
2. Select Connectivity. device name.
7. A pop-up will appear asking for verification of a
3. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on.
passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The
4. Make sure Bluetooth is active on the phone and device is authorized and connected.
the phone is visible via Bluetooth.
NOTE: The phone will automatically reconnect
Connecting a Phone Using Bluetooth® to the system when in range until deauthorized
either in the ICC5 infotainment system or on the
Older phones may require that an authorization phone itself.
code be manually entered on the mobile phone
and into the infotainment system. The Phone Menu
1. Open the Device Manager. Once a phone is authorized and connected, a mobile
2. Select Connect Device. phone menu for that phone is available.

3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle In addition, the call list and contacts of the primary
searches for the device. phone are loaded and accessible.

4. If the connection fails, the message My Device The phone menu provides a search function for the
Was Not Found will appear. Verify the Activating primary phone’s contacts, a number pad for calling
Bluetooth requirements have been met. people not in the contact list, and access to
Bluetooth and phone specific settings.

3.20
Instruments

Connecting a Second Phone 2. Select the gear icon to access the setting for the
phone. The Options screen appears.
Connecting a second phone follows the same
process as connecting the initial phone, however the 3. Choose which of the following options to change:
call list and contacts of the second phone are not • Synchronize Contacts Automatically
loaded.
• Synchronize contacts: this options is only
1. Open the Device Manager. available if Synchronize Contacts
2. Select Connect Device. Automatically is turned off.
3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle • Delete Contacts: deletes all contacts
searches for the device. downloaded from the active phone. Only
available if Synchronize Contacts
4. When a device is found, the name of that device Automatically is turned off.
will appear on the screen in addition to the
message My Device Was Not Found. Select the • Delete Call List: deletes the call list
device name. downloaded from the active phone.
5. A pop up will appear asking for verification of a • Name Format: names may be displayed as
passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The Last, First; Last First; or First Last.
device is authorized and connected. • Bluetooth: Access Device Manager to
NOTE: The phone will now automatically connect a new phone, deauthorize a
reconnect to the system when in range until phone, and control a phone’s transmission
deauthorized either in the ICC5 infotainment and reception volume.
system or on the phone itself. Disconnecting a Phone
Two Phone Mode A phone may disconnect from the system for the
following reasons:
In two phone mode, the primary mobile phone can
access the phone’s contact and call list on the • It moves out of range
infotainment system and make outgoing calls and
• It is shut off or otherwise loses power
receive incoming calls; the secondary mobile phone
can receive incoming calls. The phone should automatically reconnect when
on and in range of an active system it is
Switching Primary and Secondary authorized to connect to. To cancel this
Phones automatic pairing, the phone must be
NOTE: When the secondary phone becomes deauthorized either on the system or on the
the primary phone, that phone’s contacts and phone.
call list are loaded into the system. The previous
primary phone, now the secondary phone, has Reconnecting a Phone
no data accessible on the system. If a phone does not automatically reconnect to an
authorized vehicle, do the following:
1. Open the Phone menu.
1. Open the Phone menu.
2. Select the icon showing two phones. The primary
and secondary phone are switched. 2. Select Connect Device or, if this is not available,
select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices
Changing Phone Specific Settings menu opens.
NOTE: You can only change phone functions on 3. Find the phone under Authorized Devices and
the primary mobile phone. select the phone name. The vehicle will connect
with the phone.
1. Open the Phone menu. The primary active
phone’s name should display in the upper left. NOTE: if the connection fails, double check that
Bluetooth is active on the phone and the phone
is visible to Bluetooth.

3.21
 Instruments

Replacing a Phone Using a Mobile Phone

Replacing a mobile phone is the same process as General Phone Information
connecting a phone.
Calls may disconnect in the following situations:
To deauthorize the mobile phone being replaced, see
Deauthorizing a Phone Through the Phone Menu • Insufficient network coverage
in this chapter. • Lack of free voice channels when you travel
into a new transmitter/receiver area (cell)
Deauthorizing a Phone Through the
Phone Menu • Phone SIM card is not compatible with the
available network
Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or
secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone • The second SIM card of a Twincard mobile
menu or through system Settings. phone is already logged onto the network

1. Open the Phone menu. In addition, voice quality may fluctuate. The
infotainment system supports high quality calls in HD
2. Select the Bluetooth icon at the bottom of the Voice®, but this depends on HD Voice® being
screen. The Bluetooth Devices menu opens supported by both the mobile phone in use and the
showing a list of active and authorized phones. network.
3. If necessary, swipe down the screen to see a list
of all authorized devices.
Setting Reception and Transmission
Volume
4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
deauthorize. The list of options available for that NOTE: A phone must be active to access these
phone displays. settings.
5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for This setting helps ensure optimal speech reception
verification. and transmission quality.
6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized. 1. Open the Phone menu.
2. Select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices
Deauthorizing a Phone Through Settings menu opens.
Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or 3. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone access that phone’s options.
menu or through Settings.
4. Select Reception Volume and set the volume.
1. Open the Settings menu by selecting the
shortcut icon of a gear in the lower left corner. 5. Select the back arrow.
The system settings menu opens.
6. Select Transmission Volume and set the volume.
2. Select Connectivity. The Wi-Fi & Bluetooth menu
7. Return to the main phone screen by pressing the
opens.
back arrow or selecting the physical phone
3. Select Device Manager. The Bluetooth Devices button at the bottom of the infotainment screen.
menu opens showing a list of active and
authorized phones. Searching for a Contact and Making a
4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to Call
deauthorize. The list of options available for that NOTE: A phone must be active to access these
phone opens. settings.
5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for 1. Open the Phone menu.
verification.
2. Select the magnifying glass icon for Search. A
6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized. keyboard opens.

3.22
Instruments

3. Start entering the first or last name of a contact Ending or Rejecting a Call
or a partial or full phone number. As you type a
number will appear next to the icon for the There are two ways to end or reject a call:
results list showing how many phone contacts • Press the End Call button on the right-hand
have that series of characters. OFN steering wheel pod.
4. When the number is small enough, select the • Press the end call button on the infotainment
results list icon to the right of the search box. A screen.
results list appears.
5. Select the desired contact. The contact card Putting an Active Call on Hold and
appears. Taking if Off Hold
6. Select the desired contact phone number. A call NOTE: The function and behavior of taking calls on
is placed. and off hold and accepting and rejecting waiting calls
can vary depending on the phone, phone plan, and
Starting Phone Voice Recognition network provider. If functions and behavior vary from
these directions, consult the manufacturer’s operating
NOTE: When in two phone mode, the phone instructions and provider information.
voice recognition is only available on the
primary phone. A call on hold can be ended by selecting the
End Call button on either the right-hand OFN
Press and hold the Voice button on the right-hand steering wheel pod or the infotainment screen.
OFN steering wheel pod for at least one second.
Phone voice recognition is now available. 1. Select the active call number. The call is put on
hold.
Ending Phone Voice Recognition 2. Select the active call number. The call is taken
Press either the Mute Volume or End Call button on off hold.
the right-hand OFN steering wheel pod. Mobile
phone voice recognition has ended. Accepting a Waiting Call in Single Phone
Mode
Making a Call
If there is an incoming call while a call is being
1. Open the Phone menu. The primary phone menu conducted, a screen notification is shown. Depending
appears. on the mobile phone and network provider, you may
2. Select the number pad icon or select Contacts or also hear a sound.
Call List menu. Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right-
2.1 If using the number pad, enter a number. hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment
Select the green phone receiver icon. The screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous
call is made. call has been put on hold.

2.2 If using the Contact’s menu, select a Accepting a Waiting Call in Two Phone
contact. The contacts information is Mode
shown. Select a phone number. The call is
made. If two phone mode is active and the second call is
incoming on the secondary phone, you may hear a
2.3 If using the Call List menu, select the signal in addition to getting a screen notification and
phone number. The call is made. hearing a sound.
Accepting a Call NOTE: Accepting a incoming waiting call on the
secondary phone while in two phone mode with
There are two ways to accept a call: a call on hold on the primary phone, will end the
• Press the Accept Call button on the right-hand active call on the secondary phone.
OFN steering wheel pod.
Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right-
• Select the accept call button on the hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment
infotainment screen.

3.23
 Instruments

screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous 4. Select the radio button for your choice of name
call has been on hold format. The format of the names in the phone
contact list is changed.
Switching Between Calls
Turning Off Synchronizing Phone
If there is an active call and another call connection
has been established, there are two ways to switch Contacts
back and forth between calls: Default system behavior is to have contacts on the
• Select the Switch Calls icon of two arrows primary phone automatically synchronize.
pointed in opposite directions on the 1. Open the Phone menu.
infotainment screen.
2. If in two phone mode, make sure the phone you
• Select the waiting call. The active call is put on want to synchronize is the primary phone.
hold. The chosen call is active.
3. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the phone
NOTE: On some mobile phones, ending the screen. The Options menu opens.
active call will automatically take the call waiting
4. Move the radio button to turn off Synchronize
off hold.
Contacts Automatically. Contacts will no longer
be synchronized for this phone.
Functions Available During a Call
The following functions are available during an active Deleting All Contacts for the Primary
call: Phone
• The microphone: selecting the microphone NOTE: A phone must be connected to the
turns it on or off. infotainment system to access these settings.
• The number pad: can be used to send Dual Deleting all contacts for the primary phone does not
Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF) tones. delete the contacts off the phone nor does it delete
• The Transfer to Phone icon: transfers an active any of the contacts saved to Favorites. The contacts
hands-free call over to the phone. saved to Favorites can still be accessed and used
from the Favorites menu as long as the phone is
Phone Contacts and Call List connected to the infotainment system.
Deauthorizing the phone also does not delete any
Importing Phone Contacts contacts saved to the Favorites menu. They do,
Phone contacts of the primary phone are however, become unavailable for use.
automatically imported when a phone is initially Synchronize Contacts Automatically must be turned
connected to the system. off to delete contacts. As long as Synchronize
Contacts Automatically remains off, the phone can
Deleting all contacts and turning off Synchronize
disconnect and reconnect to the system without
Contacts Automatically without deauthorizing the contacts being reloaded.
phone will cause the phone to reconnect to the
system without re-importing the contacts list. 1. Open the Phone menu.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen
Changing the Format of Contacts’ Names for the connected phone. The Options menu
This does not change the format of contacts’ opens.
names on the phone. 3. Turn off Synchronize Contacts Automatically.
1. Open the Phone menu. 4. Select Delete Contacts. A message asking for
2. verification appears.
Select the gear icon on the bottom of the primary
phone’s screen. The Options menu opens. 5. Select Yes. All contact data for the primary
3. Select Name Format. Three name formats phone is deleted off the infotainment system
appear: Last Name, First Name; Last Name First except for contacts saved to Favorites.
Name; First Name Last Name.

3.24
Instruments

Deleting a Phone’s Call List 2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The
Options menu for the favorite will open.
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the
infotainment system to access these settings. 3. Select Rename. A keyboard will appear.

Deleting the call list from the infotainment system 4. Type in the new name for the favorite. Select
does not delete the call list off the phone. OK. The favorite has been renamed.

If a phone disconnects and then reconnects to the Moving a Phone Favorite

infotainment system, the phone call list will be
reloaded. The order of the favorites menu can be changed to
place frequently accessed favorites on the first
1. Open the Phone menu. screen.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen 1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the
for the connected phone. The Options menu Favorites menu.
opens.
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The
3. Select Delete Call List. A message asking for Options menu for the favorite will open.
verification appears.
3. Select Move. The favorites screen will change
4. Select Yes. The call list for the primary phone is appearance. A check mark will appear over the
deleted. chosen favorite and arrows will appear on each
side of it.
Saving a Contact as a Favorite
4. Press on the arrows to move the favorite to
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the either the left or right until it’s in the chosen
infotainment system to access these settings. position.
1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the 5. Select the check mark on top of the favorite. The
primary phone appears. favorite’s new position is saved.
2. Open the Contacts. The phone’s list of contacts Deleting a Phone Favorite
appears.
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the
3. Select the contact you want to add to the Favorites menu.
Favorites menu.
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The
4. Press and hold on the phone number. The Options menu for the favorite will open.
Options menu for the contact appears.
3. Select Delete. The favorite is deleted.
5. Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created.
Deleting All Phone Favorites
Saving a Call List Number as a Favorite
If you delete the phone’s contact list, none of
1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the
the contacts saved to the Favorites menu will be
primary phone appears.
deleted. The only way to delete all phone
2. Open the Call List. The phone’s call list appears. contacts saved to the Favorites menu is to
3. Press and hold the phone number you want to delete each phone contact favorite individually
add to the Favorites menu. The Options menu or reset the Favorites menu.
for the number appears.
4.
Radio
Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created.
Opening the Radio icon opens the radio home
Renaming a Phone Favorite screen with four options across the top: SiriusXM,
FM, AM, and WX.
Favorites
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the
Favorites menu.

3.25
 Instruments

Searching for an AM/FM Radio Station 3. Select Category. A list of station categories
appears.
Searching for an AM/FM radio stations by name
is not currently available. 4. Select the desired category. The Category list of
stations in that category appears.
1. Select either FM or AM at the top of the Radio
menu. 5. Select a station. The station starts playing.

2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard Browsing SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
with a search bar opens. Stations
3. Press the 123 to access the number pad. The 1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
keyboard changes to numbers and symbols.
2. Select with the list icon at the bottom of the
4. Enter the first two or three digits of the desired screen. The SiriusXM menu opens.
station frequency ID. The number of results
shows next to the results list icon to the right. 3. Select SiriusXM. A current station/channel list
appears.
5. Select the results list icon. A list of radio
frequencies displays, i.e. 89.0 MHz, 89.1 MHz, 4. Select the desired station. The station starts
89.2 MHz, etc. playing.
6. Select the desired frequency. The radio is set to Adding a Radio Channel to Favorites
that frequency.
Up to twenty different items can be saved to the
NOTE: Selecting the arrows to the left of the Favorites menu.
station icon identification or album artwork will
1. Open the Radio icon.
page through the different stations available, in
any, at this frequency. 2. Navigate to the desired radio station.
3. Press and hold on the station icon or current
SiriusXM® Radio
album artwork. The Options menu will open.
Search options include searching for a station by
4. Select Save as Favorite. The station is now a
name, category, or browsing the complete list of
available stations. favorite.

Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite Deleting a Radio Station Favorite

Radio Stations by Name While Global Favorites are created inside
1.
individual applications, they are deleted, moved,
Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
or renamed inside the Global Favorites menu.
2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard For directions, please see the Favorites section
with a search bar appears. in this chapter.
3. Start typing the name of a known station. The
number of stations with that word appears to the Setting a Radio Station Preset
right next the results list icon. The infotainment system can save up to 12 radio
4. Select the results list icon. The list of results presets.
appears. 1. Open the Radio icon.
5. Select a station. The station starts playing. 2. Navigate to the desired radio station.
Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite 3. Press and hold on the station icon or current
Radio Station by Category album artwork. The Options menu will open.

1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu. 4. Select Add to presets. The station is now a
preset.
2. Select the list icon at the bottom of the screen.
The SiriusXM menu opens.

3.26
Instruments

Saving a Radio Station Preset as a system consists of a nationwide network of radio

Favorite stations broadcasting official weather warnings,
watches, advisories, forecasts and other non-weather
A radio station can be saved as both a preset and a related hazard information including news on natural
favorite. disasters (earthquakes, avalanches, floods),
1. environmental hazards (oil spills, chemical releases),
Open the Radio icon.
and public safety messages (AMBER alerts, network
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen outages). All services operate 24 hours a day, 7 days
to navigate to the desired preset. a week.
3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu The average range for reception from a transmitter is
opens. approximately 40 miles (60 km). The National
Weather Service operates more than 1000
4. Select Save as Favorite. The preset is now also transmitters.
saved under the Favorites menu.

Moving a Radio Preset Displaying AM/FM/WX Emergency

Warnings
Radio station presets can be reordered to move
those more frequently accessed to the first screen. 1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the AM,
FM, or WX radio screen. The Options menu for
1. Open the Radio icon. that application opens.
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen 2. Turn on or off Display Emergency Warnings.
to navigate to the desired preset.
3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu Sound System Settings
opens.
Adjusting the Volume
4. Select Move. A checkmark appears over the
preset with arrows to each side. Volume can be increased or decreased by pressing
the —VOL or +VOL buttons below the infotainment
5. Press the arrows to move the preset into the screen or by using the VOL+ or VOL— buttons on
desired order. the OFN steering wheel switch pod.
6. Select the checkmark over the preset. The
preset is now saved in its new location. Muting and Unmuting the Radio
The global Radio menu has an icon of a speaker
Deleting a Radio Preset with a line through it. Press this icon to mute the
1. Open the Radio icon. radio. The radio mutes. The icon image changes to a
speaker playing music.
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
to navigate to the desired preset. To unmute the radio select the icon of the speaker
playing music. The radio starts playing. The icon
3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu image changes to a speaker with a line through it.
opens.
4. Select Delete. The preset is now deleted.
Muting and Unmuting Media Devices
To mute or unmute audio playback from media
Weather Radio (WX) devices you can increase or decrease the volume or
Weather Radio displays as WX in the top radio halt media playback.
menu. Play of media devices can me halted via the Media
Weather radio channels WX1 through WX7, menu by selecting the pause button. Restarting
corresponding to frequencies 162.400 MHz though media playback may be done by selecting the play
162.550 MHz, are the standard weather radio button the Media menu.
channels used by NOAA Weather Radio in the Bluetooth streaming may require restarting playback
United States, Weatheradio Canada/Radiométéo on the connected device.
Canada in Canada, and SARMEX in Mexico. Each

3.27
 Instruments

Accessing Sound Settings 3. Select Move. The selected favorite now has a
checkmark over it and arrows at each side.
Sound settings are global settings for all audio
sources and provide access to the equalizer and 4. Press on either the right or left arrow to move
balance controls as well as the on/off controls for the favorite into the desired position.
automatic volume amplification. 5. Select the checkmark. The favorite has been
1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the screen saved in its new position.
in an audio application. The Options menu for
that application opens. Deleting Favorites
2. Select Sound. The Sound menu opens. 1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the
Favorites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
3. Select the sound setting to manipulate. The
Equalizer menu or Balance menu opens. 2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
Options menu appears.
4. Select and move the control along the slider(s)
available. The sound settings have been 3. Select Delete. The favorite is now deleted.
changed.
Deleting All Favorites
Favorites 1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the
The Favorites menu offers quick access to frequently Favorites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
used phone numbers and radio stations. It can be 2. Select the word Reset at the bottom of the
accessed by selecting the star shortcut icon at the Favorites screen. The Reset verification pop-up
bottom right of the infotainment screen. will appear.
Favorites are created from inside different 3. Select Yes. All favorites are deleted.
applications. For directions on saving a phone
contact to the Favorites menu, see Saving a Media
Contact as a Favorite in this chapter. For directions
on saving a radio station to the Favorites menu, see The vehicle infotainment system is capable of playing
Adding a Radio Channel to Favorites in this music from a phone, USB drive, or other device. The
chapter. vehicle has two USB2 ports to connect devices.
Devices can also be connected to the system via
It is possible to create up to twenty favorites.
Bluetooth.
Renaming Favorites If an authorized phone is connected to the system
via Bluetooth when the Media menu is opened, the
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the
infotainment system should automatically start
Favorites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
streaming that music.
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
Options menu appears. Playing Audio Off a Phone or Other
3. Select Rename. A keyboard appears.
Device
4. Enter the new name. Select OK. The favorite has Selecting a different audio source than the one active
been renamed. turns off the music. You may need to restart the
music on the device when returning to the original
Moving Favorites audio source to get the music to play.

Favorites can be reordered to move the most popular Bluetooth audio functions are not available if an
to the first screen of the Favorites menu. Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, or MirrorLink
session is active.
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the
Favorites menu. Saved favorites are displayed. 1. Open the Media menu.
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The 2. Select the audio source: Bluetooth, USB1, or
Options menu appears. USB2.

3.28
Instruments

3. If necessary, select the music to play. Music

starts playing through the vehicle speakers.

Smartphone
NOTE: Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, and
MirrorLink should not be used for navigation for
a truck or bus as both lack the ability to take
vehicle-based route restrictions into account.
Apple CarPlay™
Apple CarPlay allows a driver to use an iPhone to
make calls, send and receive messages, listen to
music, and get directions.
Apple CarPlay can connect to the system via a
USB2 cable or Bluetooth.

Android Auto™
Android Auto allows the driver to use an Android
phone to make calls, send and receive messages,
get information, listen to music, and get directions.
Android Auto requires that a smartphone be
connected to the system via a USB2 cable.

MirrorLink®
MirrorLink allows a driver to use any MirrorLink
enabled smart phone to get directions, listen to
music, and use smart phone applications.
MirrorLink uses huge icons that allow for the control
of smart phone features without getting distracted
from the task of driving.

3.29
 4
Driver Controls
Multifunctional Stalk Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Emergency High-Voltage Disconnect Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Horn Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Trailer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Driver Controls

Multifunctional Stalk Switch

eAxle 2-Speed Transmission Direction
Function
A B
Use the eAxle transmission direction function on the
switch to select drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse (R).
See Fig. 4.1, ref. A.

Driving Program Function

The driving program modes of Economy, Range, and
Performance can be selected using the driving
program function on the multifunctional stalk switch.
See Fig. 4.1, ref. B. See Chapter 10, under Driving
Modes and Energy Efficiency, for details.
D
Gear Selection Function
Push the lever away from you to request a downshift, (−)
or pull the lever toward you to request an upshift.
See Fig. 4.1, ref. C and D. See Chapter 13 for more
information on the eAxle 2-speed transmission. C (+)
05/03/2022 f270163c
See Table 4.1 for a description of control functionality.
A. Rotate direction switch to select drive (D), neutral
(N), or reverse (R).
B. Short press to switch between available driving
modes. Long press to switch between manual and
automatic mode
C. Pull for upshift (+) request.
D. Push for downshift (-) request.
Fig. 4.1, eAxle 2-Speed Transmission Shift Control

Functionality, eAxle 2-Speed Transmission Shift Control

Function/Switch Action/Position Request
Direction D Forward gears
N Neutral
R Reverse gear
Mode Short press Switch between available driving modes
Long press Switch between manual and automatic mode
Gear Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
Short push on the lever Downshift, single gear
Table 4.1, Functionality, eAxle 2-Speed Transmission Shift Control

Recuperative Braking Function braking telltale shown in Fig. 4.3 appears on the
driver display. See Chapter 11 for more information
The multifuntional stalk switch is also used to regarding recuperative braking.
activate recuperative braking. Select position one
through three, as shown in Fig. 4.2. The recuperative

4.1
 Driver Controls

Exterior Lighting Controls

0 Exterior lamps may be controlled by vehicle inputs or
switches or both. Some lamps only function when
other lamps are on.
1 Dash-mounted switches are backlit to illuminate both
the text and icon on the switch. Press the upper half
of the switch to turn the desired lamp(s) on or off.
2
Exterior Lights
Headlights
3 The headlight switch is a rotary switch located to the
left of the steering column, above the ignition switch.
05/03/2022 f270164b
See Fig. 4.5.
0. Off 2. Medium
1. Low 3. High Automatic Headlights
Fig. 4.2, Multifuntional Stalk Switch Positions, The ’A’ mark on the headlight switch stands for
Recuperative Braking automatic. If the headlight switch is set to automatic,
all exterior lights and the low-beam headlights will
illuminate when the outside light decreases to a pre-
set level. This level is measured by the rain-light
sensor mounted at the top center of the windshield.

High-Beam Headlights
04/22/2022 f612065
NOTE: The keyswitch must be ON for the high-
Fig. 4.3, Recuperative Braking Telltale beam headlights to work.
With the low-beam headlights on, push the turn-
Emergency High-Voltage signal lever shown in Fig. 4.6 toward the hood to
Disconnect Button turn the high-beam headlights on. When the high-
beam headlights are on, a blue telltale illuminates on
The driver may need to shut down the high-voltage the instrument cluster.
system in case of fire, submersion, accident, or other
emergency. To turn off the high-beam headlights, pull the lever to
the middle position.
Pressing the red emergency high-voltage disconnect
button shown in Fig. 4.4, also called the eStop To momentarily flash the high-beam headlights while
button, immediately disables the high-voltage system the low-beam headlights are on, pull the lever
by stopping the flow of power to and from the high- towards you.
voltage batteries.
Intelligent High-Beam Headlights
The eStop button is surrounded by a yellow switch
guard to protect it from being inadvertently pressed. The intelligent high-beam headlight feature activates
Affixing a lock through the yellow switch guard stops when the headlight switch is in the ’A’ position and
the red button from popping out after it is the turn signal lever is pushed away from the driver
intentionally pressed. in the high-beam position.

To release the button and resume the flow of power, When a vehicle approaches from the opposite
remove any attached lock and spin the button to direction, the rain/light sensor registers their
either the left or right. headlights and deactivates the high-beam headlights
and activates the low-beam headlights.

4.2
Driver Controls

2
6

1 3 4 5
03/21/2022 f612025
1. Trailer Brake Lever 4. Parking Brake Knob
2. Hazard Warning Light Switch 5. Emergency High-Voltage Disconnect Button
3. Trailer Air Supply Valve Knob 6. Power Outlet
Fig. 4.4, eCascadia Lower Dash Controls

3
2 4
4
5 1

1
3 2

08/28/2018 f611525 02/17/2017 f611264

1. Fog Lights (optional)—Activate by pulling the switch 1. High-Beam Headlight 3. Windshield Washer
out when the marker lights or headlights are on. Controls Switch
2. Automatic Headlights 2. Windshield Wiper 4. Turn Signal
3. Off Switch
4. Marker Lights
5. Headlights Fig. 4.6, Steering Column-Mounted Turn Signal Lever

Fig. 4.5, Headlight Switch Daytime running lights are mandatory for vehicles
domiciled in Canada. Vehicles domiciled in any other
The intelligent high-beam headlights activate when location may have an optional override switch as
there are no vehicles approaching from the opposite shown in Fig. 4.7. This is a momentary switch that
direction. enables the driver to deactivate the DRL.

Daytime Running Lights Turn Signals

The vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights The turn-signal lever is mounted on the left-hand
(DRL). These are automatically activated when the side of the steering column. Pulling the turn-signal
keyswitch is ON and the parking brake is released. lever up activates the right-turn signal; pushing it
The DRL turn off when the parking brake is applied down activates the left-turn signal.
or the headlights are turned on.

4.3
 Driver Controls

DRL 1
OFF
2
05/19/2020 f611826

Fig. 4.7, Daytime Running Lights Override Dash Switch

When a turn signal is activated, the directionally

equivalent turn signal telltale light flashes on the 09/27/2021 f547634
instrument panel. 1. Hazard Warning Lights Switch
2. eStop Button
The lever is self-canceling, meaning it automatically
returns to the neutral position when the steering Fig. 4.8, Hazard Warning Dash Switch
wheel returns to the straight-ahead position after a
turn. Marker Interrupt Switch
The lever is also a combination turn-signal, A marker interrupt switch is located in the left-hand
windshield wiper/washer switch, and high beam switch pod of the steering wheel. See Fig. 4.9.
headlight control unit. See Fig. 4.6. Pressing it temporarily flashes the marker lamps.
Backup Lights 3
2
Backup lights activate only when the vehicle is in 1
reverse, and are designed to be used when backing
up in low light conditions.

Hazard Warning Lights

The hazard warning light switch is located on the
dash switch panel. See Fig. 4.8. The hazard lights
can be activated regardless of the keyswitch position.
To activate the hazard lights, press the center of the
switch once.
All the turn signals on the vehicle and trailer, as well
as the turn signal indicators in the ICU, flash 6 5 A 4
simultaneously when the hazard lamps are activated. 05/03/2022 f612076a
The switch will blink at the same rate that the hazard A. Menu Button—Press to access display menus. Use
lamps flash. a finger to swipe left or right to move between
Press the hazard warning light switch again to turn screens
the lamps off. 1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
2. Back Button
Marker Lamps 3. Quick Access System Settings
4. Marker Interrupt
To turn the marker lamps on, turn the headlight 5. Cancel Cruise Control
switch clockwise past the off position. See Fig. 4.5. 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set

Fig. 4.9, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Pod - ICC5

4.4
Driver Controls

Fog Lamps Dash-Mounted Brake Controls

Fog lamps are designed to reduce glare in foggy NOTE: See Chapter 11 Brake Systems for
conditions. The marker lamps or headlights must be detailed information about brake systems.
on in order to turn the LED fog lamps on. Pull the
headlight switch out to activate them. Parking Brake Control Valve
Utility Lamps The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the
Utility lamps can be flush-mounted on the back of the parking brake valve. See Fig. 4.12. Pull the knob out
cab and swivel-mounted on the side extenders. to apply both the tractor and the trailer spring parking
Press the upper half of the switch, as shown in brakes. Push both the parking brake and the trailer
Fig. 4.10 to turn the utility lamps on or off. air supply knobs in to release the tractor and trailer
spring parking brakes. Before the spring parking
When the utility lamps are on, a red indicator light in brakes can be released, the air pressure in either air
the utility light switch is illuminated. brake system must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa).
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pull the parking brake valve out to apply the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.

1
2

UTLY
LIGHT

05/09/2022 f611827 02/02/2017 f610291

Fig. 4.10, Utility Light Dash Switch 1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)
2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
Pretrip Light Test Fig. 4.12, Brake Valve Control Knobs
The pretrip light test allows the driver to walk around
the vehicle to verify all exterior lights are working Trailer Air Supply Valve
properly. A pretrip light test switch exists on both the The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
key fob and the dash, shown in Fig. 4.11. air supply valve, which charges the trailer air supply
Pressing either switch causes the vehicle’s exterior system and releases the trailer spring parking
lights to come on and go off in a set sequence. brakes. See Fig. 4.12.
Pressing either switch again, stops the sequence. After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in the air system is at least
65 psi (448 kPa), push the trailer air supply valve
knob in (and leave it in) to charge the trailer air
supply system and release the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pull the trailer air supply valve out before
disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle
without a trailer.
LIGHT
TEST Trailer Brake Lever
The trailer brake lever, shown in Fig. 4.13, is used to
05/09/2022 f611436
apply the trailer service brakes without applying the
Fig. 4.11, Pretrip Light Test Dash Switch truck or tractor service brakes. Move the lever down
to apply the trailer brakes; move the lever up to

4.5
 Driver Controls

release the trailer brakes. The lever will automatically

return to the up position when it is released. The NOTICE
lever can be partially or fully applied, but in any
partially on position it will be overridden by a full The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
application of the service brake pedal. under specific slippery conditions that require
momentary increased wheel spin. Using this
option for an extended period of time may
damage the vehicle brake system.

ATC
SPIN

03/02/2016 f611333
02/03/2017 f610591
Fig. 4.14, ATC SPIN Dash Switch
Fig. 4.13, Trailer Brake Lever
Hill Start Aid Override Switch
Antilock Braking System+
The eCascadia is equipped with a Hill Start Aid
The Meritor™ WABCO® Antilock Braking System+ (HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
(ABS+) passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all while on steep grades and to allow for a controlled
times, and controls wheel speed during emergency launch. HSA delays the release of the service brakes
stops or wheel lock situations. until enough torque is available to begin moving the
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully vehicle forward, for a maximum of 3 seconds. HSA is
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a on by default. It can be turned off by pressing and
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the releasing the HSA override switch on the dash. See
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS+ will control all Fig. 4.15.
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
The ABS+ is designed to communicate with a trailer
ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result
in the illumination of the trailer ABS lamp during
vehicle start-up and fault detection. The trailer ABS
lamp will not illuminate unless a compatible trailer is
HSA
connected to the tractor. OFF
Vehicles with ABS+ have Automatic Traction Control
(ATC). On these vehicles, the ATC system 04/18/2016 f611406
automatically limits wheel spin during reduced-
traction situations. In normal braking applications, the Fig. 4.15, Hill Start Aid Override Switch
standard air brake system is in effect.
If equipped, pressing the ATC SPIN switch shown in Horn Control
Fig. 4.14 shuts ATC off and allows drive wheel spin.
Pressing the switch again, or cycling the ignition key, Electric Horn
will cycle the system back to normal operation. The eCascadia is equipped with an electric horn.
Activate the horn by pressing down on the center of
the steering wheel pad.

4.6
Driver Controls

The electric horn will operate regardless of the

position of the key.
Trailer Controls
The horn will sound for the duration of the pad being Trailer Auxiliary Switch
pressed, up to 60 seconds. If equipped, the trailer auxiliary switch energizes an
optional circuit that allows the trailer electrical system
Suspension Controls to draw power for functions such as internal lights
and battery charging for lift gates.
Air Suspension Height Control Switch
Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer
auxiliary function. The switch light illuminates when
NOTICE the switch is on.
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground Press the bottom of the switch to turn the trailer
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with auxiliary function off. See Fig. 4.17.
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from re-inflating.
The air suspension height control switch is used to
adjust the vehicle height to aid in coupling or
uncoupling from a trailer. See Fig. 4.16.
Pressing the upper part of the switch, toward TRLR
’LOWER’ deflates the air springs to lower the rear of AUX
the vehicle. A red LED in the switch is illuminated
when the suspension is deflated. 04/18/2016 f611408
Pressing the lower part of the switch, toward
’NORMAL,’ causes the air springs inflate to raise the Fig. 4.17, Trailer Auxiliary Dash Switch
rear of the vehicle to normal ride height.
Fifth Wheel Controls
LOWER
Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
NOTICE
Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
SUSP
HGT while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
cause damage to the fifth wheel, the kingpin, the
NORMAL cab or trailer, and ultimately to the drivetrain.
09/15/2016 f611342
The fifth wheel air slide switch permits repositioning
of the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. See
Fig. 4.16, Air Suspension Height Control Dash Switch
Fig. 4.18.
Pressing the lower part of the air slide switch, toward
NOTICE ’LOCK,’ locks the fifth wheel to the baseplate.
Never exhaust air from the suspension while Pressing the upper part of the switch, toward
driving. When the air is exhausted, the ’SLIDE,’ unlocks the fifth wheel slide mechanism,
suspension will not absorb road shocks, and allowing changes to the total length of the tractor-
components may be damaged. trailer and changes to axle loads to comply with
varying jurisdictional laws. For detailed operating
instructions for fifth wheel slide, coupling, and
uncoupling procedures, see Chapter 14.

4.7
 Driver Controls

SLIDE

AIR
SLIDE

LOCK
09/28/2016 f611343

Fig. 4.18, Fifth Wheel Air Slide Dash Switch

4.8
 5
Detroit Assurance
Detroit Assurance Vehicle Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation System (CMS) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Detroit Assurance Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Detroit Assurance Tailgate Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Detroit Assurance Active Brake Assist 5 (ABA5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Limitations of Detroit Assurance ABA5 and ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Detroit Assurance Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Detroit Assurance Active Lane Assist (ALA) with Auto Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Detroit Assurance Side Guard Assist (SGA) and Active Side Guard Assist 1 (ASGA1) . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Detroit Assurance Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Detroit Assurance

Detroit Assurance Vehicle additional windshield wiper and headlight information,

see Chapter 4.
Cameras If the headlight switch is set to the automatic or ’A’
IMPORTANT: The windshield must be clean, position, the low beam headlights and vehicle
unobstructed, and without damage for the exterior lights turn on when the RLS registers a low
proper operation of the multipurpose camera level of ambient light. This could happen due to
and rain/light sensor. sunset, fog, smoke, or any other event that
decreases light levels.
Multipurpose Camera 2 (MPC2)
Bendix Forward Facing Camera
NOTE: The eCascadia is not equipped with a
driver facing camera. IMPORTANT: In order for the forward facing
camera to operate properly, the windshield area
The multipurpose camera 2 bracket that comes with in front of the camera must be clean,
Detroit Assurance can hold a driver facing camera unobstructed, and not be damaged in any way.
(DFC), multipurpose camera 2 (MPC2), and rain/light
sensor (RLS). The unit is mounted against the An optional Bendix forward facing 5G camera that
windshield. See Fig. 5.1. works in tandem with the Detroit Assurance MPC2
camera is an available option on the eCascadia. If
equipped, the Bendix camera appears as shown in
Fig. 5.2.

2
2
1 1
05/12/2022 f546894b
04/29/2022 f612074
1. Multipurpose Camera 2
2. Rain/Light Sensor 1. MPC2 Bracket
2. Bendix Forward Facing Camera Bracket
Fig. 5.1, eCascadia MPC2 Component Locations
Fig. 5.2, MPC2 and Bendix Camera Brackets
The MPC2 works with the radar system to support
multiple Detroit Assurance features. It is important for The Bendix camera records in color and can capture
the driver to keep the windshield clean and high-quality video in low light conditions. For more
unobstructed in order for the MPC2 to operate information about the Bendix camera, see the
properly. SafetyDirect by Bendix section in Chapter 6.

Rain/Light Sensor Detroit Assurance Collision

This rain/light sensor (RLS) detects rain, snow, or Mitigation System (CMS)
other precipitation on the windshield and can Overview
determine the amount of ambient light.
If the windshield wipers are set to intermittent The Detroit Assurance collision mitigation system
operation, they automatically start clearing the (CMS) is a safety system that uses a radar mounted
windshield when the RLS detects precipitation. For on the front frame crossmember, shown in Fig. 5.3,
and a windshield-mounted multipurpose camera to

5.1
 Detroit Assurance

communicate information to active features that can adaptive cruise control (ACC), lane departure
control the truck. warning (LDW), active lane assist (ALA) with auto
stop, tailgate warning, and side guard assist (SGA).
The system can track vehicles up to 820 ft (250 m)
ahead, and, if necessary, will sound a warning and The left-hand steering wheel switch pod, as shown in
apply the brakes. Fig. 5.4, contains adaptive cruise control (ACC)
controls and access to Detroit Assurance settings via
the ’quick access system settings’ button.

2 3
1

6 5 A 4
05/03/2022 f612076a
A. Menu Button—Press to access display menus,
finger swipe to access series of screens.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
2. Back Button
3. Quick Access System Settings
4. Marker Interrupt (not available in all markets)
1 5. Cancel Cruise Control
6. Cruise Decelerate/Set

03/10/2022 f547741 Fig. 5.4, Steering-WheelMounted Left-Hand Pod, ICC5

1. Forward Radar
Detroit Assurance Adaptive
Fig. 5.3, Forward Radar Location
Cruise Control (ACC)
IMPORTANT: Do not mount any attachments in
front of the radar distance sensor. Do not paint WARNING
or affix items over the distance sensor cover.
Keep the cover free of mud, ice, and snow. The Detroit Assurance collision mitigation
Attachments mounted in front of the distance system is intended solely as an aid for an alert
sensor, such as a crash guard, and objects on and conscientious professional driver. It is not
the sensor cover can impair the operation of the intended to be relied upon to operate a vehicle.
distance sensor. Use the system in conjunction with rearview
mirrors and other instruments to safely operate
Driver Display the vehicle.
The Detroit Assurance collision mitigation
The driver display presents the status and warnings
system is not a substitute for safe, normal
from the different features that make up the Detroit
driving procedures, nor will it compensate for
Assurance safety system.
any driver impairment such as drugs, alcohol, or
The standard core features of Detroit Assurance on fatigue.
the eCascadia include active brake assist (ABA),

5.2
Detroit Assurance

Failure to drive safely and use the system Adaptive Cruise Control Functions and
properly could result in personal injury and/or Activation Conditions
death and severe property damage.
ACC controls the speed of the equipped vehicle to
Adaptive Cruise Control Safety maintain a safe distance from a vehicle detected in
front.
Information
If ACC detects a vehicle in front driving at a slower
ACC may not detect vehicles driving in a different speed, the brakes are applied, slowing the vehicle to
lane or narrow vehicles, like motorcycles, driving in maintain the set following distance.
front.
When a slower vehicle in front is no longer detected,
In particular, stay aware in the following situations:
ACC accelerates the equipped vehicle to the set
• when cornering, entering, and exiting bends; speed.
• when driving winding stretches of road; ACC allows the vehicle to operate in cruise down to
0 mph (0 km/h); as traffic in front of the vehicle slows
• when overtaking; and eventually stops, the vehicle adjusts with the
• when there are vehicles driving in a different traffic until it is stationary.
lane; If the vehicle ahead is stopped for two seconds or
• when vehicles are changing lanes; less, ACC resumes when the vehicle ahead moves.
If the vehicle ahead is stopped for more than two
• when vehicles are exiting the road; seconds, the driver—after carefully checking
• when there are obstacles and stationary surrounding traffic—must press the resume button or
vehicles. tap the accelerator pedal to move forward.
ACC does not compensate for inattentive driving, ACC also slows the vehicle if it exceeds the set
weather, or traffic conditions. ACC is only an aid. The speed (on a downhill grade, for example).
driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance If there is no vehicle in front, ACC operates in the
from the vehicle in front, maintaining a safe vehicle same way as standard cruise control when the
speed, braking, and remaining in a lane. vehicle is traveling above 10 mph (15 km/h).
If ACC does not detect a vehicle driving in front, the
IMPORTANT: Nothing should be put between
system will accelerate to the set speed.
the driver and the seat, such as a heating pad,
Adaptive Cruise Control Overview massage pad, or similar items. Doing so may
keep the seat occupancy sensor from
See Table 5.1 and Fig. 5.4 for a description of cruise functioning correctly.
control steering wheel switches.
ACC to 0 mph verifies seat occupancy before
Steering Wheel Controls resuming forward motion after slowing down to
Description Function 0 mph.
Sets the cruise speed while the vehicle ACC cannot be activated, or is automatically
is traveling at the desired speed. deactivated, if:
–/SET
Pressing and holding decreases the set
cruise speed. • the driver is not in their seat to activate the
Resumes the set speed. Pressing and seat occupancy sensor;
+/RES
holding increases the set cruise speed.
• reverse is selected;
Cancels cruise control, but retains the
CNCL
set speed in memory. • the anti-lock braking system (ABS) is
Table 5.1, Steering Wheel Controls deactivated;
• there is a malfunction in the brake system or
When a vehicle is detected in front, the driver display the electronic management system; or
shows a generic image of the detected vehicle, the
• the distance sensor initialization is not yet
detected vehicle’s speed, and the distance to it. See
complete.
Fig. 5.5.

5.3
 Detroit Assurance

5 10
9
6
11 12
1

13
2 14
3
7 8
15
4
07/21/2022 f612040
1. Current Speed 9. Maximum Regenerative Braking Level Requested
2. High-Voltage Battery Status 10. Current Power Usage
3. Projected Range on Current State of Charge 11. Suggested Transmission Gear
4. High-Voltage Batteries State of Charge 12. Current Transmission Gear
5. Speed of Vehicle Ahead 13. Current Driving Mode
6. Distance to Vehicle Ahead 14. Powertrain Ready Telltale
7. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Active Telltale 15. Power Limit in Current Driving Mode
8. Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Active Telltale
Fig. 5.5, Example of an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Screen, ICC5

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control and If ACC becomes unavailable, a message appears on
Setting the Speed the driver display screen. If the vehicle is
programmed to allow for standard cruise control, the
Activate ACC by setting the cruise speed using the message displayed allows the driver to use standard
controls on the left-hand steering wheel switch pod. cruise control. See Fig. 5.7.
When driving at the desired speed, press the –/SET
switch to activate ACC and store the set speed.
If cruise control is deactivated, the stored speed can
be activated again by pressing the +/RES switch.
When activated, the driver display shows the
adaptive cruise control telltale, shown in Fig. 5.6 and
the set speed.

04/27/2022 f612071 02/25/2022 f611999

Fig. 5.6, Adaptive Cruise Control Active Telltale Fig. 5.7, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable,
ICC5
If the brake pedal is pressed, ACC is deactivated
automatically.

5.4
Detroit Assurance

Increasing or Reducing the Adaptive • the driver follows a vehicle for longer than 10
Cruise Control Speed seconds at a distance that will be traversed in
less than 2.6 seconds.
The ACC speed setting can only be set when driving.
The system will also give warnings when ACC is
Press the –/SET switch on the steering wheel switch active, if:
pod to set the cruise speed when the vehicle is
traveling at the desired speed. • the driver is overriding the distance control by
pressing on the accelerator pedal;
To decrease the set cruise speed, press or press and
hold –/SET. A press decreases the ACC set speed • the vehicle is moving faster than 20 mph (32
by -1 units (mph or km/h). A press and hold km/h);
decreases the ACC set speed by -5 units (mph or • the driver follows a vehicle for longer than 10
km/h). seconds at a distance that will be traversed in
less than 2.6 seconds.
Setting the Distance to the Vehicle in
Front The system will continue to give warning every 20
seconds if the gap between the vehicles does not
If equipped, the following distance can be adjusted increase.
under ’Settings’ > ’Driving Assistance’ > ’Adaptive
Cruise Control.’ The system will not give warning when:
• the vehicle is moving slower than 20 mph (32
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the minimum
km/h);
distance required by law is maintained.
• another vehicle cuts in front;
Overtaking When Using Adaptive Cruise • the vehicle in front is moving away;
Control
• ACC distance control is active.
NOTE: It is possible to exceed the set speed
when overtaking.
Detroit Assurance Active
The set speed of ACC can be exceeded using the Brake Assist 5 (ABA5)
accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is
released, the ACC set speed will be resumed. Active Brake Assist 5 Overview
Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control IMPORTANT: The windshield must be clean,
unobstructed, and without damage for proper
To deactivate ACC, press the CNCL switch on the operation of the multipurpose camera. No
steering wheel switch pod or press the brake pedal.
objects or attachments should be mounted in
NOTE: The set speed remains stored when front of the forward radar and the radar covering
ACC is deactivated. should be free of paint, stickers, mud, ice, or
snow.
Detroit Assurance Tailgate ABA5 is active when the vehicle is on.
Warning ABA5 uses fused camera and radar signals for
improved object recognition, enabling it, in some
The tailgate warning provides alerts when the vehicle cases, to recognize potential hazardous situations
in front is being followed too closely. faster than a driver. If the camera cannot positively
The system gives warning when: identify an object, radar signals alone are used. If the
camera becomes unplugged or otherwise disabled,
• ACC is not active; ABA5 is disabled.
• the vehicle is moving faster than 20 mph (32 ABA5 tracks both moving and stationary objects in
km/h); the vehicle’s path and, if necessary, engages in a
cascade of defensive actions in reaction to those
objects through:

5.5
 Detroit Assurance

1. visual and auditory warnings; issues an audible and visual warning. If the risk
persists, ABA5 automatically initiates partial braking
2. then partial braking; of the vehicle. If the driver does not react to the
3. then full or emergency braking. warnings and partial brake application, ABA5
automatically initiates a full emergency brake
In addition to moving and braking vehicles, ABA5 has application.
the capacity to recognize and engage in emergency
braking for moving pedestrians, parked vehicles, and ABA5 is not designed to detect and react to vehicles
stopped traffic. driving in a different lane.
However, the system may not detect pedestrians or ABA5 may not react to narrow vehicles, like
objects in every situation. ABA5 is not a substitute for motorcycles, driving in front of the vehicle.
cautious driving. A driver should always be aware of possible hazards
and be prepared to engage the service brakes if the
Active Brake Assist 5 Safety ABA5 system warns of a possible pending collision.
Information ABA5 does not automatically adapt to road and
traffic conditions. If ABA5 issues no visual and/or
WARNING acoustic warning in a critical situation:
• it is suppressed;
Active Brake Assist (ABA5) is intended only as
an aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The • it has failed;
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
• it has not recognized the danger of the
from the vehicle in front, for the vehicle speed,
braking in a sufficient amount of time, and situation.
remaining in the lane. ABA may also issue warnings where no risk exists.
An alert and conscientious driver should be able to
ABA5 does not take road and weather conditions
easily validate an ABA warning, and, if necessary,
into account, nor the prevailing traffic situation.
override a false-positive ABA5 braking event.
The driver should always adapt their driving to
suit road and weather conditions.
Activating/Deactivating Active Brake
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Assist 5
System is not designed to warn about all
possible road hazards. Specifically, it is not The only way to turn the ABA5 system off is to turn
programmed to react to animals, oncoming the vehicle off.
vehicles, or cross traffic, but it may do so.
To override an active warning and braking event
Operate a vehicle equipped with Detroit sequence, press the accelerator pedal past the
Assurance Collision Mitigation System as if the pressure point to engage kickdown.
vehicle were not equipped with a collision If there is a system error, the ABA5 unavailable
mitigation system. telltale, as shown in Fig. 5.8, illuminates on the
Failure to drive safely and use the system driver display screen and a caution window, as
properly could result in personal injury and/or shown in Fig. 5.9, is shown on the driver display.
death and severe property damage.
A vehicle equipped with ABA5 may:
• react more quickly than a driver to an object in
the vehicle’s path of travel;
• perform emergency braking;
04/26/2022 f611453a
• react to moving people with a warning and
emergency braking. Fig. 5.8, ABA5 Unavailable Telltale

ABA5 can minimize the risk of a front-end collision

with a moving or stationary vehicle and pedestrians.
If ABA5 detects the risk of a front-end collision, it

5.6
Detroit Assurance

2. Engages in Partial Braking: ABA5 brakes the

vehicle with around 50 percent of the vehicle’s
maximum braking power.
The radio and/or hands free system stays muted,
the warning beeping continues, and the ABA5
collision warning, shown in Fig. 5.10, continues
to appear or, if previously dismissed, reappears
on the driver display.
3. Engages in Emergency Braking: If a driver
does not react to the collision warnings or partial
brake application, ABA5 brakes the vehicle with
100 percent of the vehicle’s maximum braking
power.
04/27/2022 f612070 The radio and/or hands free system stays muted,
the warning beeping shifts to a continuous tone,
Fig. 5.9, ABA5 Unavailable Alert, ICC5 and the emergency braking warning, shown in
Fig. 5.11 appears on the driver display.
Active Brake Assist 5 Collision
Warning and Emergency Braking
NOTE: To override an active warning and
braking event sequence, press the accelerator
pedal past the pressure point to engage
kickdown.
If there is a collision risk, ABA5 engages in the
following cascade of warnings:
1. Issues Warnings: the radio and/or hands free
system is muted, the vehicle issues a warning
beeping, and an ABA5 collision warning window,
shown in Fig. 5.10, appears on the driver
display.
07/20/2022 f612090

Fig. 5.11, Second Visual ABA5 Warning , ICC5

4. Brakes Release: The radio and/or hands free

system is taken off mute, the warning tone
ceases, and the notice shown in Fig. 5.12
appears on the driver display.
After retaking control, the driver should take the
first opportunity to safely move the vehicle from
traffic. Before continuing, the driver should
confirm that the vehicle is in good operating
condition and that the load is still properly
secured.

07/20/2022 f612089 CAUTION

Fig. 5.10, First Visual ABA5 Warning , ICC5 After an emergency braking maneuver has been
performed, if necessary, move the vehicle from
the area of danger. Take the first opportunity to
safely move the vehicle away from traffic and

5.7
 Detroit Assurance

the vehicle is still in good operating order.

Failure to do so may result in personal injury and
product or property damage. Always apply the
parking brake prior to exiting the vehicle.

Limitations of Detroit
Assurance ABA5 and ACC
See Table 5.2 for a description of ABA5 and ACC
limitations in specific driving conditions.

07/20/2022 f612091

Fig. 5.12, Third Visual ABA5 Warning, ICC5

confirm the load is still properly secured and that

Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Condition and Illustration Description

Cornering, entering and exiting bends

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to react to vehicles on bends

is limited.
ABA5 and ACC may react to a vehicle or object in an
adjoining lane and unexpectedly issue warnings or brake the
vehicle.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow to react to a vehicle or object
previously hidden by a bend in the lane.
ACC may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly if the
vehicle ahead is hidden by a bend in the lane.
07/27/2022 f040877

5.8
Detroit Assurance

Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Condition and Illustration Description

Vehicles not traveling in line with your vehicle and

stationary vehicles
The ability of ABA5 and ACC to react to vehicles not
traveling in line with your vehicle and stationary vehicles is
limited.
ABA5 and ACC may react to a vehicle or object partially in
your lane and unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your
vehicle.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow or fail to react to vehicles not
traveling in line with your vehicle or stationary vehicles only
partially in your lane.
ACC may not detect and react to vehicles not traveling in
line with your vehicle or stationary vehicles partially in your
07/27/2022 f040883 lane and may accelerate unexpectedly.

Other vehicles changing lanes

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to vehicles

pulling into your lane without maintaining a safe distance is
limited.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow to react or fail to react to a
vehicle entering your lane if the distance to the vehicle
entering the lane is too short.
ACC may accelerate unexpectedly if it fails to detect the
vehicle entering the lane.
If a vehicle cuts in front, brake your vehicle to increase the
07/27/2022 f040884
following distance.

Narrow vehicles changing lanes

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to narrow

vehicles pulling into your lane is limited.
Narrow vehicles may be slow to enter the system’s detection
range.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow to react or fail to react to a
critical driving situation due to the merging vehicle being
slow to enter the system’s detection range.
ACC may accelerate unexpectedly if it fails to detect the
vehicle entering the lane.
07/27/2022 f040876

5.9
 Detroit Assurance

Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Condition and Illustration Description

Vehicles turning off or in a nonstandard orientation.

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to vehicles

turning off or vehicles in a nonstandard orientation is limited.
ABA5 and ACC may react to a vehicle turning off and
unexpectedly issue warnings or brake the vehicle.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow or fail to react to a vehicle
turning off or to a vehicle at an angle due to an accident
even through there is a critical driving situation.

07/27/2022 f040885

Overtaking

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to a vehicle

you are overtaking is limited.
When overtaking a vehicle, ABA5 and ACC may
unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your vehicle if you
drive too close to the vehicle you are overtaking before
exiting that lane.

07/27/2022 f040879

Winding stretches of road

On winding stretches of road, ABA5 and ACC cannot detect

which lane the vehicle in front is driving in.
ABA5 and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
your vehicle when reacting to vehicles in a different lane.
ABA5 and ACC may be slow to react or fail to react to a
vehicle in your lane even through there is a critical driving
situation.
ACC may fail to detect the vehicle in front in your lane and
may accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
07/27/2022 f040886

5.10
Detroit Assurance

Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Condition and Illustration Description

Obstacles and stationary vehicles in front of a detected

vehicle
The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to objects
when the detected vehicle turns off is limited.
When the detected vehicle turns off, ABA5 and ACC may
react to the obstacle or stationary vehicle that was in front of
the detected vehicle and unexpectedly issue warnings or
brake your vehicle.
When the detected vehicle turns off, ABA5 and ACC may be
slow to react or fail to react to an obstacle or stationary
vehicle that was in front of the detected vehicle even though
there is a critical driving situation.
ACC may react to the vehicle turning off by accelerating
07/27/2022 f040878 unexpectedly.

Vehicles parked or broken down at the side of the road

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to a

stationary vehicle on the side of the road is limited.
ABA5 and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
your vehicle if it detects a vehicle on the side of the road.

07/27/2022 f040880

Stationary objects

The ability of ABA5 and ACC to detect and react to

stationary objects above, beside, and on the road is limited.
ABA5 and ACC can unexpectedly issue warnings and brake
the vehicle if it detects stationary objects beside, above, or
in front of your lane such as:
• signs
• traffic islands
• some bridges, such as truss and cable bridges
• low overpasses
07/27/2022 f040882

5.11
 Detroit Assurance

Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Condition and Illustration Description

People

The ability of ABA5 to detect and react to people in certain

situations is limited.
ABA5 can unexpectedly issue warnings and brake the
vehicle if it detects and reacts to:
• people on the roadside on a curve
• people walking beside the road
• people in a tunnel

07/27/2022 f040881

Table 5.2, Adaptive Cruise Control and Active Brake Assist 5 Limitations

Detroit Assurance Lane spray, smoke, or other circumstances that limit

visibility.
Departure Warning (LDW) • There is glare due to oncoming traffic, direct
sunlight, or reflections from wet road surfaces.
WARNING • The windshield in the area of the camera is
The LDW system is intended only as an aid for a dirty, misted up, damaged, or covered by a
conscientious and alert driver. Do not rely solely sticker.
on the system to safely operate the vehicle. • No lane markings or several varied lane
The system may not indicate lane departures markings are present, such as in a
under certain conditions. Read the information in construction zone.
this manual to understand the circumstances • The lane markings are worn, dark, or
under which this system may not provide covered—such as by sand, dirt, or snow.
adequate lane departure warnings.
• The distance from the vehicle in front is too
The system does not provide warnings for all small and prevents the lane markings from
possible hazards. LDW is not a substitute for being detected.
safe driving procedures and cannot prevent an
accident if the driver is impaired or not driving • The lane markings change rapidly, such as
safely. when lanes merge, branch off, or cross.
Failure to use the system properly could result in • Lanes are very narrow or winding.
personal injury and/or death and severe property • Shade conditions on the road surface vary
damage. widely.
Safety Notes on Lane Departure The driver must adapt their driving style to current
conditions. LDW cannot take the road and weather
Warning conditions into account, nor the prevailing traffic
The system may be impaired or may not operate in situation. The driver is responsible for the distance to
the following situations: the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in
good time, and remaining in the lane.
• There is low visibility due to insufficient road
illumination, or due to snow, rain, fog, heavy

5.12
Detroit Assurance

Overview Activating or Deactivating Lane

LDW monitors the area in front of the vehicle using Departure Warning (LDW)
the multipurpose camera mounted at the top of the When the vehicle is turned on, LDW is automatically
windshield. When LDW is active and detecting lane activated.
markings, it visually and audibly warns the driver if it
thinks the vehicle may be leaving the lane NOTE: There is no audible self-test of the
unintentionally. "rumble-strip noise" of LDW when the vehicle is
LDW only needs one identifiable lane line to function. switched on.
Pressing the LDW OFF switch deactivates LDW for
Functions and Activation Conditions fifteen minutes. The LDW OFF switch may be a
for Lane Departure Warning physical dash switch, shown in Fig. 5.13, and/or a
digital switch in the ICC5 infotainment panel under
The Detroit Assurance LDW system is designed to ’Digital Switches,’ shown in Fig. 5.14. When LDW is
warn the driver as the vehicle crosses the outer deactivated, the switch indicator illuminates.
boundary of the lane marking. This may differ from
other LDW systems which issue a warning as the A driver might want to turn off LDW on winding roads
or when driving through construction zones or other
driver approaches the inside of the lane marking. If
areas where lane markings are not clear.
the system warns at, or just beyond the outer edge
of the lane marking, the system is performing as
designed. If the warning does not occur, or occurs
after an excessive lane departure, the system may
not be operating properly.
Lane departure warning only issues warnings if the
speed is above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
The lane markings on the driver display screen show LDW
the status and state of LDW: OFF

• No lane markings indicate that LDW is off. 05/12/2016 f611413

• Outlined lane markings indicate that LDW is
not ready. Fig. 5.13, Lane Departure Warning Off Physical Switch

• Solid white markings indicate LDW is on and

ready to issue warnings.
• Red lane markings indicate a lane departure is
occurring; red lane markings are a visual
warning from the LDW system.
In addition to the visual warning, when driving over
lane markings unintentionally, the volume of audio 02/25/2022 f611543
equipment like the radio and/or hands-free systems
is muted and a "rumble-strip noise" emits from the Fig. 5.14, Lane Departure Warning Off Digital Switch,
side of the vehicle driving over the lane markings. ICC5
LDW does not issue an audible warning when: LDW is not active if:
• the turn signals are switched on • the driver presses the LDW OFF switch;
• if the driver is braking or accelerating • the system is searching for a lane.
• if the driver is making a sharp turn If there is a system error, the LDW unavailable
• if a driving safety system such as ABA, stability telltale, shown in Fig. 5.15, illuminates on the driver
control, or ACC intervenes. display.

5.13
 Detroit Assurance

• low visibility, due to insufficient road

illumination or due to snow, rain, fog, smoke,
or heavy spray;
• glare from oncoming traffic, the sun, or
reflection from other vehicles when the road
04/27/2022 f612072 surface is wet;
Fig. 5.15, LDW Unavailable Telltale, ICC5 • the windshield being dirty, misted up,
damaged, or covered in the vicinity of the
Cleaning the Windshield in the Area camera;
of the Camera • the lane markings being unclear, such as in a
construction zone;
Make sure that the windshield is always kept clean
and unobstructed in the area of the camera. • the lane markings being worn, dark, or
covered;
During rainy or cold weather, the driver should switch
on the windshield wiper to clear the windshield and • the distance to the vehicle in front being too
remove snow and ice to avoid incorrect lane small and preventing the lane markings from
detection. being detected;
If the area of the windshield is damaged, LDW may • the lane markings changing quickly such as
not work as intended. If this happens, the windshield lanes branching off, crossing one another, or
must be replaced. merging;
• the road being narrow and winding;
Detroit Assurance Active Lane • highly variable shade conditions on the road
Assist (ALA) with Auto Stop surface;
• an attachment (such as a snow plow)
WARNING restricting the camera’s view of the lane
markings;
The features in active lane assist (ALA) are
intended only as aids for a conscientious and • a significant change in load with the vehicle
alert driver. Do not rely on ALA to safely operate running. Restart the vehicle after a significant
the vehicle. change in load to have ALA available without
restrictions.
The driver is responsible for keeping their hands
on the wheel at all times when ALA is active. ALA cannot take the road, weather conditions, or the
current traffic situation into account. The driver is
ALA may not indicate lane departures under responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the
certain conditions. Read the information in this vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good
manual to understand the circumstances under time, and remaining in the lane.
which ALA may not provide adequate lane
departure warnings. Active Lane Assist Overview
ALA does not warn of all possible hazards and is IMPORTANT: ACC must be active for LKA to be
not a substitute for safe driving procedures. active. Deactivation of ACC also deactivates
Failure to drive safely and use ALA properly LKA.
could result in personal injury and/or death and ALA with auto stop consists of:
severe property damage.
• lane departure protection (LDP), a feature that
Active Lane Assist Safety Information builds on LDW

Features in ALA may become inactive under • lane keep assist (LKA)
conditions where lane markings cannot clearly be • auto stop, a feature that builds on LKA
identified. These conditions include:

5.14
Detroit Assurance

When ALA with auto stop is on, it monitors the area • Red hands-on steering wheel: auto stop is
in front of the vehicle with the multipurpose camera active.
mounted at the top of the windshield. Keep the
• Amber steering wheel with exclamation point:
windshield clean and unobstructed in the area of the
There is an problem with the electro-hydraulic
camera.
power steering system which deactivates LKA.
The LDW/LDP function of ALA detects lane markings
on the road surface, warns the driver they may be • Red steering wheel with exclamation point:
leaving their lane unintentionally, and, if a driver does There is an error with the adaptive power
not respond to these warnings, moves the vehicle steering (APS) which deactivates LKA or an
back into the center of the lane. If the driver’s error with LKA.
preferred lane position is other than ’center,’ LKA will • No steering wheel icon: LKA is off or
move the vehicle into the requested lane position deactivated.
after the LDP intervention is complete.
See Fig. 5.16 for an example of an LKA status
The LKA function of ALA uses micro-steering telltale in the driver display.
adjustments to keep the vehicle in the driver’s
preferred lane position. It also monitor’s the driver’s Auto stop initiates at the end of the LKA hands-on
steering, and if it senses the driver’s hand’s have warning cascade and is only activated when LKA is
been removed, cautions the driver to return their active.
hands to the steering wheel.
Active Lane Assist Functions and
Auto stop works with LKA to smoothly bring the
vehicle to a safe stop after LKA has registered that Warnings
the driver has had their hands off the steering wheel ALA works to keep the vehicle within the lane, issues
for 60 seconds. Auto stop works to increase the warnings when a driver takes their hands off the
safety of all road users in the case of an steering wheel, and if necessary intervenes to bring
incapacitated driver. the vehicle to a safe stop.
Active Lane Assist Activation With the driver’s hands on the steering wheel, the
LKA feature of ALA engages in micro-steering
Conditions adjustments to offset side winds, lateral road
ALA is activated each time the vehicle is turned on. inclination, and other environmental forces to keep
the vehicle in the driver’s preferred lane position. The
The LDW/LDP component of ALA is ready to issue preferred lane position can be set by selecting ’Quick
warnings and initiate actions as soon as the vehicle Access’ > ’Follow Distance/Lane Position.’ Options
reaches 37 mph (60 km/h) and both lane lines are include: offset to the right, offset to the left, or center.
identified and show on the driver display as solid The default lane position is center.
lane markings. LDP requires both lane lines to be
identifiable to function; LDW only requires one lane If the micro-steering of LKA cannot compensate for
line to function. the sideways movement of the vehicle and the
vehicle crosses over the lane markings with no turn
LKA is ready to issue warnings and initiate actions signal activation, LDW issues a warning as follows:
when cruise control is active and when the vehicle is
driving forward at approximately 15-20 mph (24-32 • The exceeded lane markings are shown in red
km/h). on the driver display screen.
The status of LKA is shown by the color and design • The volume of the audio equipment and/or
of the steering wheel telltales on the driver display hands-free system is muted.
screen. • A warning rumble strip sound is broadcast from
• Blue hands-on steering wheel: LKA is on and the speaker on the side of the exceeded lane
actively steering. markings.
• Grey hands-on steering wheel: LKA is on but If the driver does not steer the vehicle back into the
inactive (due to glare, snow, bad lane lines, lane or activate a turn signal, a warning notification
etc.). appears on the driver display and LDP intervenes.
An acoustic warning sounds while LDP guides the
vehicle back into the center of the lane.

5.15
 Detroit Assurance

1 4

07/21/2022 f612040a
The LKA hands on steering wheel telltale can appear as blue (on and actively steering), grey (on but inactive; not
shown), or red (auto stop active; not shown).
A yellow steering wheel with exclamation point (not shown) indicates an error with the electro-hydraulic power steering
system which deactivates LKA; a red steering wheel with an exclamation point (not shown) indicates an error with the
APS which deactivates LKA, or an error with LKA.
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Active Telltale 3. Speed of Vehicle Ahead
2. Distance to Vehicle Ahead 4. Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Active Telltale
Fig. 5.16, Active Lane Assist Telltales, ICC5

LDW does not issue a warning about traveling over

lane markings if:
• a turn signal is switched on;
• a driving safety system, such as ABA, stability
control, or ACC intervenes.
LDW only issues a visual warning about traveling
over lane markings if the driver is braking,
accelerating, or making a sharp turn.
In addition to helping keep the vehicle in the desired
lane position, LKA monitors the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel. If LKA senses the driver’s hands are
not on the steering wheel, it issues a series of
warnings. 02/25/2022 f612001

If LKA is active and the driver takes their hands off

Fig. 5.17, LKA Hands-On Caution Popup Window, ICC5
the steering wheel for 15 seconds, an amber caution
pop-up window appears as shown in Fig. 5.17 telling If the driver does not return their hands to the
the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel. steering wheel, at 55 seconds the acoustical warning
Doing so will cause the pop-up window to disappear. starts to sound every second.
If the driver does not return their hands to the If the driver does not return their hands to the
steering wheel, at 30 seconds a red warning pop-up steering wheel, at 60 seconds the acoustical warning
window appears and an acoustical warning starts to becomes a continuous loud audible warning and auto
sound every five seconds. stop initiates.

5.16
Detroit Assurance

As soon as the driver places their hands on the

steering wheel, the LKA visual and audible warnings
cease and the hands-off count is reset to zero.
LKA becomes inactive when the driver activates a
turn signal and when auto stop activates.
LKA deactivates with the intervention of LDW/LDP,
the deactivation of ACC, and if deactivated by the
driver.
The auto stop feature of LKA activates at the end of
the LKA cascade of hands-on warnings and engages
the vehicle’s service brakes to smoothly bring the
vehicle to a complete stop while keeping it within the
lane.
03/15/2022 f612017
During an auto stop activation:
• a warning appears on the driver display stating Fig. 5.20, Auto Stop Finished Caution, ICC5
that auto stop is active and providing override
procedures, shown in Fig. 5.18; Once auto stop initiates, ACC is canceled. If active,
ABA5 remains active while auto stop slows the
• the auto stop telltale of a red hands-on vehicle.
steering wheel, shown in Fig. 5.19, appears on
the driver’s display; After reaching a standstill, auto stop turns on the
vehicle’s headlights, cabin lights, and hazard lights,
• when auto stop has brought the vehicle to a applies the hold brakes, and shifts the vehicle into
standstill, the auto stop telltale clears and a neutral.
caution with the standstill override procedure
If auto stop is initiated three times, a notification of
appears on the driver display; see Fig. 5.20.
misuse appears on the driver display, shown in
Fig. 5.21, the auto stop telltale clears, and ALA is
deactivated. The driver must restart the vehicle to
enable ALA. Deactivation of ALA deactivates LDP,
LKA, and auto stop.

03/15/2022 f612015

Fig. 5.18, Warning that Auto Stop is Active, ICC5

03/15/2022 f612016

Fig. 5.21, Caution that LKA is Unavailable Due to

Detected Misuse, ICC5

03/15/2022 f612014

Fig. 5.19, Auto Stop Telltale

5.17
 Detroit Assurance

Active Lane Assist (ALA) Switches Detroit Assurance Side Guard

In a vehicle equipped with an ICC5, there are four Assist (SGA) and Active Side
possible switches related to active lane assist (ALA):
two digital and two physical:
Guard Assist 1 (ASGA1)
• A physical LDW off switch, shown in Fig. 5.13. General Information
• A digital LDW off switch, shown in Fig. 5.14. IMPORTANT: SGA and, if equipped, ASGA1 are
designed for use with one trailer attached to the
• A physical LKA off switch, shown in Fig. 5.22.
tractor.
• A digital LKA off switch, shown in Fig. 5.23.
SGA detects if a trailer is attached to the tractor,
but it cannot detect whether or not multiple
trailers are attached. If used with more than one
trailer, SGA only considers objects or stationary
obstacles in the range of the tractor and the first
trailer. False-positive indications and warnings
may occur with multiple trailers.
IMPORTANT: SGA and ASGA1 are not
designed to work with non-ABS trailers or on
trucks with lift axles.
In a left-hand drive vehicle, SGA monitors the area to
08/20/2019 f611799 the right of the vehicle and trailer using two short
range radar sensors. The radar sensors are mounted
Fig. 5.22, Lane Keep Assist Off Physical Switch close to the rear of the right-hand footsteps. See
Fig. 5.24. SGA provides assistance when turning
right and changing lanes to the right. A triangular
warning lamp in the A-pillar, shown in Fig. 5.25,
lights up to inform the driver that an object has been
detected in the monitored area. An additional warning
tone sounds if there is a risk of collision.
ASGA1 engages at urban speeds (less than 12
mph). Using sensor data from the SGA, truck data,
02/25/2022 f612003
and driver activities, this enhancement assesses
Fig. 5.23, Lane Keep Assist Off Digital Switch, ICC5
conditions for collision. If an object is detected in the
sensor monitoring range, the system automatically
ALA with auto stop can also be deactivated under applies the brakes.
’Settings’ > ’Driving Assistance.’ In a right-hand drive vehicle, SGA monitors the area
Pressing either a physical or digital LKA OFF switch to the left of the vehicle and trailer. The location of
turns off LKA for the key cycle. The switch light sensors and warning lamps on the vehicle all shift to
illuminates to show that LKA is off. Pressing the the left in this case. All other features remain the
switch or restarting the vehicle turns LKA on. same.
Pressing the LDW OFF switch will turn off LDW and, The trailer monitoring of SGA is not active shortly
by extension, LDP for fifteen minutes. When LDW is after reversing or coupling up; therefore it is not
off, the light on the LDW alert switch illuminates. possible to switch SGA trailer monitoring on or off
shortly after reversing or coupling up.
A driver might want to turn off LDW on winding roads
or when driving through construction zones or other
areas where lane markings are not clear.

5.18
Detroit Assurance

02/22/2022 f547736
07/19/2022 f547735a
1. Covered Radar Sensors
Fig. 5.25, SGA Warning Lamp
Fig. 5.24, Radar Sensors with Covers
for other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians, and
Safety Information obstacles.
IMPORTANT: If the sensors are dirty or SGA
WARNING malfunctions, a grey triangle alert icon appears
on the driver display. Objects in the monitoring
When detection is restricted, SGA may issue a
range are not tracked when this occurs.
warning too late or not at all. The detection of
obstacles can be impaired by the following Before driving the vehicle, ensure the radar
situations: sensor cover is free from dirt, ice, or slush. If
• dirty, icy or obscured sensors the sensors get dirty while driving, pull off in a
safe location to clean them. The radar sensors
• very wide lanes must not be painted or covered by items such
• vehicles not driving in the middle of their as stickers.
lane
If the vehicle is involved in a severe accident or
• barriers or other road boundaries there is damage to the right-hand footsteps,
There is a risk of an accident in these situations. have the function of the radar sensors checked.
The driver must pay attention to the traffic If SGA malfunctions, have the function of the
situation and maintain a safe distance at the side radar sensors checked at an authorized dealer.
of the vehicle.
SGA is only an aid for a conscientious driver.
Sensor Monitoring Range
Depending on the situation and the trailer, SGA may As shown in Fig. 5.26, there is an empty angle of
issue a warning prematurely or not at all. SGA and approximately 6 degrees between the vehicle and
ASGA1 are not substitutes for attentive driving. the area monitored by the sensor. Objects within this
Always ensure there is sufficient distance to the side area are not detected.

5.19
 Detroit Assurance

Name Telltale Color

Side Guard Assist Trailer

Grey
Monitoring Deactivated

Caution, Side Guard Assist Amber

10/11/2018 f611532
Caution, Side Guard Assist
Amber
Fig. 5.26, Sensor Monitoring Area Trailer

Due to the nature of the system, warnings may be

issued in error when driving close to barriers or other Caution, Side Guard Assist
solid boundaries. Trailer Monitoring Amber
Deactivated
Warnings may also be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles for a prolonged
time.
Warning, Side Guard Assist Red
If equipped with ASGA1, the system uses the sensor
and truck data to assess if a collision mitigation is
required, dependent on speed, turn data, driver
activity, and obstacle proximity. Warning, Side Guard Assist
Red
Trailer
SGA Indicator Lamps
NOTE: Depending on the type of instrument Warning, Side Guard Assist
panel installed in the vehicle, the telltales Trailer Monitoring Red
described as grey may appear white. Deactivated

Name Telltale Color Table 5.3, Side Guard Assist (SGA) Lamps

Side Guard Assist

Grey Side Guard Assist Activation
Initializing
Conditions
SGA is active when the keyswitch is turned on. An
Side Guard Assist Active Grey SGA initializing telltale, the first telltale in Table 5.3,
may appear on the driver display during startup.
After startup, if a trailer is not attached to the tractor,
a grey triangle appears on the driver display screen
Side Guard Assist Error or
Grey as shown in Fig. 5.27. If a trailer is attached, a grey
Deactivation
triangle with trailer appears.
If SGA monitoring experiences an error or is
Side Guard Assist Trailer deactivated without a trailer attached, a grey triangle
Grey with a slash appears.
Monitoring Active
If SGA monitoring is deactivated with a trailer
attached, a triangle with a trailer and a slash
appears.

5.20
Detroit Assurance

1 2

07/21/2020 f612095
In a left-hand drive vehicle, the SGA activation state (grey) telltale appears to the left of center on the driver display driving
assistance screen; the amber (not shown) and red warning telltales appear to right of center. The red warning telltale is
accompanied by a pulsing red light animation.
This figure exists to solely to illustrate the SGA telltale locations on the driver display; these telltales will not appear at the
same time.
1. Location of SGA Activation State (Grey) Telltale 2. Location of SGA Warning Telltales
Fig. 5.27, SGA Telltale Locations - eCascadia ICC5

Warnings for Moving Objects in the A-pillar flashes for a few seconds, a warning
tone sounds, and the ICU displays the appropriate
If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring SGA warning telltale. After flashing, the red warning
range, shown in Fig. 5.28, an amber SGA warning lamp stays on as long as there is a risk of a collision.
lamp in the A-pillar activates and the ICU displays
the appropriate SGA caution telltale.

10/11/2018 f611534
10/11/2018 f611533
Fig. 5.29, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring
Fig. 5.28, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring Range When Turning Right
Range
Warnings When Changing Lanes
Warnings When Turning Right
If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring
SGA recognizes when the driver signals or steers to range when a driver signals or steers to the right,
the right and there is a risk of collision. See shown in Fig. 5.30, an amber warning lamp activates
Fig. 5.29. In this situation, the red SGA warning lamp

5.21
 Detroit Assurance

in the A-pillar and the appropriate SGA caution attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
telltale appears on the driver display screen. sufficient distance to the side for vehicles,
cyclists, pedestrians, and obstacles.
SGA warns the driver about stationary obstacles in
the vehicle’s range of movement up to a maximum
speed of 22 mph (35 km/h).
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle
when turning right, the red warning lamp in the
A-pillar flashes and a warning tone sounds and the
appropriate SGA warning telltale appears on the
driver display screen. The red warning lamp stops
flashing after a few seconds but stays on as long as
10/11/2018 f611535 there is a risk of a collision.

Fig. 5.30, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring Activating or Deactivating Side Guard
Range When Changing Lanes
Assist
If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring
If activated, SGA is on when the vehicle is turned on.
range when a driver signals or steers to the right,
shown in Fig. 5.31, the red warning lamp in the SGA can be deactivated or reactivated on an ICC5
A-pillar flashes and a warning tone sounds and the under the ’Settings’ > ’Driving Assistance’ menu.
appropriate SGA warning telltale appears on the
driver display screen. The red warning lamp stops
flashing after a few seconds but stays on as long as
Detroit Assurance Telltales
there is a risk of a collision. Telltales and messages appear on the driver display.
The positions of the telltales vary, but most use
standard symbols.
The colors of telltales indicate the hazard level as
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), green
(normal function), blue (active status), grey (passive
status), white (informational).
The colors of messages indicate the hazard level as
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), grey
(informational).
Telltales for Detroit Assurance features are listed in
10/11/2018 f611536
Table 5.4. Every vehicle may not be equipped with
Fig. 5.31, A Moving Object in the When Changing
every feature.
Lanes

Warnings When Turning Right for

Stationary Obstacles
IMPORTANT: SGA is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some objects and is not a substitute for

Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Adaptive Cruise
Indicates that adaptive cruise control is on and
Green Control (ACC)
active.
Active

5.22
Detroit Assurance

Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Adaptive Cruise
Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Amber Control
is not available
Unavailable

Active Brake Assist Indicates the Active Brake Assist system is not
Amber
Unavailable available.

Lane Departure Indicates that lane departure warning is

Amber Warning disabled due to minimum speed, lack of lane
Unavailable markings, or system not being available.
NOTE: When Lane Keep
Assist is off there is no
Lane Keep Assist is on and making micro- steering wheel telltale.
Lane Keep Assist
Blue steering adjustments to keep the vehicle in the
(LKA) Active Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
preferred lane position.
is a component of Active
Lane Assist (ALA).
Lane Keep Assist is on but inactive. Reasons If Adaptive Cruise Control
for inactivity include: (ACC) is not available,
Lane Keep Assist
Active Lane Assist (ALA)
Grey (LKA) on but • Lane markings cannot be identified.
is not available. Lane
inactive
• There has been a significant change in Keep Assist (LKA) is a
load with the ignition switched on. component of ALA.
When Auto Stop activates at the end of the The Auto Stop warning
Lane Keep Assist warning cascade, the Auto window: "Auto Stop
Red Auto Stop Active Stop telltale appears. Started Throttle to
When Auto Stop has brought the vehicle to a Cancel" appears when
standstill, the Auto Stop telltale clears. Auto Stop initiates.

Table 5.4, Detroit Assurance Telltale Lamps and Messages

5.23
 6
Driver Assistance Features
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
PasSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
SafetyDirect® by Bendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Driver Assistance Features

Electronic Stability Control ESC is unavailable due to a fault. The ESC telltale
flashes when an ESC event is actively occurring and
(ESC) is solidly illuminated when ESC is unavailable due to
a fault.
WARNING
Electronic stability control (ESC) is intended only
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver.
Carefully read the information in this manual to
understand this system and its limitations. ESC
is not a substitute for safe driving procedures.
Failure to drive safely, and use the system
properly, could result in personal injury and/or
03/09/2022 f612013
death and property damage.
Fig. 6.1, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Telltale
CAUTION
It is normal for the ESC telltale to illuminate shortly
Changing or modifying the location of the ESC after a curve, lane change, or other driving maneuver
sensor or reconfiguring the vehicle, such as by that results in ESC detecting a rollover-risk.
changing the wheelbase or adding axles, can
change the performance of the enhanced stability
control system and may result in product or
PasSmart
property damage and personal injury. A standard feature on fleet vehicles, PasSmart
enables a vehicle to exceed a set speed limit by a
Electronic stability control (ESC) works by constantly
limited amount to allow for passing vehicles on the
comparing the driver’s intention with the vehicle’s
highway. For example, a PasSmart vehicle may be
actual behavior. The system does this by monitoring
programmed to enable the vehicle to travel 5mph
wheel speed, steering angle, yaw rate, lateral
over a set speed limit for 30 minutes every 24 hours.
acceleration, throttle position, and brake application.
This speed limiting increases overall fuel economy.
A central microcomputer analyzes the collected data
and triggers a response to keep the vehicle on If equipped, the PasSmart function is initiated by
course when an unstable condition is detected. double-pumping the accelerator pedal within a two
second period. When initiated, the PasSmart window
When the system detects that the vehicle is at risk of
as shown in Fig. 6.2 appears. The PasSmart timer
over-steering or under-steering, it applies individual
shown in this window starts when the road speed
tractor wheel end brakes and trailer brakes and/or
limit is exceeded by 1.89 mph (3 km/h).
cuts power to reduce the likelihood of a drift-out or
jackknife.
If the acceleration sensor detects the vehicle is at
risk of rolling over, the roll stability control system
within the ESC automatically reduces power and
applies the brakes.
Yaw control is not active below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h). Roll stability control is not active below
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). At higher speeds,
ESC operates automatically; the driver does not
monitor or activate the system.
The driver has full control over the vehicle until the
system detects a potential risk and intervenes
accordingly.
03/09/2022 f612010
The ESC telltale, as shown in Fig. 6.1, appears on
the driver display when ESC intervenes and when Fig. 6.2, PasSmart Active Window, ICC5

6.1
 Driver Assistance Features

PasSmart does not disengage cruise control. After The Bendix SafetyDirect Portal
engagement, PasSmart deactivates when the speed
limit of the vehicle drops below the cruise control If the vehicle is equipped with the SafetyDirect
standard set speed limit at which point cruise control system, data is sent from the vehicle’s safety
resumes. systems to the portal. The portal presents each
driver’s behavior in a ’miles between events’ format
Thirty seconds before a daily PasSmart limit is with the following events recognized:
reached, the PasSmart active window, if closed,
opens to notify the driver of the time remaining. • lane departure warning
• excessive lane departure warning
SafetyDirect® by Bendix • lane change without turn signal

WARNING • loss of video tracking

• lane departure warning system disabled
SafetyDirect by Bendix is solely intended as a
support for a conscientious professional driver. • distance/tailgate alert given

IMPORTANT: In order for the forward facing • forward collision warning

camera to operate properly, the windshield area • collision mitigation braking
in front of the camera must be clean,
• automatic traction control (ATC) activation
unobstructed, and not be damaged in any way.
• antilock braking system activation
SafetyDirect by Bendix is a fleet management
system that automatically records ten to twenty • stability system activation
seconds of video during a safety event and delivers it
• excessive braking
and other vehicle safety data wirelessly and in real
time to the Bendix SafetyDirect portal. • excessive speed on curves

Bendix Forward Facing Camera • average following distance

• adaptive cruise control usage
If equipped, the SafetyDirect system uses the
telematics systems of the vehicle and a Bendix 5G
forward facing video camera, shown in Fig. 6.3. The
Bendix camera records in color and can capture
high-quality video in low light conditions.

2
1

04/29/2022 f612074
1. Multipurpose 2 Camera Bracket
2. Bendix Forward Facing Camera Bracket

Fig. 6.3, Multipurpose Camera 2 and Bendix Camera

Brackets

6.2
 7
Seats and Restraints
Sitting Posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
ISRI Elite High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
ISRI Premium High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
ISRI Basic High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
National High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Sears Atlas II Deluxe High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Sears Sentry High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
RollTek Rollover Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Passenger Safety Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Seats and Restraints

Sitting Posture
Before driving, adjust the seat to support good sitting
posture as shown in Fig. 7.1. Good posture supports
the safe operation of the vehicle and the driver’s
fitness and comfort. When correctly seated, all
instruments and controls should be within easy reach
and the driver should have a clear view of the road
and mirrors.

B
C

D
1

12/01/2021 f910833 2
9
A. Adjust the steering wheel and seat to achieve a 95° 8 3
to 135° angle at the elbow joints. 7 4
B. Adjust the bottom cushion to achieve a 100° to 115° 6 5
01/14/2016 f910682b
angle at the hip joints. 1. Backrest Tilt 6. Fore/Aft Isolator
C. Adjust the seat height to achieve a 110° to 120° 2. Heat/Ventilation 7. Seat Extension
angle at the knee joints. 3. Back/Side Support 8. Fore/Aft Slide
D. Adjust the seat to achieve a 90° angle with the feet. 4. Height Adjustment 9. Seat Tilt Lever
Fig. 7.1, Correct Seating Posture 5. Isolator Adjustment

Fig. 7.2, ISRI Elite High Back Seat

ISRI Elite High Back Seat
When adjusted, the backrest inclination should
NOTE: The seat should only be adjusted when the allow the driver to reach the steering wheel with
vehicle is parked. angled arms.
The seat is designed to hold a maximum weight of
330 lb. NOTICE
The ISRI Elite seat has ten different features; the Do not install seat covers on seats with heating
controls are shown in Fig. 7.2. and ventilation. Do not cover the seat with
1. Backrest Tilt: Pull the handle out completely blankets, clothing, or pillows. Blocking the air
and lean back or forwards to adjust the backrest flow through the cushions can cause the seat to
tilt. Release the handle when the correct position overheat and damage the seat.
is achieved. The backrest has a 52 degree range Do not run the seat heating or ventilation when
of movement. the seat is unoccupied.
2. Heat/Ventilation: There are three heat or
ventilation settings available as shown in

7.1
 Seats and Restraints

Fig. 7.3. Toggle the rear button to adjust the

level of seat heating or ventilation.
Heat: To turn on the heat, push the top of the
forward switch as shown in Fig. 7.3. The red
light next to the switch will illuminate.
A sensor located in the seat controls the
temperature and will turn the heat off when the
desired temperature is reached. Body size and
clothing can affect how quickly the seat achieves
the set temperature.
Ventilation: To turn on the ventilation, push the
bottom of the forward switch as shown in
Fig. 7.3.. The blue light next to the switch will
illuminate.
Two fans will draw cabin air into the seats to
reduce perspiration. Ventilation should not be run
12/01/2021 f910834
continuously.
To turn off the heat and ventilation, move the Fig. 7.4, Lower Back Support
switch to the middle position; both lights will be
off. 3.2 Upper Back Support: Press the central
button to inflate the cushion highlighted in
Fig. 7.5 to increase support at the mid-
4 5
back region. This can help prevent the
driver from sitting in a slouched, hunched,
or hollow-back position.
3
H
2
M

1 L

12/02/2021 f910683
1. Ventilation On 4. On/Off Switch
2. Heat/Ventilation Off 5. Settings Switch
3. Heat On

Fig. 7.3, ISRI Elite Seat Heat/Ventilation Controls

3. Back and Side Support: There are three

switches that control the back and side support
areas of the seat. Making changes to a driver’s
sitting position from time to time helps prevent
driver fatigue and improves posture. 12/01/2021 f910835

3.1 Lumbar (Lower) Back Support: Press the Fig. 7.5, Upper Back Support
forward button to inflate the cushion
highlighted in Fig. 7.4 to increase support 3.3 Side Support:
at the lower back. This moves the driver’s Inflate the side bolster’s shown in Fig. 7.6
spine into a double S shape and to help prevent driving in slouched
decreases pressure on the spine. position and from sliding across the
backrest.

7.2
Seats and Restraints

8. Fore/Aft Slide: Pull the lever to unlock the seat

and slide it forward or back. Release the lever to
lock the seat in position.
Adjust the seat so that reaching and pressing the
pedals requires no effort and all dashboard
controls are within easy reach.
9. Seat Tilt: Pull the lever and add or reduce
weight on the front area of the seat cushion to
move it into one of three positions. Release the
lever to lock the seat into position.
The tilt of the seat, along with the tilt of the
backrest and the contour of the seat cushion,
affects the amount of pressure placed on the
underside of the thighs and the back.
10. Armrest Tilt: To adjust the armrest angle, tilt the
armrest to the highest position, then down to the
12/01/2021 f910836
lowest position, then to the desired position.
Fig. 7.6, Side Support The armrest should be at an angle where the
elbows lay lightly on it; this helps to relax the
4. Height Adjustment: Pull or push the handle to muscles in the shoulder and neck.
adjust the seat height.
Adjust the seat so the driver’s feet can move ISRI Premium High Back Seat
each pedal through its full range of motion
without fully stretching out the driver’s legs or NOTE: The seat should only be adjusted when the
using force. vehicle is parked with the park brake on.
5. Damper Adjustment: Move the lever down to The seat is designed to hold a maximum weight of
increase damping on rough roads, or up to 330 lb.
decrease damping on flat roads.
The ISRI Premium seat has nine different features;
The damper protects the driver’s spine by the controls are shown in Fig. 7.7.
absorbing vertical vibrations and shocks. It
should be adjusted down far enough that the 1. Backrest Tilt: Pull the handle out completely
driver’s feet never lose contact with the pedals. and lean back or forwards to adjust the backrest
In general, heavier drivers won’t have to adjust tilt. Release the handle when the correct position
the lever up. is achieved. The backrest has a 52 degree range
of movement.
6. Fore/Aft Isolator: Rotate the isolator lever to the
left to lock the isolator, or to the right to allow When adjusted, the backrest inclination should
horizontal movement. allow the driver to reach the steering wheel with
angled arms.
Damping horizontal shocks can be helpful with
driving off-road or pulling a tank trailer. 2. Back Support: There are two switches that
control the back areas of the seat. Making
7. Seat Extension: Pull the lever to move the seat changes to a driver’s sitting position from time to
cushion forwards or back. The cushion moves up time helps prevent driver fatigue and improves
to 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) in 3/8-inch (10-mm) posture.
increments. Releasing the lever locks the
cushion in place. 2.1 Lumbar (Lower) Back Support: Press the
forward button to inflate the cushion
Adjust the length of the seat cushion until there highlighted in Fig. 7.4 to increase support
is space for three fingers between the cushion’s at the lower back. This moves the driver’s
front edge and the back the driver’s knee. This spine into a double S shape and
helps to help improve circulation in the lower decreases pressure on the spine.
legs.

7.3
 Seats and Restraints

4. Damper Adjustment: Move the lever down to

increase damping on rough roads, or up to
decrease damping on flat roads.
The damper protects the driver’s spine by
absorbing vertical vibrations and shocks. It
should be adjusted down far enough that the
driver’s feet never lose contact with the pedals.
In general, heavier drivers won’t have to adjust
the lever up.
5. Fore/Aft Isolator: Rotate the isolator lever to the
left to lock the isolator, or to the right to allow
horizontal movement.
Damping horizontal shocks can be helpful with
driving off-road or pulling a tank trailer.
6. Seat Extension: Pull the lever to move the seat
cushion forwards or back. The cushion moves up
to 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) in 3/8-inch (10-mm)
increments. Releasing the lever locks the
cushion in place.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion until there
is space for three fingers between the cushion’s
front edge and the back the driver’s knee. This
helps to help improve circulation in the lower
1 legs.
7. Fore/Aft Slide: Pull the lever to unlock the seat
8 2
and slide it forward or back. Release the lever to
7 lock the seat in position.
6 3
5 4 Adjust the seat so that reaching and pressing the
12/02/2021 f910682f pedals requires no effort and all dashboard
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Fore/Aft Isolator controls are within easy reach.
2. Back Support 6. Seat Extension 8. Seat Tilt: Pull the lever and add or reduce
3. Height Adjustment 7. Fore/Aft Slide
weight on the front area of the seat cushion to
4. Isolator Adjustment 8. Seat Tilt Lever
move it into one of three positions. Release the
Fig. 7.7, ISRI Premium High Back Seat lever to lock the seat into position.

2.2 Upper Back Support: Press the back The tilt of the seat, along with the tilt of the
button to inflate the cushion highlighted in backrest and the contour of the seat cushion,
Fig. 7.5 to increase support at the mid- affects the amount of pressure placed on the
back region. This can help prevent the underside of the thighs and the back.
driver from sitting in a slouched, hunched, 9. Armrest Tilt: To adjust the armrest angle, tilt the
or hollow-back position. armrest to the highest position, then down to the
3. Height Adjustment: Pull or push the handle to lowest position, then to the desired position.
adjust the seat height. The armrest should be at an angle where the
Adjust the seat so the driver’s feet can move elbows lay lightly on it; this helps to relax the
each pedal through its full range of motion muscles in the shoulder and neck.
without fully stretching out the driver’s legs or
using force. ISRI Basic High Back Seat
NOTE: The seat should only be adjusted when
the vehicle is parked with the park brake on.

7.4
Seats and Restraints

The seat is designed to hold a maximum weight Press the forward button to inflate the cushion
of 330 lb. highlighted in Fig. 7.4 to increase support at the
lower back. This moves the driver’s spine into a
The ISRI Basic seat has eight different features; the double S shape and decreases pressure on the
controls are shown in Fig. 7.8. spine.
3. Height Adjustment: Pull or push the handle to
adjust the seat height.
Adjust the seat so the driver’s feet can move
each pedal through its full range of motion
without fully stretching out the driver’s legs or
using force.
4. Fore/Aft Isolator: Rotate the isolator lever to the
left to lock the isolator, or to the right to allow
horizontal movement.
Damping horizontal shocks can be helpful with
driving off-road or pulling a tank trailer.
5. Seat Extension: Pull the lever to move the seat
cushion forwards or back. The cushion moves up
to 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) in 3/8-inch (10-mm)
increments. Releasing the lever locks the
cushion in place.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion until there
is space for three fingers between the cushion’s
front edge and the back the driver’s knee. This
helps to help improve circulation in the lower
legs.
6. Fore/Aft Slide: Pull the lever to unlock the seat
and slide it forward or back. Release the lever to
1 lock the seat in position.
7 2 Adjust the seat so that reaching and pressing the
6 pedals requires no effort and all dashboard
5 3 controls are within easy reach.
4
12/02/2021 f910682e
7. Seat Tilt: Pull the lever and add or reduce
weight on the front area of the seat cushion to
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Seat Extension move it into one of three positions. Release the
2. Low Back Support 6. Fore/Aft Slide
3. Height Adjustment 7. Seat Tilt Lever
lever to lock the seat into position.
4. Fore/Aft Isolator The tilt of the seat, along with the tilt of the
backrest and the contour of the seat cushion,
Fig. 7.8, ISRI Basic High Back Seat
affects the amount of pressure placed on the
1. Backrest Tilt: Pull the handle out completely underside of the thighs and the back.
and lean back or forwards to adjust the backrest 8. Armrest Tilt: To adjust the armrest angle, tilt the
tilt. Release the handle when the correct position armrest to the highest position, then down to the
is achieved. The backrest has a 52 degree range lowest position, then to the desired position.
of movement.
The armrest should be at an angle where the
When adjusted, the backrest inclination should elbows lay lightly on it; this helps to relax the
allow the driver to reach the steering wheel with muscles in the shoulder and neck.
angled arms.
2. Lumbar (Lower) Back Support:

7.5
 Seats and Restraints

National High Back Seat

The National high back seat comes equipped with
BackCycler and can come equipped with RollTek.
See Fig. 7.9 and Fig. 7.10 for seat adjustment
controls.
The BackCycler feature cyclically inflates and
deflates an air bladder in the lumbar area of the seat.
Used regularly during long periods of sitting, the
BackCycler potentially relieves back strain.
The RollTek Rollover Protection System is described
later in this chapter.
1. Seat Height Adjustment: Pull up on the red
valve to increase air pressure and raise the seat.
Push down on the valve to lower the seat.
2. Leg and Back Bolster Support: These two grey
air valves inflate the sides of the seat cushion
and the sides of the back cushion. Pull up on a 7
valve to inflate an area of the seat and increase
support. Push down on a valve to deflate.
3. Three-Zone Air Lumbar Support: To adjust any 5
of the three lumbar zones, pull up on a valve to
inflate and push down to deflate. The further
6
back the valve, the higher the lumbar zone it
controls.
4. BackCycler Feature: To operate, deflate all
three lumbar support areas then press the
BackCycler switch to the on position. The
Backcycler will inflate and deflate the lumbar
area sections of the seat in 40 second cycles.
Let the BackCycler go through two or three
cycles before turning it off and reinflating the
lumbar support areas to the desired comfort
level.
5. Back Recline Adjustment: Locate the triangular 1 2 3 4
knob located at the back of the seat. Rotate it
05/15/2020 f910824
rearward to increase the recline of the seat and
forward to bring the seat back to an upright 1. Seat Height Adjustment
position. The seat can recline up to 23 degrees. 2. Leg and Back Bolster Support
3. Three-Zone Air Lumbar Support
6. Track Slide Adjustment: The lever beneath the 4. BackCycler Feature
front of the seat cushion controls the fore-and aft 5. Back Recline Adjustment
position of seat. While sitting in the seat, move 6. Track Slide Adjustment
the track slide lever to the right, then move the 7. Cushion Extension
seat forward or back. When the seat is in the Fig. 7.9, Left Side Controls of National High Back Seat
correct position, release the track slide lever to
lock it into position. The seat can move 7 inches front of the seat cushion to pull the seat cushion
(17.8 cm). forward.
7. Cushion Extension: With your weight off the
seat, pull the lever located directly beneath the

7.6
Seats and Restraints

raise the arm as you listen for clicks. Each click

represents one of seven armrest positions. Stop
when the armrest is high enough to support your
forearm in a horizontal position. Each armrest
can be adjusted independently.

Sears Atlas II Deluxe High

Back Seat
4 See Fig. 7.11 for seat adjustment controls.

1
3

05/15/2020 f910823
1. Rear Cushion Tilt 2
2. Suspension Base Isolator
3. Front Cushion Tilt
5
4. Armrest Adjustment
4
Fig. 7.10, Right Side Controls of National Seat

8. Rear Cushion Tilt: With your weight off the seat,

rotate the knob clockwise to raise the rear of the
3
seat cushion to the desired height. There are 07/11/2022 f910856
three rear cushion height positions.
1. Armrest Adjustment Knob
9. Suspension Base Isolator: Rotate the knob 2. Backrest Tilt Handle
counterclockwise to enable the isolation feature. 3. Lumbar Support Switches
Rotate the knob clockwise to decrease the level 4. Suspension Inflation/Deflation Switch
of isolation. To turn the isolator off, turn the knob 5. Isolator Lever
6. Slider Bar
clockwise until completely tightened. 7. Seat Extension Handle
10. Front Cushion Tilt: With your weight off the
seat, rotate the knob clockwise to raise the front Fig. 7.11, Sears Atlas II Deluxe High Back Seat
of the seat cushion to the desired height. There
are three front cushion height positions. 1. Armrest Adjustment Knob: While sitting in the
seat, rotate the knob underneath the armrest
11. Armrest Adjustment: Rotate an arm to the full counter-clockwise to tilt the armrest up, or
up position then rotate it fully down. Then slowly clockwise to tilt the armrest down.

7.7
 Seats and Restraints

2. Backrest Tilt Handle: Pull upward on the

recliner handle, then lean forward or rearward to
move the backrest to the desired position.
Release the handle to lock in the backrest angle.
3. Lumbar Support Switches:
Rear rocker switch: Push forward and hold to
inflate the upper lumbar pillow; push rearward
and hold to deflate the pillow.
Center rocker switch: Push forward and hold to 3
inflate the lower lumbar pillow; push rearward 2
and hold to deflate the pillow.
4. Suspension Inflation/Deflation Switch: Push 1
and hold the grey rocker switch forward to inflate
and raise the seat suspension; push and hold
the switch rearward to deflate and lower the seat
suspension.
5. Isolator Lever: Move the isolator lever to the left
to allow for isolation movement. Position the
handle to the right to lock out isolation
movement.
5
6. Slider Bar: Pull up on the slider bar and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar to
lock the seat into position. The seat can move 9 4
inches (23 cm).
7. Seat Extension Handle: With weight off the
seat, lift the seat cushion to release it. Facing the 07/13/2022 f910857
seat, rotate the handle under the front right
1. Seat Tilt and 4. Seat Controls
corner of the seat up and hold it as you pull or
Extension Knob 5. Forward-Rear Slide
push the seat cushion into the desired position. 2. Recliner Handle and Isolator Lever
Release the handle to lock the seat in place. 3. Armrest Adjustment
Three positions are available. Knob

Fig. 7.12, Sears Sentry High Back Seat

Sears Sentry High Back Seat
Rear rocker switch: Push forward to inflate the
See Fig. 7.12 for seat adjustment controls.
lower lumbar bag; push rearward to deflate the
1. Seat Tilt and Extension Knob: Rotate the knob bag.
clockwise to change the tilt or extension of the Forward rocker switch: Push forward to inflate
seat. Release the handle to lock the seat into the upper lumbar bag; push rearward to deflate
position. the bag.
2. Recliner Handle: Pull upward on the recliner 5. Forward-Rear Slide & Isolator Lever:
handle to move the backrest forward or back.
Release the handle to lock in the backrest angle. Forward-Rear Slide: Facing the seat, move the
slide lever all the way to the right to move the
3. Armrest Adjustment Knob: Rotate the control seat forward or back. When the seat is in the
knob, located on the underside of the armrest, correct position, release the slide lever to lock it
clockwise or counterclockwise to set the angle of into position. The seat can move 9 inches (22.9
the armrest. cm).
4. Seat Controls: Isolator Lever: Facing the seat, move the lever to
the left to unlock the seat and allow movement.

7.8
Seats and Restraints

To lock-out movement, move the handle to the appropriate. To determine whether a child restraint
right. The seat may have to be moved slightly system is required, review and comply with
forward or back to get the detent into the locked applicable state and local laws. Any child restraint
position. used must comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213, "Child Restraint Systems." When
Seat Belts and Tether Belts providing a child restraint system, always carefully
read and follow all instructions pertaining to
Tether Belt Information installation and usage for the child. Make certain the
child remains in the restraint system at all times
Tether belts are installed on suspension-type seats. when the vehicle is in motion.
Tether belts help secure the seat to the floor and are
intended to restrain the seat and seat belt in case of IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which
an accident or sudden stop. may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle.
Regular inspections and replacement as needed
Seat Belt Information are the only assurance of adequate seat belt
security over the life of the vehicle.
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury, or
the amount of injury, resulting from accidents or
Seat Belt Inspection
sudden stops. For this reason, Daimler Truck North
America (DTNA) LLC urges that the driver and all WARNING
passengers, regardless of age or physical condition,
use seat belts when riding in the vehicle. Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
As a reminder for the driver, if equipped, when the
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
parking brake is released and the driver’s seat belt is
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
unfastened, the red seatbelt unfastened telltale as
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
shown in Fig. 7.13 will light up on the driver display
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be
screen and a audible alert will activate.
replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not
attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may
result in personal injury or death.
07/27/2022 f611667a Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
equipped).
Fig. 7.13, Seatbelt Unfastened Telltale
1. Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
There are no seat belt sensors on passenger seats dust, or for severe fading from exposure to
except for National Fire Protection Association sunlight, especially near the buckle latch plate
(NFPA) vehicles where there is a seatbelt sensor for and in the D-loop guide area.
each occupant. 2. Check operation of the buckle, latch, web
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
WARNING pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
Always use the vehicle’s seat belt system when 3. Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result
points and tighten any that are loose.
in severe personal injury or death.
Seat belt assemblies in DTNA vehicles meet Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and
"Type 2" requirements.
When transporting a child, always use a child
restraint system or the vehicle seat belts as

7.9
 Seats and Restraints

Seat Belt Operation

WARNING
Wear three-point seat belts only as described
below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an
accident or sudden stop, personal injury or death
could result from misuse.
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
three-point seat belt while driving creates a
hazard.
When engaged and used properly, the two different
versions of the Komfort Latch, shown in Fig. 7.14
and Fig. 7.15, introduce a small amount of slack into
the seat belt, resulting in a more comfortable ride.

11/18/2010 f910621a

Fig. 7.15, Second Generation Komfort Latch

A B

03/11/2010 f910620
A. Disengaged B. Engaged
Fig. 7.14, First Generation Komfort Latch 1

Fastening the Seat Belt

1. If needed, adjust the seat to achieve the proper 2
driving position.
2. Slowly pull the link end of the seat belt out of the
retractor and pull it across your lap (from
outboard to inboard) far enough to engage the
07/02/2007 f910578
buckle. If the retractor locks too soon, allow the
belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it out 1. Latch 2. Buckle
again. See Fig. 7.16. Fig. 7.16, Three-Point Seat Belt Operation

7.10
Seats and Restraints

3. Fasten the seat belt by pushing the latch into the

buckle. Listen for an audible click.
4. Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
step. If the problem continues, replace the seat
belt. A

5. Snug the seat belt to your waist.

WARNING
Before activating a Komfort Latch, make sure the
amount of slack in the shoulder strap is set as
described below. Excess slack in the shoulder
strap reduces the effectiveness of the seat belt,
and increases the risk of injury or death in an 02/03/2017 f910048a
accident.
A. Create no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of space
6. If equipped with a seat belt height adjuster, between your chest and the strap.
adjust it to position the shoulder strap diagonally
across your chest. The shoulder strap must be Fig. 7.18, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance for
the First Generation Komfort Latch
centered on your shoulder and chest, away from
your face and neck as shown in Fig. 7.17.

A B C
02/03/2017 f910634
A. Correct—Belt is centered on your shoulder and
chest, away from your face and neck.
B. Wrong—Belt must not rub against face or neck.
C. Wrong—Belt must not hang off shoulder. 02/03/2017 f910144

Fig. 7.17, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit Fig. 7.19, Locking the First Generation Komfort Latch

7. If desired, engage the equipped Komfort Latch: 7.2 If equipped with a second generation
Komfort Latch, make sure that the
7.1 If equipped with a first generation Komfort shoulder strap is snug against your chest.
Latch, pull on the shoulder strap to create Without loosening the shoulder strap,
1 inch (2.5 cm) of space between your push the switch to the ON position. To
chest and the strap as shown in Fig. 7.18. activate the latch lean forward about 4
While holding the belt slack, press the inches (10 cm) until you hear a click.
Komfort Latch lever up as shown in
Fig. 7.19. Once engaged, the latch gives
approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack
Allow no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of between your chest and the shoulder
slack as more slack can significantly harness and allows you to lean forward
reduce the seat belt effectiveness. about 5 inches (13 cm).

7.11
 Seats and Restraints

If you lean forward against the shoulder

belt more than 5 inches (13 cm), the latch WARNING
will automatically release.
Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured. Do not
Unfastening the Seat Belt place objects on the steering wheel or between
you and the steering wheel. Any such objects
NOTE: Komfort Latches do not need to be may cause harm during an accident. Keep your
manually released in an emergency situation. hands on the sides and lower portion of the
Each will release by itself under rough road or steering wheel. Failure to follow these
other abnormal conditions. instructions may result in death or personal
injury.
1. Unbuckle the seat belt.
For maximum protection in a collision, always be in a
2. If engaged, release the Komfort Latch: normal seated position with your back against the
2.1 If equipped with a first generation Komfort seat back and your head upright. Fasten your seat
Latch, unbuckle the seat belt, then release belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your
the Komfort Latch by giving the shoulder body. Since the air bag inflates with considerable
belt a quick tug, or reach up and pull the speed and force, a proper seat position will help
Sliding Komfort latch down. keep you a safe distance from an inflating air bag.

2.2 If equipped with a second generation Inspection and Service

Komfort Latch, unbuckle the seat belt,
then tug on the shoulder belt to release
the latch, or reach up and press the WARNING
Sliding Komfort latch to the OFF position.
Do not attempt to service or modify the air bag
3. Make sure the belt is completely retracted and system. Unintentional or improper air bag
out of the way before exciting the vehicle. deployment could cause severe bodily injury or
death. Contact an authorized Freightliner service
Steering Wheel Air Bag facility for all service and maintenance.
The air bag system contains components that
Operation use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill,
NOTE: If equipped with a supplemental restraint braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe the air bag
system (SRS), or steering wheel air bag, the components. Keep all liquids and chemicals
letters SRS will be molded into the center of the away from air bag components.
steering wheel. The surface of the deployed air bag may contain
small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a
NOTICE by-product of the gas generant combustion) and
metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be
The air bag module may contain perchlorate irritating to the skin and eyes. Immediately wash
material; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ your hands and exposed skin areas with a mild
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling soap and water. Flush your eyes immediately if
may apply; follow appropriate rules and exposed to sodium hydroxide.
regulations when disposing of materials. The operational readiness of the air bag system is
When used with seat belts, the SRS provides indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS)
additional protection to the driver in severe frontal error telltale as shown in Fig. 7.20.. The SRS error
collisions. Steering wheel air bags are designed to telltale illuminates for several seconds when the
inflate only in severe frontal collisions. The driver and ignition is turned on, and then it goes off. The telltale
the passenger should always wear seat belts. The will remain on if there is a problem with the air bag
steering wheel air bag will activate during a collision system. The vehicle should be serviced if the SRS
even if the seat belts are not fastened, but the telltale does not illuminate when the ignition is turned
system is designed to provide protection to the on, or if the SRS telltale remains on.
occupant only when the seat belts are fastened. For all service and maintenance, contact an
authorized Freightliner service facility.

7.12
Seats and Restraints

07/27/2022 f611697a

Fig. 7.20, SRS Error Telltale

RollTek Rollover Protection A

System
Identification
A RollTek equipped National high back driver seat is
an option on the eCascadia.
Seats with the molded side-roll air bag cover on the
upper side of the seat back are equipped with the
RollTek rollover protection system; see Fig. 7.21. B
RollTek may be installed in one of the following
configurations:
• driver seat only
• driver seat with an optional steering wheel
frontal air bag

Operation
NOTICE
The air bag module may contain perchlorate 07/03/2007 f910579
material; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ A. Side-roll air bag contained in seat.
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling B. Side-roll air bag deployed.
may apply; follow appropriate rules and
regulations when disposing of materials. Fig. 7.21, Side-Roll Air Bag

The RollTek system, when used with seat belts, personal injury or death. Do not place infants and
provides increased seat stability and head and neck children in seats equipped with the RollTek
protection to the driver in rollover accidents. Vehicles system. Doing so could result in severe bodily
equipped with RollTek rollover protection have a injury or death. The RollTek system is designed
sensor mounted in the seat base. When the module for adults only. Keep all heavy objects in the cab
senses a rollover, it activates a power cinch that secured. Do not place objects that block the side-
tightens the lap and shoulder belts and lowers the roll air bag. Objects that block the side-roll air
seat suspension, moving the occupant down and bag may prevent proper inflation and could result
away from the steering wheel and ceiling. As the in serious injury or death.
seat is pulled down to its lowest position, the side-roll
The RollTek system will activate during a rollover
air bag deploys from the outboard side of the seat.
even if the seat belts are not fastened, but the
See Fig. 7.21.
RollTek system is only designed to provide protection
to the occupant when the seat belts are fastened.
WARNING For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) only,
Always use the seat belts when operating the device(s) deploy as follows:
vehicle. Failure to do so can result in severe

7.13
 Seats and Restraints

• Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pre- Freightliner service facility for all service and
tensioning, seat pre-tensioning, and side-roll air maintenance.
bag at the proper time
IMPORTANT: The RollTek system must be
• Frontal Crash—no devices deployed replaced after being activated. Damaged seat
For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) and frontal belts and tethers, or seat belts and tethers that
steering wheel air bag, device(s) deploy as follows: were worn in an accident, must be replaced,
and their anchoring points must be checked.
• Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pre-
tensioning, seat pre-tensioning, and side-roll air The operational readiness of the RollTek system is
bag at the proper time indicated by the SRS telltale on the driver display as
shown in 7.20.
• Frontal Crash—steering wheel air bag,
occupant seat belt pre-tensioning, seat pre-
tensioning, and the side-roll air bag at the Passenger Safety Telltales
proper time
Indicators (telltales) and Messages
Inspection and Service Telltales and messages appear on the driver display.
The positions of the telltales vary, but most use
WARNING standard symbols.

Keep hands and tools away from the scissor The colors of telltales indicate the hazard level as
points under the seats. follows: red (warning), amber (caution), green
(normal function), blue (active status), grey (passive
The RollTek system contains components that status), white (informational).
use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill,
The colors of messages indicate the hazard level as
braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe any part of
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), grey
the RollTek system. Keep all liquids and
(informational).
chemicals away from the RollTek components.
Telltales for passenger safety related features are
Do not attempt to service or modify the RollTek listed in Table 7.1. Every vehicle may not be
system. Unintentional or improper deployment of equipped with every feature.
the RollTek system could cause severe bodily
injury or death. Contact an authorized

Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Message
When the system detects
that the parking brake is
Unfastened Seat
Red Indicates the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. off and the driver seat belt
Belt
is not fastened an audible
alert activates.
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the If the SRS telltale
Supplemental restraint system and restraint system appears, have the
Amber Restraint System components may be triggered restraint system
(SRS) Error unintentionally or may not deploy as checked and repaired
intended during an accident. immediately.

Left-Hand Door Indicates the left-hand door on two door cab

White
Unlatched is unlatched.

Right-Hand Door Indicates the right-hand door on two door

White
Unlatched cab is unlatched.

7.14
Seats and Restraints

Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

Telltale Color Description Related Message

Both Doors Indicates both doors on a two door cab are

White
Unlatched unlatched.

Table 7.1, Passenger Safety Telltale Lamps and Messages

7.15
 8
Cab Features
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Adjustable Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Windshield Wiper and Washer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
Cab Features

Cab Amenities Physical radio controls are located on the right-hand

switch pod and on the panel below the infotainment
The following are standard and common features in screen. The switch pod contains radio volume
an eCascadia cab. controls and a mute button, shown in Fig. 8.2, and

10
9

8
2 3 4 5
1 6
7

11

12

15

13
14
.07/11/2022 f612073
1. Steering Wheel Switch Pods 6. Dash Top Trays 11. Power Outlets
2. Driver Display 7. USB Ports 12. Passenger Storage Pocket
3. Infotainment Display 8. Camera & Rain/Light Sensor 13. eStop Button
4. HVAC Controls 9. Bendix SafetyDirect® Camera 14. Cup Holders
5. Dash Storage Pocket 10. Side Guard Assist Warning Light 15. Storage Trays

Fig. 8.1, Standard and Common Cab Features

Radio the infotainment switch panel contains volume

controls and a shortcut switch to the digital radio
An AM/FM/WB/SiriusXM radio with bluetooth is screens.
integrated into the infotainment display touch panel.
See Fig. 8.1. Other radio controls, such as choosing an audio
source or radio station, or saving a station as a
Radio Controls favorite can be done through the infotainment touch
screen. For instructions, see the ’Radio’ section in
Radio controls are a mix of both physical and Chapter 3 Instruments.
electronic.

8.1
 Cab Features

Overhead storage is also available.

1
2
3 Keyswitch
The keyswitch is located on the left-hand dash,
below the headlight switch.
The keyswitch has four positions: ACC (accessory),
OFF, ON, and START. See Fig. 8.3.

6 5 A 4
05/03/2022 f612076b
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument menus on the infotainment display.
Swipe a finger across the button to move through
screen options on the infotainment display.
1. Phone Pick-Up/Answer
2. Back Button
02/03/2017 f610805
3. Volume Increment Up
4. Volume Increment Down
5. Mute Button Fig. 8.3, Keyswitch
6. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
In the OFF position, the keyswitch is vertical. The
Fig. 8.2, Steering-Wheel Right-Hand Switch Pod - ICC5 key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF
position.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Ports The following functions are operable when the
Two USB ports are located on the dash to connect keyswitch is in the OFF position (regardless of
and charge different devices. whether a key is inserted):
• low-beam headlights
Power Outlets
• tail lights / brake lights
Two 12V power outlets are located in the dash to
• road lights
power personal devices.
• dome light
CB Radio • clearance / marker lights
The overhead console is wired to support a CB
• hazard warning lights
radio.
• identification lights
Cup Holders • electric horn
Three cup holders are molded into the center dash. • CB radio
Storage • power mirrors

Storage pockets are molded into the bottom part of • power receptacles
the driver and passenger doors, to the right of the Turn the key counterclockwise to reach the ACC
center dash, and above the USB ports in the dash. position. In addition to all the functions that are
There are also two shallow molded trays and a coin operable in the OFF position, the following functions
pocket in the center dash and trays molded into the are operable when the switch is in the ACC position:
top of the dash.

8.2
Cab Features

Interior Lights
• radio
• blower motors
• heated mirrors
• backup light
Turn the key clockwise past the OFF position to
reach the ON position. With the switch in the ON
position, all electrical systems become operable and
the warning and indicator lamps illuminate. Wait for
the ICU self-check to complete before starting the
vehicle.
Momentarily turn the key clockwise past the ON
position to the START position to activate the
powertrain. When the powertrain is active, the ready A
telltale appears on the driver’s display.

Adjustable Steering Column

Controls
WARNING 09/14/2016 f462301
A. Pull the steering column locking lever away from the
Make sure that the steering column is locked column.
before driving the vehicle. Never attempt to
adjust the column while driving the vehicle. Fig. 8.4, Unlocking the Steering Column
Doing so could cause loss of vehicle control,
personal injury, and property damage.
To unlock the steering column to adjust it, pull the
steering column locking lever away from the column. 1
As you pull it away it arcs down as shown in 2
Fig. 8.4.
With the column unlocked, the steering wheel can be
adjusted up-and-down and tilted forward and
backward. Once the wheel is in the desired position,
lock the position by pushing the lever toward the
column until it is parallel to the column and cannot
be pushed in further.
5 4 3
Interior Lighting Controls 10/18/2021 f547669

Interior lights include the dome light, dash or reading 1. Cab Dome Light 3. Foot Well Light
lights, foot lights, courtesy lights, and the dash 2. Dash or Reading 4. Foot Well Light
Lights 5. Door Light
lighting.
Lamps may be controlled by vehicle inputs, dash- Fig. 8.5, Example of Cab Interior Lighting
mounted switches, or both.
Courtesy Lighting
Dash-mounted switches are backlit to illuminate both
the text and icon on the switch. Press the upper half Courtesy lighting consists of a number of lamps that
of the switch to turn the desired light(s) on or off. If illuminate when a cab door is opened. These lamps
the lights have a dimming function, holding the include:
switch cycles the light between bright and dim. • door lamps,

8.3
 Cab Features

• foot well lamps, and Dash or Reading Lamps

• cab dome lamp. The dash or reading light consists of two lamps that
The duration of this courtesy lighting can be modified provides ambient light for the center dash area.
on the infotainment screen under ’Lighting’ > ’Interior These can be turned on and off by pressing on the
Lighting’ > ’Settings’ (gear icon). lamp covers.

Door Lamps Dash Lighting

A door lamp is located on the bottom front of each The light from the dash switches and screens adjusts
door pocket. automatically based on ambient lighting.

Foot Well Lamps Premium Lighting

These amber lamps illuminate both foot wells. These Some vehicles are equipped with premium lighting.
can also be activated with the foot well light switch, Premium lighting gradually illuminates the cab and
shown in Fig. 8.6. dash lamps when they are turned on and gradually
dims them when they are turned off.

Windows
Power windows are standard on eCascadia vehicles.
The passenger’s door has a switch mounted in the
top of the door that controls the passenger-side
power window. The driver’s door has two switches
FOOT mounted in the top of the door, one to control the
driver’s window and the other the passenger’s
WELL
window, shown in Fig. 8.8.
05/19/2020 f611828

Fig. 8.6, Foot Well Light Dash Switch CAUTION

Cab Dome Lamp There is no anti-pinch protection when the
This is the lamp located on the highest point of the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
’dome’ of the cab. It can also be controlled with the objects from the window before closing.
dome light switch, shown in Fig. 8.7.
Press forward on a window switch to lower the
window. Hold the switch down in the forward position
for approximately one second to activate the express
function to have the window roll down after the
switch is released. Press the switch in the rearward
position to raise the window.

Mirrors
Power mirrors are standard on eCascadia vehicles.
DOME
LIGHT Outside mirrors are mounted on the door frame and
are controlled with the driver side door switches
05/19/2020 f611829 shown in Fig. 8.8.
Adjust the driver side mirror by pressing the mirror
Fig. 8.7, Cab Dome Light Switch
selector switch to the left and then using the
directional arrow switch to move the mirror. Press the
mirror selector switch to the right to use the

8.4
Cab Features

The windshield wipers and washer controls are on

the left-hand stalk switch on the steering column.
See Fig. 8.9.
1

2
4

3 1

6 3 2

02/17/2017 f611264
02/23/2016 f611331
1. Headlight Icons 4. Turn Signal Icons
1. Mirror Selector Switch 2. Wiper Speed Switch
2. Mirror Directional Switch 3. Windshield Washer
3. Mirror Heat Switch Switch
4. Passenger-Side Window Switch
5. Driver-Side Window Switch Fig. 8.9, Windshield Wiper and Washer Controls
6. Door Lock Switch
Fig. 8.8, Door Switches (driver-side shown)
Wiper Controls
The wipers are operated by a rotary switch on the
directional arrow switch to move the passenger side left-hand stalk switch. There are five settings: off, two
mirror. intermittent speeds, and two continuous speeds.
To heat the outside door mirrors and clear them of Symbols mark each setting on the dial.
fog, frost, or ice, press the outboard part of the mirror Turn the wipers on by rotating the wiper speed
heat switch on the door. An amber indicator light on switch up. Continue to rotate the switch to increase
the mirror heat switch illuminates when the mirror the wiper speed through the two intermittent speeds,
heat is on. The mirror heat automatically turns off the continuous low speed, to the continuous high
after 20 minutes unless the ambient air temperature speed. Rotate the switch down to slow the wipers.
is less than 28°F (-2°C), at this temperature it cycles Rotate the switch all the way down to turn the wipers
on and off in 20 minute increments. off.
The default speeds for the two intermittent speeds
Windshield Wiper and Washer are six seconds and one second.
Controls The first intermittent speed of six seconds is
programmable. It can be reduced to one second or
NOTICE increased up to 25 seconds. To program the interval,
rotate the switch from the first intermittent position to
Do not attempt to manually move the windshield the off position, wait for the desired interval between
wiper arms. Forcibly moving the wiper arms wipes to lapse (between one and 25 seconds), and
damages the wiper motor. then move the switch back to the first intermittent
position. If the switch is kept in the off position for
more than 50 seconds, the interval changes back to
the default of 6 seconds.

8.5
 Cab Features

The second intermittent speed has an interval of one

second is not programmable.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a feature
that turns on the headlights if the windshield
wipers are on and the vehicle is moving faster
than 10 mph (16 km/h). At speeds between 10
and 40 mph (16 to 64 km/h), cycling the
headlight switch, shown in Fig. 8.10, turns the
headlights off.

3 2
2 4
1
5 05/12/2022 f546894b
1. Multipurpose Camera 2 (MPC2)
3. Rain/Light Sensor
Fig. 8.11, Multipurpose Camera 2 Component Locations

Windshield Washer System

The windshield washer switch is located at the end
of the left-hand stalk switch. Momentarily press the
1 washer switch to initiate a single swipe of the
windshield wipers without activating the washer
pump.
To activate the windshield washer system, press and
08/28/2018 f611525
hold the washer switch. After a short delay, the pump
1. Fog Lights (optional)—Activate by pulling the switch sprays windshield washer fluid onto the windshield
out when the marker lights or headlights are on. and the wipers turn on at low speed. Continue
2. Automatic Headlights
pressing the switch to pump washer fluid and
3. Off
4. Marker Lights activate the wipers. After the switch is released, the
5. Headlights pump turns off but the wipers operate for one to
several wipe cycles, depending on how long the
Fig. 8.10, Headlight Switch switch was pressed.

Wipers and the Rain/Light Sensor Cab Climate Controls

A rain/light sensor, location shown in Fig. 8.11, is NOTE: When operating the vehicle in extreme
standard equipment. When the sensor detects rain or cold weather, HVAC performance may be
snow, and the wiper speed switch is set to one of the
reduced.
intermittent settings, the wipers activate to clean the
window. The standard cab climate controls include a fan knob
If the vehicle is moving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with a recirculation button, a temperature control
the wiper speed automatically increases and knob with an A/C button, and a mode control knob.
decreases, dependent upon how much moisture When the fan speed, temperature, or mode are
builds up on the windshield between wipes. adjusted, these settings briefly appear on the
infotainment touch screen.
If the wiper switch is set to a continuous speed (low
or high), input from the rain/light sensor is ignored. Fan Knob and Recirculation Mode
The behavior of the wipers based on the rain/light
NOTE: There is a delay between the time the
sensor input is independent of the headlamp switch
position. vehicle is started and the blower becoming

8.6
Cab Features

operational. The delay is caused by the blower pressing the recirculation button twice to switch back
motor performing a self-test immediately after to full recirculation mode for another 20 minutes.
the vehicle starts.
Temperature Control Knob
The fan knob controls the fan speed. The fan can be
set to move fresh or recirculated air through the air The temperature control knob is used to select the
outlets. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise desired temperature in the cab. Turn the knob
to a higher number. To decrease airflow, turn the counterclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
knob counterclockwise to a lower number. The fan See Fig. 8.13.
knob has ten fan speed settings and an off position.
See Fig. 8.12.

03/21/2022 f612022
1. Air Conditioning Button

03/23/2022 f612021 Fig. 8.13, Temperature Control Knob

1. Recirculation Mode Button
Air Conditioning Button
Fig. 8.12, Fan Knob
The air conditioner (A/C) cools and dehumidifies the
Recirculation Mode air inside the cab. Press the A/C button, located in
the center of the temperature control knob as shown
NOTE: If the mode control switch is in defrost in Fig. 8.13, to turn the air conditioner on and off.
mode, recirculation mode isn’t available. The A/C has three modes:
Recirculation mode limits the amount of outside air • Off
entering the cab. Recirculation mode can also • Economy (ECO); green LED
decrease the time required to cool or heat the cab
interior when environmental temperatures are either • Full A/C (maximum cooling); blue LED
extremely hot or extremely cold. The ECO mode does not cool the air temperature as
Press the recirculation mode button shown in low as the full A/C mode but draws less energy.
Fig. 8.12 to prevent drawing dusty, smoky, extremely
If full A/C mode is selected, the system changes to
hot, or extremely cold air into the cab. An amber
ECO mode after 45 minutes to increase energy
indicator on the recirculation button illuminates when
efficiency. The button LED changes from blue to
the recirculation mode is activated.
green to indicate this shift. To return to full A/C mode
To prevent the buildup of odors and oxygen depletion for 45 minutes, push the A/C button again.
inside the cab, the system changes from full
recirculation mode to partial recirculation mode after Mode Control Knob
20 minutes. During extreme climate conditions or
when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, the The mode control knob allows the driver to control
partial recirculation mode can be overridden by the flow of air through the face outlets, the floor

8.7
 Cab Features

outlets, the defrost (windshield) outlets, or a

combination of these outlets. See Fig. 8.14.
• Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face
or instrument panel outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to
the face outlets and the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor
outlets.
• Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally
to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets.
• Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
defrost outlets.
• All Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the
face, floor, and defrost outlets.

2 4

5
1

03/21/2022 f612023
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between each
knob position.
1. Face Mode 4. Floor/Defrost Mode
2. Bi-Level Mode 5. Defrost Mode
3. Floor Mode 6. All Mode

Fig. 8.14, Mode Control Knob

8.8
 9
Electrical System
Electric Vehicle Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Low-Voltage Battery Disconnect Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Smart Battery Shut-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Electric Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Powernet Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Electrical System

Electric Vehicle Overview Electric Vehicle Distribution Module (EVDM): An

electrical system on a commercial vehicle usually
consists of 12V and/or 24V loads/components that
DANGER are connected to power distribution modules to get
energized and be functional. In these systems, it is
Service and repair of an electric vehicle should desirable to protect 12V and 24V components,
only be performed by technicians that have outputs/inputs, wires and cables from possible over-
completed HV3 Daimler Safety Training. To current events. The electric vehicle power distribution
prevent personal injury or death, or damage to module (EVDM) is the main component implementing
the electric system, do not attempt repairs this functionality on an electric vehicle.
yourself.
The eCascadia has a multiplex electrical system. By
transmitting multiple electronic messages through the
WARNING same wire, a multiplex system reduces the number
of interconnected wires, allows for more precise
The strong electromagnetic field generated by control of the electrical system, and makes it easer
the inverter can cause severe personal injury or and quicker to diagnose electrical faults and add
death to people with active implanted cardiac optional equipment.
devices. Individuals with an active implanted
cardiac device must stay away from the vicinity In addition, the wiring harnesses are developed for
of the active equipment. the maximum number of options, meaning that space
for additional wires is available within the wiring
See Fig. 9.1 for an overview of the eCascadia harness regardless of the number of optional
electric vehicle components. features on the vehicle. This design provides a
See Fig. 9.2 for a diagram of a high-voltage battery. cleaner main harness and is meant to eliminate the
need for wiring overlays
See Fig. 9.3 for the components of a high-voltage
cable. Electronic control modules (ECUs) coordinate power
to outputs such as lighting, displays, gauges, and
See Fig. 9.4 for the connections between high- indicators and control power distribution by
voltage batteries. monitoring inputs such as sensors and switches.
Inverter: An inverter converts power from a direct The ECUs also continuously monitor the status of all
current (DC) power source (the high-voltage input devices and transmit messages over multiple
batteries) to the three phase alternating current control area networks (CANs), reducing the number
power needed to drive the motor. of sensors required for operation.
Charge Port(s): A vehicle may be outfitted with one
or two charging ports. A single coupler in either inlet Electric Vehicle Cooling Components
may be used to charge a vehicle with dual ports.
The cooling components are designed to keep the
When both inlets are used, inlet one charges battery
eAxles and high-voltage batteries at their optimum
one and two and inlet two charges battery three and
operating temperatures. This results in the most
the power supplied to inlet one is double the power
efficient delivery of power and less component
supplied to inlet two.
stress.
Charging: The high-voltage batteries can only be The central components of the cooling system are
charged at DC charging stations meeting the J1772 the radiator assembly, surge tanks, electric
standards. refrigerant compressor, heaters, and the electric
Charging Time: When charging with a direct current, pumps; the pumps circulate the coolant through all of
the charging time will vary based on the size of the the connected components.
charger and the vehicle limitations. In general, Radiator: The radiator is placed in front of the front
charging a factory-fitted high-voltage battery to 95% box, connecting to the other cooling components. It
of the charge level with a direct current and a helps to eliminate excess heat from the eAxle and
charging power of 180kW will take 2-3 hours, high-voltage batteries. It includes a liquid coolant,
depending on battery size. hoses to circulate the coolant, fans and a thermostat
that monitors the coolant temperature.

9.1
 Electrical System

2
4

10

5 6 7
01/20/2022 f547629
1. Front-Box Area 5. Charge Fuse 8. Charge Port(s)
2. Mid-Frame Area 6. Direct Current (DC) Boxes 9. eCarriers
3. Rear Area 7. High-Voltage Batteries 10 eAxles
4. Inverters
Fig. 9.1, eCascadia Electric Vehicle Components Overview

Surge Tank: The surge tank provides storage space resistance at temperatures above a certain level and
for reserve coolant, expansion space for heated is able to maintain a constant heating element
coolant, and de-aeration space. When coolant in the temperature during load and supply voltage changes.
radiator runs low, reserve coolant stored in the surge For this reason, the risk of the heating element’s
tank flows from the tank, through the fill hose, to the overheating or catching fire is minimal, even under
water pump. unexpected boil-dry conditions due to the loss of hot
water. Moreover, the heat generation capacity is
Electric Coolant Pump: An electric coolant pump is
nearly constant over a wide range of battery voltage
powered by the low-voltage system. It pressurizes
the coolant to ensure the coolant circulates in the fluctuations.
cooling system. Chiller: The chiller transfers the thermal energy from
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC): The PTC the battery coolant loop to the vehicle’s refrigerant
loop to maintain optimum battery temperatures. The
heaters provide efficiency and safety to the electric
vehicle heating system. This heater uses a PTC chiller has an electronic expansion valve that
regulates the refrigerant flow into the chiller.
semiconductor as the heating element. The PTC
semiconductor drastically increases its electrical

9.2
Electrical System

4 5

3
2

1 6
10/05/2021 f080335
1. Housing 3. Outlet Manifold 5. Gasket
2. EE Box 4. Inlet Manifold 6. Coolant Line
Fig. 9.2, High-Voltage Battery

1 2 3 4 5 6 Electric Air Compressor

The electric air compressor provides and maintains
air under pressure to operate devices in the air brake
system.

The Instrumentation Control Unit

12/17/2021 f080383
(ICU) and Fault Codes
1. Cable 4. Shield Clip NOTE: Some non-critical faults may be
2. Cable Gland Retaining 5. Cable Gland suppressed and will not appear during an
Ring Connector Ring
3. Sealing Rubber 6. Adapter Plate
instrumentation control unit (ICU) self-check.
The majority of electrical and electronic issues on the
Fig. 9.3, High-Voltage Cable
vehicle will have an associated fault code, which will
Electric Refrigerant Compressor (eRC): The be displayed on the ICU.
electric refrigerant compressor is the heart of the If the ICU receives active fault codes during the ICU
cooling cycle. The cycle begins when the compressor self-check, it displays them one after the other until
draws in cool, low-pressure refrigerant gas from the parking brake is released or the keyswtich is
indoors. The motor-driven compressor’s sole function turned off. Once the parking brake is completely
is to squeeze the refrigerant, raising its temperature released, the ICU displays alerts until acknowledged.
and pressure so that it exits the compressor as a If there are no active faults, the ICU displays the
hot, high-pressure gas. home screen after the self-check completes.
3/2 Valve: The three by two valve has one inlet, and When there is an active vehicle fault code, a popup
two outlet options: A or B. It lets the coolant flow to appears on the ICU message screen. See Table 9.1
either the radiator or the active cooling or heating for a list of Acronyms used in fault codes for the ICU.
modes.

9.3
 Electrical System

4 4

1 2 3
12/21/2021 f080291
1. High-Voltage Cable 3. Tie Straps 4. Clamps
2. Plug
Fig. 9.4, High-Voltage Cables Connecting the Batteries

ICU Electronic Control Unit Acronyms

ABS Antilock Brake System EHPS Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering
Battery Management System
BMS# There can be up to nine battery management ETCM Electronic Transmission Control Module
systems: BMS1, BMS2, . . . BMS9.
CGW Central Gateway HVCF Heating/Ventilation/AC Front (HVAC)
DBC Direct Current Box ICU Instrumentation Control Unit
RDF
DCL DC/DC Converter RDF
Radar Front End
DCMD Door Control Module, Driver SAS Steering Angle Sensor
DCMP Door Control Module, Passenger SSAM Single Signal Detect and Actuation Module
EAPU Electronic Air Processing Unit TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ECPC Electronic Common Powertrain Controller VRDU Video Radar Decision Unit
Table 9.1, ICU Electronic Control Unit Acronyms

9.4
Electrical System

Low-Voltage Battery Smart Battery Shut-Off Switch

Disconnect Procedure
WARNING
NOTICE Turning the smart battery shut-off switch to OFF
does not disconnect power to all electrical
The low-voltage batteries on this vehicle are
components (e.g. the starter and sSAM). To work
wired in series and in parallel to allow for both
on the vehicle safely, the vehicle must be
12V and 24V power. Failure to follow the
decommissioned.
disconnect procedure could cause sparks and
issues with the vehicle’s electrical system. IMPORTANT: The keyswitch should be in the off
1. Remove the three fasteners connecting the position before turning the smart battery shut-off
negative 12V battery strap, shown in Fig. 9.5, switch on or off.
and remove the strap from the vehicle. The smart battery shut-off switch is located inside the
cab on the outboard side of the driver’s seat.
4 3 1
The smart battery shut-off switch can be used to
open (turn off) or close (turn on) the circuits between
the low-voltage battery and the battery cable access
box (BCA). Where pressing the eStop button
prevents the high-voltage system from turning on,
turning off the smart battery shut-off switch disables
the low-voltage power that enables cab and chassis
functions.
To avoid accidental activation, the smart battery shut-
off switch must be pressed and held for two seconds
when turning on or off.
A vehicle in daily use would have the smart battery
shut-off switch turned ON. When the switch is set to
ON, a red LED indicator on the switch illuminates.
See Fig. 9.6. The switch has interlocks to prevent it’s
status from being changed while a vehicle is in
operation.
Turning the smart battery shut-off switch OFF
3 3 2 minimizes the power draw on the battery, preserving
07/02/2022 f080431
battery life and the ability of the vehicle to start after
1. Remove the negative 12V battery strap. being parked for a number of days.
2. Disconnect the positive BCA cable.
3. Remove the remaining cables. The smart battery shutoff switch should be set to
4. Remove the positive 24V connection plate. OFF if the vehicle is going to be parked for more
than two days.
Fig. 9.5, Low-Voltage Battery Disconnect Process

2. Disconnect the positive battery cable access Electric Vehicle Power

(BCA) cable and move it out of the way.
Distribution
3. Remove the remaining four fasteners to remove
the remaining cables from the batteries. Remove The electric vehicle power distribution system
the cables from the vehicle. provides battery power to the electrical and electronic
systems.
4. Remove the three fasteners to remove the
positive 24V connection plate. The following components make up the electrical
vehicle power distribution system:
• Battery Cable Access (BCA)

9.5
 Electrical System

for an example of EVDM cover map of fuses and

relays.
Both the EVDM and the sSAM are grounded at the
cab-side front wall. See Fig. 9.7.

Cab Electrical and Electronic

Components
Pass-Through Bulkhead Connector
The pass-through bulkhead connector is where the
interior dash harness connects to the exterior chassis
harness. This provides a disconnect point for
harness service, testing, and replacement. It is
located on the driver-side front wall of the vehicle.
See Fig. 9.7.

Single Signal Detect and Actuation

Module (sSAM)
The single signal detect and actuation module
10/04/2021 f547630
(sSAM) is the primary module in the electrical
system, combining chassis power distribution, cab
Fig. 9.6, Smart Battery Shutoff Switch
power distribution, and modular switch functions into
• Electric Vehicle Distribution Module (EVDM) a single ECU. The sSAM does not contain fuses or
relays.
Vehicle power is supplied by the batteries to the
battery cable access (BCA) box. The BCA front wall The sSAM reads input information from sensors,
pass-through is the primary interface through which switches, and databus messages, and drives output
battery power gets transferred from outside the cab and controller area network (CAN) messages. The
to the inside. It is located on the passenger side of sSAM is located near the center of the cab behind
the front wall. See Fig. 9.7. the lower dash panel. See Fig. 9.7.
On vehicles equipped with an optional high current Electronics Bay
receptacle and/or optional inverter, the BCA has
circuit protection and power cables supplying those The electronics bay contains the electronic control
devices. Fuse locations depend on the vehicle and units that control different vehicle features. It is
are outlined on a label on the BCA cover. For an located on the passenger-side of the cab behind the
example see Fig. 9.8. dash panel.
The power supplied by the batteries goes to the
electric vehicle distribution module (EVDM) and the
Powernet Management
single signal detect and actuation (sSAM) module. The powernet management feature protects the
The EVDM is a fuse and relay power distribution batteries from excessive discharge by disconnecting
box. It provides power and circuit protection for certain loads—features that draw power—from the
powertrain needs, cab functions, and various stand battery power supply. This allows the batteries to
alone modules. It also supplies power to the maintain enough of a charge to restart the vehicle.
emergency power supply circuits in the event of a Features that draw power are prioritized into different
module failure. The EVDM is located in the vehicle categories:
electronics bay, behind the passenger-side dash
panel. See Fig. 9.7. 1. House loads: this includes the majority of dash
power outlets.
Depending on a vehicle’s specifications, the fuses
and relays installed and their locations can vary. 2. Basic loads: this includes power for fleet
Each EVDM cover is illustrated with an image of the management systems and third party telematics
fuse and relay layout for that vehicle. See Fig. 9.9 as well as critical dash power outlets.

9.6
Electrical System

3
7 6 5
9 4

11 10

08/12/2020 f547299a
1. Electric Vehicle Distribution Module (EVDM) 7. sSAM Power
2. Electronics Bay 8. Single Signal Detect and Actuation Module (sSAM)
3. EVDM Ground 9. Front Wall Cab Ground Pass-Through Stud
4. Battery Cable Access (BCA) Front Wall Pass-Through 10. Front Wall Interior Ground Stud
5. EVDM Power 11. Pass-Through Bulkhead Connector
6. sSAM Ground
Fig. 9.7, Cab Power Distribution and Component Location Overview

By making noncritical features that draw power Loads disconnected by the PLVD will reconnect
temporarily unavailable, powernet management when all of the following conditions are met:
allows the driver to continue using critical features.
• keyswitch ON;
Progressive low voltage disconnect (PLVD) is used
• batteries reach and maintain 12.3 volts for one
to implement the powernet management feature.
minute.
The front reading lamps are designated as house
loads and can be turned back on after being
shutdown by PLVD by pressing on the light or light
switch.
No alarm sounds before basic loads are turned off.
A time delay is implemented for the shutdown and
reactivation of loads to avoid unnecessary cycling
when battery voltage is close to shutdown
thresholds.

9.7
 Electrical System

08/14/2020 f547313

Fig. 9.8, Example Fuse Labeling on BCA Cover

08/14/2020 f547312

Fig. 9.9, EVDM Inside Cover Map of Fuses and Relays

9.8
 10
Vehicle Charging, Operation,
and Shutdown
Charging the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Operating the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Vehicle Protection Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Vehicle Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
High-Voltage Battery Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
ePowertrain Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Charging the Vehicle

3
NOTICE
Rapid charging creates higher battery 2
temperatures and decreases battery life. When
possible, use low-charging methods to promote
battery longevity.
The vehicle must be stationary, the park brake 1
engaged, and the eStop button released for the
vehicle to charge.
During active charging, if the park brake is released,
vehicle movement is detected, or the eStop button is
pressed, charging will stop.
NOTE: The most successful way to charge the
09/27/2021 f547633
eCascadia is to turn the key OFF to shut down
the vehicle, then turn the key back to the ON 1. Charge Port Inlet Doors
2. Charge Port Inlet
position. Do not turn the key to the start 3. Charge Port Access Cover
position. Plug the charger in and observe the
lights on the charger inlet. Once a charge Fig. 10.2, Charge Port Access Showing Inlet Doors
session initiation has been confirmed turn the 4. Remove the charge port inlet plugs, shown in
key to the OFF position and secure the vehicle. Fig. 10.3.
The eCascadia can charge with the key in either the If the inlets are protected with doors as shown in
ON or OFF position; key positions are shown in Fig. 10.2, press the latches in the direction of the
Fig. 10.1. arrows to open the doors.
5. Verify the inlet is unlocked.
Both the inlet status lamp, item 3 in Fig. 10.3,
and the inlet lock lamp, item 1 Fig. 10.3, are
illuminated white when the inlet is unlocked.
A label outlining the meaning and sequence of
the inlet status and charging status lamps is
shown in Fig. 10.4. and Table 10.1.
6. Follow directions on the charge dispenser screen
about payment or identity verification needed to
start the charging process.
7. Remove the coupler from the charge dispenser.
02/03/2017 f610805
If necessary, press the coupler’s top latch button,
Fig. 10.1, Keyswitch Positions shown in Fig. 10.5, to remove the coupler from
the charge dispenser.
Single Port Charging IMPORTANT: Do not release the park brake
1. Park the vehicle and chock the tires. while the charging coupler is plugged in. If the
park brake is released when a charge coupler is
2. Set the park brake and put the transmission in plugged in, a warning window appears on the
neutral.
driver display and a continuous chime sounds
3. Open the charge port access cover as shown in until the issue is resolved. The dash label
Fig. 10.2.

10.1
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

1 2 3
4 1

06/21/2022 f547632b
1. Inlet Lock Lamp
2. Inlet Status Lamp
3. Charging Status Lamp
4. Battery Charging Lamp
5. Inlet Door Plugs 03/15/2022 f080406
6. Stop Charging Button 1. Latch Button
Fig. 10.3, Charge Port with Plugs Fig. 10.5, Charging Coupler

24-02079-000

04/15/2022 f080419

Fig. 10.4, Single Port Charging Label

shown in Fig. 10.6, is a reminder to unplug the 8. Plug the coupler into the charge port inlet. Listen
charging cable before releasing the park brake. for a click that indicates the coupler is fully
engaged.

10.2
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

When the coupler engages: the stop charging 24-02080-000

button lamp, item 6 in Fig. 10.3, illuminates white

and the inlet status lamp and the inlet lock lamp
go out.
04/15/2022 f080418
As a connection is established between the
charger and the vehicle, two lamps pulse orange; Fig. 10.6, Dash Label
the charging status lamp, item 2 in Fig. 10.3,
and the battery charging lamp, item 4 in
Fig. 10.3.
When the connection is made and charging of
the high-voltage batteries begins, these two
lamps pulse green.
04/14/2022 f612050
If the coupler is not fully engaged, charging will
be limited at 1Kw. If this occurs, press the Fig. 10.7, Charger Connected Telltale
charge stop button Fig. 10.3, item 6 then
remove the charge coupler. When the charging 10.2 If the batteries are charging, indicated by
station has reset indicating it is available, restart the charger status lamp pulsing green,
the charging procedure. you can stop the charging process by
doing any of the following:
9. A vehicle is finished charging when the high-
voltage batteries have either charged to 100 • Press the stop charging button, item
percent or reached the target state of charge 6 in Fig. 10.3, to stop charging and
(SOC), the charging status lamp and battery automatically unlock the inlet.
charging lamp will illuminate a steady green. • Select the stop charging option on
If charging with the key-off, both the charging the charge dispenser to stop
status and battery charging lamps on the charging and automatically unlock
charging port turn off; if charging with key-on, the inlet.
both lamps stay on. • Press the coupler’s top latch button
The blue charger connected telltale, as shown in to stop charging; then press the stop
Fig. 10.7, remains illuminated until the coupler is charging button or lock and unlock
unplugged from the vehicle inlet. the cab door to unlock the inlet.
10. Remove the charging coupler from the vehicle 11. Put in the charging inlet plugs or latch the doors
inlet. and close the charge port cover.
10.1 If the batteries are fully charged, press the
coupler’s top latch button and remove the
coupler from the inlet.

Charging Indicator Lamps

Indicator Lamp Color Meaning Action
Inlet Lock Lamp White Unlocked Plug in the coupler to start charging.
Lock and unlock the cab doors to
unlock the inlet.
Inlet Lock Lamp OFF Locked
OR
Let the vehicle continue to charge.
Inlet Lock Lamp—Single Unplug the coupler and then plug it
Blinking White Error
Port in.
Both inlets have couplers
Inlet Lock Lamp—Dual Unplug each coupler and plug it in
Pulsing White plugged in, but one is
Ports again.
unlocked.

10.3
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Charging Indicator Lamps

Indicator Lamp Color Meaning Action
A charging coupler is
Stop Charging Button Lamp White Press to stop charging the vehicle.
connected to the vehicle inlet.
The vehicle’s batteries are not If a coupler is connected, remove
Stop Charging Button Lamp Off
being charged. the coupler.
The charger is communicating
Charging Status Lamp Pulsing Orange Wait five seconds.
with the vehicle.
The charger is communicating
Charging Status Lamp Solid Orange Wait five seconds.
with the vehicle.
Allow the vehicle to continue to
charge.
Charging Status Lamp Pulsing Green The vehicle is charging.
OR
Press the stop charging button.
The batteries target state of
Charging Status Lamp Steady Green Unplug the coupler.
charge has been reached.
Unplug the coupler and then plug it
in.
Charging Status Lamp—
Blinking Red Error If the error persists, have the
Single Port
charger coupler and/or vehicle inlet
checked.
Unplug the couplers and plug them
in again.
Charging Status Lamp— Pulsing Red and One inlet has an error, the
Dual Ports Green other is functioning. If the error persists, have the
charger couplers and/or vehicle
inlets checked.
The vehicle’s batteries are not
being charged. Plug in the coupler to charge the
batteries.
OR
OR
The vehicle is communicating
Charging Status Lamp OFF with the charger Wait for charging to start.
OR OR
The batteries target state of If the batteries are charged, unplug
charge has been reached and the coupler.
the vehicle is asleep.
A charging coupler is not
Inlet Status Lamp White Plug in a charging coupler.
connected to the vehicle.
A charging coupler is
Inlet Status Lamp OFF Wait for the batteries to charge.
connected to the vehicle inlet.
The charger is communicating
Battery Charging Lamp Pulsing Orange Wait five seconds.
with the vehicle.
Wait for the batteries to charge.
Battery Charging Lamp Pulsing Green The vehicle is charging. OR
Press the stop charging button.
The batteries target state of
Battery Charging Lamp Steady Green Unplug the charging coupler.
charge has been reached.

10.4
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Charging Indicator Lamps

Indicator Lamp Color Meaning Action
A charging coupler is not
connected to the vehicle.
If plugged in, unplug the charging
Battery Charging Lamp OFF OR
coupler.
The batteries target state of
charge has been reached.
Table 10.1, Charging Indicator Lamps

Troubleshooting When Charging is equipped with dual charging ports, the vehicle may
Interrupted still be charged with a single charging coupler using
either inlet.
1. Verify the eStop button is released, the park
When both inlets are used to charge the vehicle:
brake is set, and that the vehicle is stationary.
• inlet one charges battery one and battery two,
2. Verify a target SOC has been set and has not
been reached. • inlet two charges only battery three,
3. Unplug the coupler from the vehicle inlet and • and two plug telltales appear on the driver
plug it in again. display, one for each coupler.
If a vehicle is charging in single port mode and a
Dual Port Charging second coupler is inserted, the charging current
NOTE: Dual charging ports are numbered as demand on the first port is reduced as the vehicle
shown in Fig. 10.8 to assist with troubleshooting controller recalibrates current demand and carries
issues. out safety checks on the second coupler/inlet
connection. When the second coupler is ready,
current demand increases on both inlets to charge
the vehicle.
To stop charging a vehicle when both inlets are
engaged either:
1 2
• Press the stop charging button located
between the charge ports to stop charging on
both inlets, and automatically unlock the
inlet(s).
• Select the stop charging option on the charge
dispenser to stop charging on just that inlet,
and automatically unlock the inlet
• Press the coupler top latch button to stop
charging on just that inlet, then press the stop
charging button, or lock and unlock the cab
door to unlock the inlet(s)
NOTE: Pressing the stop charging button on the
12/08/2021 f547705 charge dispenser or pressing a coupler top latch
1. Inlet 1 2. Inlet 2 button stops both charging couplers from
supplying charge.
Fig. 10.8, Numbered Dual Charging Ports

The instructions for charging with a single port apply Charging Power
to dual ports also. Refer to the instructions for Single port charging can only charge up to 400A
charging a single port for complete instructions. If (I80kW).

10.5
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

On a vehicle with dual port charging, the power 4. Select the back arrow to return to the ’Charge
supplied by the charger connected to inlet one, or Battery’ screen.
the forward inlet, is double the amount of the power
supplied by the charger connected to inlet two, or the NOTE: The lowest accepted charge limit is 50
rearward inlet. See Table 10.2. percent.
5. Select ’Charging Limit.’
Inlet Maximum Current (Maximum Power)
Forward Inlet (#1) Rearward Inlet (#2) When on the screen shown in Fig. 10.11
appears, drag the circle on the percentage bar to
Single Inlet 400A 400A
set the desired charging limit. This changes the
Charging (180kW max) (180kW max) maximum charging limit on the battery icon.
Dual Inlet 400A 200A
Charging (180kW max) (90kW max)
Preconditioning
Table 10.2, Inlet Maximum Current (Maximum Power) The vehicle must be plugged into a charger to
activate preconditioning. Preconditioning activates
the vehicle’s thermal management system to heat or
Programming the Vehicle to Charge cool the high-voltage batteries, eDrive, and eAxles to
bring them to operating temperature by the
NOTE: Keeping a high-voltage lithium battery scheduled departure time. This can reduce the initial
fully charged and deeply discharging a battery on-road power draw from the vehicle’s batteries
shortens battery life. during very hot or cold weather, increasing the
predicted range on that charge.
In general, a battery lasts longest when kept
between a 15 percent and 85 percent SOC. If cab climate control is activated when scheduling a
departure time, preconditioning activates the HVAC
NOTE: The vehicle does not have to be connected to system to bring the cab to the desired temperature
a charger to set up charging limits or schedule by the scheduled departure time.
departure times.
If the scheduled departure time passes and the
1. On the infotainment screen, select ’Settings’ or vehicle remains connected to the charger,
the gear icon. preconditioning keeps the batteries, eDrive, eAxles,
and cab at the desired temperature for a set amount
2. Select ’Charge Battery.’ of time.
The ’Charge Battery’ menu, as shown in Preconditioning deactivates if the charging cable is
Fig. 10.9, contains two options: unplugged, the key switch is activated, or an HVAC
• ’Departure time’: Setting a departure time setting is manually changed.
causes the vehicle to draw power at a rate
that results in the batteries reaching their Operating the Vehicle
target SOC by the departure time and
activates the preconditioning feature. NOTE: Before operating the vehicle, read
Chapter 3, Instruments, and Chapter 4, Driver
When no departure time is set, the vehicle
draws the maximum power available until
Controls.
the target state of charge is reached. In
this scenario, the time displayed represents Starting the Vehicle
when the target SOC will be reached. 1. If connected to the charging coupler, leave the
• ’Charging limit’: This sets a target state of parking brake set, and unplug the charging
charge SOC for the high-voltage batteries. coupler from the vehicle inlet.
3. Choose ’Departure time’ and enter the planned 2. Complete the applicable pre-trip inspections and
departure time. As shown in Fig. 10.10, the maintenance procedures in Chapter 18.
scheduled departure time can be set to repeat 3. Use the direction switch on the right-hand stalk
over multiple days. A desired cabin temperature switch to put the vehicle in neutral, as shown in
for the departure time can also be specified. Fig. 10.12.

10.6
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

3
1

04/14/2022 f611994
1. Predicted Range on Current State 2. Current SOC 3. Target SOC
of Charge (SOC)
Fig. 10.9, Charge Battery Screen

12/13/2021 f611992

Fig. 10.10, Preconditioning Menu Options

4. Turn the key in the keyswitch to the ON position, 6. Turn the key to the START position for a
shown in Fig. 10.1. The high voltage system is minimum of ½ second. After the vehicle has
turned on. started the READY telltale, shown in Fig. 10.13.,
appears at the bottom of the power gauge on the
5. Wait for the system to do self-checks. Loud
driver’s display.
clicks are noticeable as the ABS system actuates
the modulator valves, and a buzzing sound emits NOTE: If the vehicle did not start up, or has a
from behind the cab for up to one minute. Wait fault code, it may be necessary to restart the
for the buzzing sound to stop. vehicle for the code to clear. Turn the key to the

10.7
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

04/19/2022 f611995

Fig. 10.11, Charging Limit Screen

4 Driving Modes and Energy Efficiency

3
The vehicle can be equipped with three different
driving program modes: economy, performance, and
range. There is a boost mode available when in
economy or performance mode.
The active driving mode displays as text in the center
of the power gauge as shown in Fig. 10.14. The
driver can cycle through the available driving modes
1 with a short press of the Driving Program switch,
2
shown in Fig. 10.12.
05/03/2022 f270199a
1. Regenerative Braking Symbol Any reduction in performance associated with the
2. Direction Switch current driving mode is shown with a green line
3. Driving Program and Shift Switch capped with a caret on the power gauge. See
4. Gear Shift Symbol Fig. 10.14, item 2.
Fig. 10.12, Right-Hand Stalk Switch Economy Mode
To encourage efficient driving behavior and reduce
energy consumption, the default driving mode is
economy. In economy driving mode, vehicle
performance is slightly restricted to extend the
vehicle’s range. The power available in economy
03/25/2022 f612037
mode is marked by a green line and caret on the
power gauge.
Fig. 10.13, ICC5 Driver Display Ready Icon If equipped, boost mode is available in economy
mode.
OFF position and wait until the dash goes dark.
Repeat steps 4 through 6. Performance Mode
7. Press the brake pedal while shifting the vehicle If equipped, this driving mode increases vehicle
into gear, disengage the park brake, and drive. performance and energy consumption and reduces

10.8
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Boost Mode
Boost mode is used when there is a need to
increase speed to pass or merge, or increase power
to move a stationary vehicle forward on a steep
grade. Both economy and performance driving
modes can come with boost mode.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
(kick-down) to activate boost mode.
The boost status meter appears on the power gauge
2 as shown in Fig. 10.14.
It displays the current boost power available as a
white line. If no boost power is available the boost
1 status meter appears grey. When boost mode is
active, the boost status meter displays the power use
as an amber line.

Normal Operation
3 The needle on the driver display power gauge, as
shown in Fig. 10.14, shows how much available
06/15/2022 f612042b
power is being used. When regenerative braking is
1. Active Driving Mode active, the needle moves to the left of the zero; the
2. Caret and Green Line Marking Maximum Power trailing blue-white bar shows how much power is
Available in Current Driving Mode
being fed to the batteries.
3. Boost Mode Gauge (Showing No Power Available)
It’s normal for the ePowertrain to experience
Fig. 10.14, Power Gauge reductions of power due to a variety of conditions,
the vehicle’s range. Drivers should use performance including:
mode only when acceleration is a priority. • high ambient temperature,
As the green line and caret mark a limit in the • low ambient temperature,
amount of power available, they do not appear in
performance mode. • a high state of charge,

If equipped, boost mode is available in performance • a low state of charge.

mode. If the loss of available power is connected to a
diagnostic trouble code, take the vehicle to an
Range Mode authorized Freightliner service provider.
In range driving mode there is an overall maximum
vehicle speed limit of 55 mph (88 kph), HVAC Predicted Range
performance is reduced, and boost mode is NOTE: The predicted range display can be
unavailable. This mode consumes the least energy turned off at an authorised Freightliner dealer.
and is for when the vehicle range is the primary
concern. The predicted range at the base of the speedometer,
as shown in Fig. 10.15, is a guideline.
As in economy mode, the power available is marked
by a green line and caret on the power gauge. The number is based on the high-voltage batteries
current SOC, current vehicle weight and speed, and
If the high-voltage batteries drop to a 15 percent travel history. The predicted range on a brand new
SOC while in performance or economy mode, the vehicle is less accurate than on a vehicle that has
vehicle automatically transitions into range mode. been in service.
When transitioned into range mode by a low SOC,
the power gauge reduction is marked by an amber The actual range is affected by terrain, changing
line and caret. vehicle loads, changing vehicle speeds, driving

10.9
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Trip preparation tips:

• Allow the vehicle to fully precondition before
the trip.
• Make sure the tires are properly inflated and
that all aerodynamic components are intact.
• Position the fifth wheel as far forward as
possible without overloading the front axle.
Driving style choices:
• Avoid rapid acceleration or deceleration when
possible.
• Avoid using boost mode.
• Avoid heavy usage of the friction brakes.
• Use regenerative braking whenever possible.
Regenerative braking increases range by
1 charging the high-voltage batteries.

3 • Lower the vehicle speed just before the crest

2
of a hill and regain the speed on the descent.
04/15/2022 f612041
• Set the regenerative braking lever to the
1. High-Voltage Battery Status
2. High-Voltage Battery State of Charge appropriate position (1-3) to maintain the
3. Projected Range on Current State of Charge desired speed on downward grades.

Fig. 10.15, Driver Display Speedometer

• Reduce the vehicle top speed.
• Use economy or range mode when driving.
behavior, environmental temperature, and auxiliary Range mode has the larger efficiency benefit.
loads placed on the system.
• Activate adaptive cruise control whenever
If the vehicle load changes significantly, the possible to maintain a steady speed.
remaining range is recalculated with the new range
displaying within a minute. Cab environment decisions:
• A terrain of steep hills and valleys reduces the • Reduce heating and air conditioning usage.
vehicle range. Using heated seats consumes less energy
than heating the cab.
• Extremely hot or extremely cold conditions
reduce the vehicle range. The vehicle is • Keep the side windows closed.
equipped with a thermal battery system to
minimize loss of battery performance in both Cold-Weather Operation
cold and hot weather, but the energy draw to
heat and cool the batteries reduces the vehicle If the vehicle is in good mechanical condition and the
range. precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather should not cause
• Running the cab heater or air conditioner, or difficulty in starting the vehicle or loss of efficiency in
any other auxiliary power draw, reduces the operating the vehicle.
vehicle range.
The following points are important to observe when
operating in cold weather.
Tips for Extending Vehicle Range
• Check for cracks in the battery cases, for
A driver can take a number of actions to extend the corrosion of the terminals, and for tightness of
range. These can be broken out into three areas: trip the cable clamps at the terminals.
preparation, driving style choices, and cab
environment decisions.

10.10
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Hot-Weather Operation The telltale of stacked batteries to the left of the

estimated range indicates the current status of the
If the vehicle is in good mechanical condition and the high-voltage batteries. The standard telltale that
precautions necessary for hot-weather operation are appears here is of stacked white batteries, shown in
taken, ordinary hot weather should not cause Fig. 10.16, which indicates normal operation.
difficulty in starting the vehicle or loss of efficiency in
operating the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle After an Extended

Shutdown
Complete the applicable pre-trip inspections and 04/14/2022 f612052
maintenance procedures in Chapter 18.
Fig. 10.16, High-Voltage Batteries Normal Operation
Vehicle Protection Warnings Low State of Charge Warnings
The driver should be familiar with the different
warning messages in order to bring the vehicle to a The SOC bar graph has three color variations
safe stop if necessary. depending on the SOC.
1. Flashing grey/blue: The vehicle is plugged in and
If any vehicle system creates a false alarm, do not
operate the vehicle until the issue has been charging. A blue plug appears in place of the
corrected. white stacked batteries.
2. White: The high-voltage batteries have a normal
Low State of Charge and Low Range SOC. The white stacked batteries telltale is
Warnings present.
3. Amber: A warning has been given about the
NOTE: If the low-voltage batteries become
high-voltage batteries SOC. The stacked
completely discharged but the high-voltage batteries telltale displays in amber as shown in
batteries retain a charge, the vehicle can be Fig. 10.17.
jump-started. See Chapter 19 for instructions.
4. Flashing amber: A second warning has been
The vehicle presents a series of notices, cautions, given about the high-voltage batteries SOC.
and warnings along with information from gauges
and telltales to alert the driver to the high-voltage
batteries having a low SOC and the vehicle having a
low remaining range.
If the SOC and/or remaining range decreases
beyond a certain point, driving is disabled. Charge
the vehicle to enable driving. 04/14/2022 f612051

State of Charge and Range Fig. 10.17, High-Voltage Battery SOC Low Telltale
Information The first notice about the high-voltage batteries SOC
The high-voltage battery SOC gauge at the bottom of occurs when it drops to approximately 15 percent.
the speedometer, shown in Fig. 10.15, represents If the vehicle is already in range mode, a low battery
the amount of energy stored in the batteries, with 0 notice appears.
representing a charge level too low to operate the
If the vehicle is in the economy or performance
vehicle and 1 representing fully charged high-voltage
driving mode, dropping to a 15 percent SOC triggers
batteries.
a low battery and activation of range mode notice, as
The vehicle’s estimated range appears above the shown in Fig. 10.18.
SOC gauge. This distance is based on the high-
These notices can be dismissed by pressing the
voltage batteries SOC as well as the vehicle’s
back button on the steering wheel.
weight, travel history, and current speed.

10.11
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

ignition before the third warning, shown in Fig. 10.20,

appears on the driver display screen.

04/14/2022 f612053

Fig. 10.18, Low High-Voltage Batteries SOC, Range

Mode Activated Notice 04/14/2022 f612055

If necessary, the driver may shift out of range driving Fig. 10.20, Third Warning, Low SOC
mode.
The second notice is a warning, shown in Fig. 10.19, At this point the amber caret on the power gauge is
and happens when the high-voltage batteries reach a at 0 percent and driving is not allowed.
SOC of approximately 5 percent. Have the vehicle towed to a charging station. Towing
instructions are contained in Chapter 19.

Low Range Warnings

There are two low remaining range warnings.
The first warning is turned off by default and the
range estimate which triggers it is adjustable. It can
be turned on and set in DiagnosticLink®, where it is
named ’Battery Distance Low Warning Level 1.’
When active and triggered, it drives the display of
Fig. 10.21.

04/14/2022 f612054

Fig. 10.19, Second Warning of Low SOC

At this point, the estimated range ceases being

calculated and displays as 0 miles or 0 kilometers
and the SOC bar graph flashes amber. If not active,
range mode is activated; it is not possible to shift out
of range mode. The maximum power line and caret
on the power gauge displays in amber with the
power limit defined by the amber caret steadily
decreasing as vehicle performance is derated.
04/14/2022 f612056
The driver should immediately bring the vehicle to a
safe stop, apply the park brake, and turn off the Fig. 10.21, First Warning of Low Remaining Range

10.12
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

The second warning is triggered when the remaining caution notifying the driver to take the vehicle in for
range drops to approximately 15 miles (24 km). At service, shown in Fig. 10.26, to a warning that
this point a very low remaining range caution, shown results in the vehicle shutting down, shown in
in Fig. 10.22, appears and the range estimation Fig. 10.27.
display becomes unavailable.

07/01/2022 f612082
04/11/2022 f612048
Fig. 10.25, eDrive Notice
Fig. 10.22, Very Low Range Warning

ePowertrain Telltales
There are two ePowertrain telltales, shown in
Fig. 10.23, and Fig. 10.24. These telltales appear
along with caution and warning windows about edrive
malfunctions and issues with the high-voltage battery
system.

04/19/2022 f612059 07/01/2022 f612084

Fig. 10.23, ePowertrain Problem Telltale Fig. 10.26, eDrive Caution

All windows must be acknowledge by the driver.

eMotor Overspeed Feature

04/19/2022 f612060
CAUTION
Fig. 10.24, ePowerTrain Error Telltale
Failure to heed overspeed warnings may result in
damage to the bearings and transmission of the
vehicle, as well as potential damage to property,
eDrive Malfunctions or personal injury.
A malfunctioning eDrive results in a cascade of This feature aims to prevent the motor speed from
windows, ranging from a notice informing the driver exceeding a series of thresholds by limiting power to
of reduced performance, shown in Fig. 10.25, to a the motor and presenting messages of increasing

10.13
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Fig. 10.29, instructs the driver to apply the service

brakes.

07/01/2022 f612083

Fig. 10.27, eDrive Warning

07/01/2022 f612081
severity to the driver, instructing them to apply the
service brakes. Fig. 10.29, eMotor Overspeed Warning
If the eMotor’s speed reaches the first threshold, This warning cannot be dismissed.
power to the motor is reduced to slow the vehicle. If
the truck is going downhill in manual mode, and is in High-Voltage Battery Warnings
first gear, the eMotor speed may still increase.
There are a number of high-voltage battery cautions
If the eMotor’s speed reaches the motor’s maximum
and warnings.
limit, an amber caution appears, instructing the driver
to apply the service brakes. See Fig. 10.28. Do not The high-voltage battery problem telltale, shown in
rely on regenerative braking to slow the vehicle at Fig. 10.30, appears in the dynamic telltale portion of
this point. the driver display screen when a non-critical high-
voltage battery fault has been detected. A minor
issue that takes one of the nine high-voltage
batteries offline is an example of a non-critical high-
voltage battery fault. This telltale is a signal to take
the vehicle in for service.

08/03/2022 f612182

Fig. 10.30, High-Voltage Battery Problem Telltale

07/11/2022 f612088
An amber caution window is also a signal to take the
vehicle in for service.
Fig. 10.28, eMotor Apply Brakes Caution An amber caution that states the driving range has
been reduced, shown in Fig. 10.31, or that a
This caution can be dismissed by pressing the back program derate has been activated, is a signal that
button on the left-hand switch pod. the vehicle should be serviced soon.
If the eMotor’s speed exceeds the motor’s limit, an A red warning about a high-voltage battery situation,
acoustic alert activates and a red warning, shown in shown in Fig. 10.32, should prompt moving the

10.14
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

• A red warning message, shown in Fig. 10.34,

appears in the center of the driver display
screen.

07/29/2022 f612179

Fig. 10.33, High-Voltage Battery Failure Telltale

07/01/2022 f612086

Fig. 10.31, High Voltage Battery Caution

vehicle off the road to a safe location, turning the

keyswitch to the off position, and a call for service.

06/30/2022 f611989

Fig. 10.34, Thermal Event Warning Message

In response the driver should bring the vehicle to a

safe stop, apply the park brake, turn the keyswitch to
off, hit the eStop button, and exit the cab within five
minutes. Once in a safe location, call emergency
07/01/2022 f612087 services.
For more information on this system, see
Fig. 10.32, High Voltage Battery Warning Chapter 19.
If a combustible gas detection system LED has
illuminated or a high-voltage battery thermal event Combustible Gas Detection System
warning has appeared, exit the cab and call If the explosive gas detection system sensors detects
emergency services. For more information, see a 50 percent concentration of the lower explosive
Chapter 19. limit for a gas and maintains that level for six
continuous seconds, a red LED on the system panel
High-Voltage Battery Thermal Event illuminates and an alarm sounds.
Warning If a red LED illuminates when driving, quickly bring
If a thermal event is detected inside a high-voltage the vehicle to a safe stop. Apply the park brake, turn
battery when the vehicle is on, the following things off the ignition, and press the eStop button on the
will happen: dash prior to exiting the cab. Immediately call
emergency services.
• The red high-voltage battery thermal event
telltale, shown in Fig. 10.33, appears in the For more information on the combustible gas
dynamic telltale section of the driver display. detection system, see Chapter 19.

10.15
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

Vehicle Shutdown
Standard Shutdown Procedure
1. With the vehicle stopped, set the parking brake
and put the vehicle in neutral.
2. Turn the key to the off position to shut down the
high-voltage system.
1
3. If the vehicle will remain parked for an extended
amount of time, chock the tires.
2
4. If the vehicle is going to be parked for more than
two days, turn off the smart battery shut-off
switch. The switch is located to the rear of the
driver’s seat on the door side and appears as
shown in Fig. 10.35.
09/27/2021 f547634
To avoid accidental activation, the switch must
1. Hazard Warning Lights Switch
be pressed and held for one second.
2. eStop Button
Fig. 10.36, eStop Button on Dash

3. In addition, for the use of emergency responders,

a cut through cable access point, shown in
Fig. 10.37, exists below each cab door. If the
eStop button on the dash cannot be accessed,
emergency responders can cut the wiring at
either of these locations.

10/04/2021 f547630

Fig. 10.35, Smart Battery Shut-Off Switch 09/27/2021 f547635

1. Cable Access Cut Through Point
Emergency Shutdown Procedures Fig. 10.37, Cable Access Below Cab Door
The high voltage system can be shut off in the
following ways. High-Voltage Battery
1. Turn the key to OFF and remove the key. Deactivation
2. Press the eStop button located on the dash as As the high-voltage batteries near end-of-life, there
shown in Fig. 10.36. are a series of escalating messages sent to the
A lock can be inserted through the eStop button driver. Take the vehicle to a registered Freightliner
guard to keep the button depressed. dealer for service when the Notice in Fig. 10.38, or

10.16
Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

the Caution shown in Fig. 10.39 appear. If the

Warning in Fig. 10.40 appears, pull the vehicle to the
side, as soon as possible in a safe location, and
have the vehicle towed to the nearest Freightliner
dealer.

HV Battery
Shutdown in 20 Days
Service Required

HV Battery
08/11/2022 f612184
Nearing End of Life
Fig. 10.39, High-Voltage Battery Deactivation Caution
Service Required

08/11/2022 f612183

Fig. 10.38, High-Voltage Battery Deactivation Notice

ePowertrain Telltales
Telltales and messages appear on the driver display. HV Battery
The positions of the telltales vary, but most use Disabled
standard symbols.
The colors of telltales indicate the hazard level as
Service Required
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), green
(normal function), blue (active status), grey (passive
status), white (informational). 08/11/2022 f612185

The colors of messages indicate the hazard level as

Fig. 10.40, High-Voltage Battery Deactivation Warning
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), grey
(informational). See Table 10.3.

ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and Messages

For information on the features that use these telltales, see chapters 10 and 19.
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
A flashing telltale indicates the vehicle is
actively charging. When a charging coupler
Charger
is plugged into the
Blue Connected to Solid illumination indicates the desired SOC vehicle, the vehicle’s
Vehicle has been reached and that the charger is ability to drive is inhibited.
connected to the vehicle.
If a door is opened when
the parking brake is
Signals that the ePowertrain is activated and
Blue Powertrain Active disengaged and the
the vehicle is ready to drive.
powertrain is active, a
popup appears.

10.17
 Vehicle Charging, Operation, and Shutdown

ePowertrain Telltale Lamps and Messages

For information on the features that use these telltales, see chapters 10 and 19.
Telltale Color Description Related Messages

Low-Voltage A low-voltage battery problem has been

Amber
Battery Problem detected.

Low-Voltage The low-voltage batteries have failed or

Red
Battery Failure cannot be detected.

High-Voltage
The high-voltage batteries have a high enough
White Battery Charge
charge to operate the vehicle.
Normal Operation
Indicates an state of charge warning is active.
High-Voltage
Turn off unneeded features drawing power.
Amber Battery Charge
Low Drive the vehicle for 30-60 minutes, or
manually charge the low-voltage batteries.
Indicates a non-critical battery fault, such as
High-Voltage one of the high-voltage batteries going offline.
Amber
Battery Problem
Take the vehicle in for service.
A thermal event has been detected inside a
high-voltage battery. The vehicle must be on
for the high-voltage
High-Voltage Bring the vehicle to a safe stop, apply the park
Red battery thermal event
Battery Failure brake, turn the keyswitch to off, and exit the
detection system to be
cab within the next five minutes.
active.
If there is time, press in the eStop button.
A high-voltage battery or ePowertrain problem
has been detected.
ePowertrain
Amber A derate program has been activated or the
problem
driving range has been reduced.
Take the vehicle in for service.

A high-voltage battery or ePowertrain problem

Red ePowertrain Error
has been detected. Stop immediately.

Amber eDrive problem An eDrive problem has been detected

Red eDrive error And eDrive error has been detected

Table 10.3, Powertrain Telltales

10.18
 11
Brake Systems
Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Energy Waste Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Hill Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
ZF™ Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
Brake and Traction Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
Brake Systems

Regenerative Braking When a regenerative braking level is selected, the

regenerative braking telltale shown in Fig. 11.2
NOTE: Activating regenerative braking while in appears on the driver display.
cruise control can be used to activate descent
control mode or deceleration mode.

General Information
The eCascadia is equipped with a regenerative
braking system. When regenerative braking is active, 04/22/2022 f612065
the motor acts as a generator, resisting the rotation
of the wheels and creating electricity. Fig. 11.2, Regenerative Braking Telltale
When the driver presses on the brake pedal, or a A thin inner blue line also appears on the charge
driver assistance system demands the vehicle meter section of the power gauge, as shown in
decelerate, the vehicle is able to use some of the Fig. 11.3, indicating the maximum level of
energy used to slow the vehicle to charge the high- regenerative braking requested. Each level (low,
voltage batteries. medium, high) extends the line by 1/3 until the line
If the vehicle is equipped with dynamic regenerative extends the length of the meter at ’high.’ If level one
braking using the accelerator pedal, then using the or two is selected, a blue caret appears to mark the
accelerator pedal can engage regenerative braking. regenerative braking limit. If level three is requested,
there is no limit and therefore no caret.
Engaging Regenerative Braking

WARNING
Regenerative braking may be inhibited. The
driver should always be prepared to apply the 1
service brakes to slow the vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in damage to the vehicle, severe
personal injury, or death.
To activate regenerative braking with the right-hand 2
stalk switch, select position one through three, as
shown in Fig. 11.1. 4

3
0

2 05/11/2022 f612042a
1. Dynamic Needle and Outer Line Marking
Regenerative Braking Power Generated
2. Caret and Inner Line Marking Maximum
3 Regenerative Braking Level Requested
3. Current Driving Mode
05/03/2022 f270164b 4. Caret and Green Line Marking Maximum Power
0. Off 2. Medium Available in Current Driving Mode
1. Low 3. High
Fig. 11.3, Power Gauge
Fig. 11.1, Regenerative Braking Positions

11.1
 Brake Systems

A dynamic thick outer blue line led by a electronic vehicle. Using this feature in traffic allows a driver to
needle communicates the amount of regenerative extend the vehicle’s range.
braking power being generated at any moment.
When the vehicle is coasting, the regenerative
Pressing on the accelerator pedal, putting the vehicle braking needle sits at zero.
in neutral, or moving the right-hand stalk switch to
the off position deactivates the regenerative braking
charge request.
Energy Waste Mode
This mode improves braking performance by
If the right-hand stalk switch is in the low, medium, or
providing a base level of regenerative braking when
high position when the keyswitch is turned on, the
the high-voltage batteries limit charging, such as
regenerative brake telltale, shown in Fig. 11.2,
flashes and regenerative braking is disabled. To when the batteries are at a high SOC.
enable regenerative braking and stop the telltale from To reduce stress on the service brakes when
flashing, move the right-hand stalk switch to the off regenerative braking is limited, energy waste mode
position. activates thermal management components (the AC
compressor, pumps, and fans) to increase power
Regenerative Braking Limitations consumption to increase available regenerative
A number of dynamic conditions affect the active braking capacity. When active, energy waste mode
amount of regenerative braking power generated. creates a loud humming noise.
These include the vehicle’s speed, mass, the terrain,
and the high-voltage batteries current state of charge Descent Control
(SOC). Regenerative braking is limited if the batteries
have a high SOC. It may also be limited if the high- NOTE: If the high-voltage batteries are fully
voltage batteries are cold. charged, regenerative braking is not available.
If the regenerative braking is limited, or severely Descent control mode attempts to keep the vehicle
limited, the driver is notified of this limitation through below a set speed on a downhill slope by using all
a message appearing on the driver’s display. available regenerative braking stages.
To activate descent control mode, remove your foot
Dynamic Regenerative Braking Using the from the accelerator pedal, set the right-hand stalk
Accelerator Pedal switch to any of the three ’on’ positions (1, 2, or 3)
If equipped with dynamic regenerative braking using as shown in Fig. 11.1, and then use the set or
the accelerator pedal, the driver can engage resume buttons to set the vehicle speed. The
regenerative braking when lifting their foot off the descent control mode telltale, shown in Fig. 11.4,
accelerator pedal at speeds above approximately 20 illuminates on the driver display when descent
mph (32 km). At low speeds, such as when in stop control mode is active.
and go traffic, there is little to no kinetic energy to be
captured through regenerative braking.
To activate regenerative braking using the
accelerator pedal, the right-hand stalk switch must be
requesting regenerative braking power at a low,
medium, or high level. This level may act as a limit to 04/26/2022 f612066
the amount of regenerative braking power that can
be recouped from a slowing vehicle, therefore DTNA Fig. 11.4, Descent Mode Telltale
suggests setting the stalk switch to high to allow the
driver to regulate the amount of regenerative braking As descent control mode is not designed to keep the
through modulating the pressure on the accelerator vehicle above any set speed, it is possible to
pedal. eventually coast to a stop unless the accelerator
pedal is applied or the right-hand stalk switch is
When the driver lifts their foot off the accelerator moved to the ’off’ position (0).
pedal with the right-hand stalk switch engaged, the
electric motor immediately uses the kinetic energy of If the accelerator pedal is applied, the descent
the vehicle to charge the batteries, slowing the control mode resumes when the accelerator pedal is
released.

11.2
Brake Systems

Moving the right-hand stalk switch to the ’off’ position

deactivates descent control mode and resumes
cruise control, using the descent control set speed as
the cruise control set speed.
In the case of very steep grades, regenerative
braking may not be able to maintain the vehicle 05/16/2022 f611712a
speed below the set speed. In these circumstances,
the driver can apply the service brakes to slow the Fig. 11.6, Hill Start Aid Disengaged Telltale
vehicle below the set speed without dropping out of
To turn hill start aid on again, press the HSA OFF
descent control mode. However, after releasing the
switch or cycle the vehicle keyswitch.
service brakes, a new cruise set speed lower than
the original set speed is set. The driver is informed of If the hill start aid disengaged telltale appears as a
this new set speed by a message on the driver solid image on the driver display screen, there is a
display. fault in the system.

Hill Start Aid Hold Function

The hill start aid (HSA) feature prevents the vehicle The hold function eases the strain of driving in stop-
from rolling on a slope steeper than three percent to and-go traffic by allowing the driver to "hold" the
allow for a controlled launch. brake without constantly applying pressure to the
HSA prevents a stationary vehicle in forward gear brake pedal. The hold function is an extension of hill
from rolling downhill prior to continuing to drive up start aid (HSA).
the hill; HSA also prevents a stationary vehicle in To activate the hold function, bring the vehicle to a
reverse gear from rolling downhill prior to continuing complete stop, then press the brake pedal further
to back up the hill. toward the floor. The HOLD telltale, shown in
Fig. 11.7, illuminates on the driver display to indicate
HSA delays the release of service brakes until
the function is active and the vehicle’s brake lights
enough torque is available to begin moving the
come on. The driver can then take their foot off the
vehicle, up to a maximum of three seconds. If
brake pedal without releasing the service brakes.
sufficient driveline torque is not detected after three
seconds, the system audibly alerts the driver and If the brake pedal is pressed down farther, air is
releases the brakes. added to the chamber, continuing the brake hold.
HSA is on by default. It can be turned off by pressing
the HSA OFF dash switch shown in Fig. 11.5.

03/18/2022 f612019

Fig. 11.7, Brake Hold Active Telltale

To release the brake hold, press the accelerator

pedal, engage the park brake, or rapidly apply and
HSA release the brake pedal.
OFF
The hold function is deactivated when the HSA OFF
switch is pressed to disable HSA.
04/18/2016 f611406
The hold function cannot be engaged if any of the
Fig. 11.5, Hill Start Aid Off Dash Switch following are true:
• the anti-lock braking system was active in
When hill start aid is inactive, the HSA OFF telltale,
shown in Fig. 11.6, flashes on the driver display bringing the vehicle to a stop,
screen. • the anti-lock braking system is in a fault state,
or

11.3
 Brake Systems

• the vehicle is in reverse gear.

WARNING
If the hold function is active for four minutes, the
window shown in Fig. 11.8 appears on the ICU Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
warning the driver to engage the park brake. An backed off or disconnected. Backing off or
audible alarm activates at the same time and repeats disconnecting the front brakes will not improve
every minute until the park brake is set. vehicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle
control, resulting in property damage or personal
injury.

Air Brake System, General

Information
The psi of both the primary and secondary system
appear on the brake air gauge on the driver display,
shown in Fig. 11.9.

04/26/2022 f612068
03/18/2022 f612018
Fig. 11.9, Brake Air Gauge on Driver Display
Fig. 11.8, Engage Park Brake Message - ICC5
If air pressure drops below approximately 70 psi (483
The same warnings are triggered if the hold function kPa) in either system, a warning telltale illuminates.
is active and: See Fig. 11.10. If the park brake is not set, an
• the ignition is turned off without the park brake audible alert also activates.
being set, or
• the brakes are not strong enough to hold the
vehicle in place and it starts rolling.
If a door is opened without the park brake being set
when the hold function is active, the horn sounds
and a visual warning activates on the driver display. 04/26/2022 f612069
If the seat occupancy sensor registers an empty seat
Fig. 11.10, Low Brake Air Pressure Telltale
under the same conditions, the same warnings are
triggered. Warnings cease when the condition that If the low air pressure warning displays, check the air
triggered the warning is corrected. pressure gauges to determine which system has low
air pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be
Air Brake System reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the
front or rear service brakes will not be operating at
A dual air brake system consists of two independent full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance.
air systems that use a single set of brake controls. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the air
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and system repaired before continuing.
brake chambers. The primary system operates the
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of
system operates the service brakes on the front axle. service brakes with full system air pressure, use
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to
the trailer. bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the
safest location possible.
Before a vehicle with insufficient brake system air
pressure can be moved, the spring parking brakes

11.4
Brake Systems

must be released by applying an external air source pressure telltale and buzzer. The warning telltale and
at the gladhands, or by manually caging the parking buzzer shut off when air pressure in both systems
brake springs. reaches 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa).
IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure
WARNING all loose items in the cab so that they will not fly
forward during a full brake application. Make
Do not cage the spring parking brakes and then
drive the vehicle. If you do this, there is no way sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
to hold the vehicle stationary after coming to a During normal brake stops, depress the brake pedal
complete stop and releasing the service brake until braking action slows down the vehicle. Increase
pedal. This could result in serious personal injury or decrease the pressure on the pedal so that the
or vehicle damage. Before releasing the spring vehicle comes to a smooth, safe stop. Apply the
parking brakes, make the connection to a towing parking brake if the vehicle is to be parked.
vehicle or chock the tires.
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that
After correcting the brake system problem, uncage does not have spring parking brakes, apply the
the spring parking brakes before resuming normal tractor parking brake. Chock the trailer tires before
vehicle operation. disconnecting the vehicle from the trailer.

Primary Air Brake System WARNING

Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes
the rear service brakes to become inoperative. The If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped
secondary air system continues to operate the front with spring parking brakes, do not park it by
brakes and, if equipped, the trailer brakes. pulling out only the trailer air supply valve knob.
This would apply only the trailer service brakes.
Secondary Air System If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system,
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing
Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system an unattended runaway vehicle.
causes the front axle brakes to become inoperative.
The primary air system continues to operate the rear
service brakes and, if equipped, the trailer brakes. NOTICE
eCompressor Never apply the service and spring parking
brakes simultaneously. To do so transmits
The eCascadia is equipped with an electric air excessive input force to the brake components,
compressor (eCompressor). Prior to normal which could damage or cause eventual failure of
operation, the eCompressor needs to warm up to brake actuating components.
operating temperature. Warm-up may take up to 5
minutes depending on the outside air temperature. Brake Controls
The eCompressor runs continuously during this time.
This is followed by a brief period during which the The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used
electric air dryer purges contaminants out of the for applying the trailer brakes without applying the
system, and the eCompressor cycles on, then off. truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted
Cycling may occur several times if vehicle was on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 11.11.
improperly shutdown. During normal operation, the Moving the lever down applies the trailer brakes,
eCompressor only runs when the air tanks are at low while moving it up releases the trailer brakes.
pressure.
The valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any
Air Brake System Operation partially applied position it will be overridden by a full
application of the brake pedal. The lever
Before driving the vehicle, allow time for the air automatically returns to the up position when it is
compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689 released.
kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
systems. Monitor the air pressure system using the
dual system air pressure gauge and the low-air-

11.5
 Brake Systems

1
2

02/02/2017 f610291
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve Knob
2. Parking Brake Valve Knob
Fig. 11.12, Brake Valve Knobs
02/03/2017 f610591

a steep grade. To do so could damage the

Fig. 11.11, Trailer Brake Lever
brakes. Allow hot brakes to cool before using the
spring parking brakes.
WARNING Do not use the spring parking brakes during
freezing temperatures if the service brakes are
Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking;
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the
they are not designed for this purpose. If air
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and
bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking,
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them.
the vehicle could roll, causing serious personal
injury or property damage. If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies
The red octagonal-shaped knob in the control panel
the tractor parking brake and the trailer service
actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 11.12.
brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking brakes
After the vehicle’s air hoses are connected to a
(or trailer service brakes) are both applied, the trailer
trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least
brakes are released by pushing in the trailer air
65 psi (448 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must be
supply valve, leaving the tractor parking brake
pushed in. It should stay in to charge the trailer air
applied. Air pressure in the primary or secondary
supply system and to release the trailer spring
reservoir must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa) before
parking brakes.
the tractor spring parking brakes, or the trailer
Pull the trailer air supply valve out before service or spring parking brakes, can be released.
disconnecting a trailer.
If pressure in both air systems drops to 20 to 45 psi
Automatic Slack Adjusters
(138 to 310 kPa), the red trailer air supply valve and Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually
yellow parking brake valve automatically pop out, adjusted except during routine maintenance of the
applying both the tractor and trailer spring parking foundation brakes (such as replacing shoes), during
brakes. If the trailer is not equipped with spring slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency
parking brakes, the trailer service brakes are applied. situation.
The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal
panel actuates the parking brake valve. See brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a
Fig. 11.12. Pulling out the parking brake valve mechanical problem with the foundation brake
applies both the tractor and trailer spring parking components or the adjuster is improperly installed.
brakes and automatically causes the trailer air supply
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
valve to pop out. Pushing in the parking brake valve
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
releases the tractor parking brakes.
determined to be out of adjustment.

NOTICE
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the
service brakes are hot, such as after descending

11.6
Brake Systems

operation, the safety circuit senses a failure in any

WARNING part of the ABS, a warning appears on the driver
display, the tractor ABS telltale, shown in Fig. 11.13,
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to illuminates, and the control circuit where the failure
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is occurred is switched to normal braking action. The
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment remaining control circuit retains the ABS effect. Even
is not repairing. Before adjusting an automatic if the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake ability is maintained. An exception would be if a
system and inspect it for worn or damaged modulator valve (or combination modulator valve) is
components. Improperly maintaining the vehicle damaged and inoperative. As these components are
braking system may lead to brake failure, an integral part of the air brake system, normal
resulting in property damage, personal injury, or braking may be impaired or inoperative.
death.

ZF™ Antilock Braking System

IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
installed during production are programmed into 05/11/2020 f611654a
the electronic control unit. Installing different-
sized tires could result in a reduced braking Fig. 11.13, Tractor ABS Telltale
force, leading to longer stopping distances.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
The ZF Antilock Braking System (ABS) is an depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
electronic wheel speed monitoring and control safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
system that works with the standard air brake brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS controls all
system. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
at all times, and controls wheel speed during braking distance. The tractor ABS telltale illuminates
emergency stops. when the ABS is engaged.
ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and Although the ZF ABS improves vehicle control during
sensors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed emergency braking situations, it is the driver’s
wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed responsibility to change driving styles depending on
information to an electronic control unit, located in existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the
the vehicle electronics bay. The control unit’s main ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is
circuit interprets the speed sensor signals and speeding or following too closely.
calculates wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a
vehicle reference speed. If the calculations indicate Trailer ABS Compatibility
wheel lockup, the main circuit signals the appropriate
modulator valve to reduce braking pressure. During The ZF ABS is designed to communicate with a
emergency braking, the modulator valve alternately trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility
reduces, increases, or maintains air pressure supply results in the brief illumination of the trailer ABS
in the brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel telltale, shown in Fig. 11.14, during vehicle start-up
lockup. and fault detection.
The electronic control unit (ECU) also has a safety
circuit that constantly monitors the wheel sensors,
traction control valve (if equipped), modulator valves,
and the electrical circuitry.
The ZF Antilock Braking System combines one front-
axle control channel with one rear-axle control 05/11/2022 f611655a
channel to form one control circuit. For example, the
sensor and modulator valve on the left-front axle Fig. 11.14, Trailer ABS Telltale
form a control circuit with the sensor and modulator
The telltale operates as follows when a compatible
valve on the right-rear axle. If, during vehicle
trailer is properly connected to the tractor:

11.7
 Brake Systems

• When the ignition key is turned to the on

position, the trailer ABS telltale lamp
illuminates momentarily, then deactivates.
• If the telltale illuminates momentarily during
vehicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was
detected and corrected.
ATC
• If the telltale illuminates and stays on during SPIN
vehicle operation, there is a fault with the
trailer ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system 03/02/2016 f611333
immediately to ensure full antilock braking
capability. Fig. 11.16, ATC SPIN Switch

The trailer ABS telltale will not illuminate if an

incompatible trailer is connected to the tractor.

Automatic Traction Control

Electric vehicles with ABS are equipped with 05/11/2022 f611675a
automatic traction control (ATC). On these vehicles,
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin Fig. 11.17, ATC Deactivated Telltale
during reduced-traction situations. If the vehicle
comes to a stop in soft soil or sand, it may be
necessary to back up prior to attempting forward NOTICE
movement.
The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
When the ATC system is in normal mode, it applies under specific slippery conditions that require
gentle braking to the spinning wheel to feed power to momentary increased wheel spin. Using this
the wheel(s) with better traction. If both wheels are option for an extended period of time may
spinning, the system signals the motor to reduce damage the vehicle’s brake system.
power.
If the system detects wheel spin, the wheel spin Brake and Traction Telltales
telltale, shown in 11.15, flashes and an alert is
shown on the driver display. Telltales and messages appear on the driver display.
The positions of the telltales vary, but most use
standard symbols.
The colors of telltales indicate the hazard level as
follows: red (warning), amber (caution), green
(normal function), blue (active status), grey (passive
status), white (informational).
05/11/2022 f611676a
The colors of messages indicate the hazard level as
Fig. 11.15, ATC Active Telltale follows: red (warning), amber (caution), grey
(informational).
Pressing the ATC SPIN switch, shown in Fig. 11.16,
deactivates ATC and allows drive wheel spin. When Telltales for braking and traction related features are
ATC is off, an ATC deactivated telltale, as shown in listed in Table 11.1. Every vehicle may not be
Fig. 11.17, appears on the driver display. Pressing equipped with every feature.
the switch again, or cycling the keyswitch, cycles the
system back to normal operation.

11.8
Brake Systems

Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps

Telltale
Color Description Related Information
Lamp
A blue line appears on
the charge portion of the
Indicates regenerative braking has been
Regenerative power gauge showing the
Green activated by moving the right-hand stalk switch
Braking amount of available
into position 1, 2, or 3 (low, medium, or high).
regenerative braking
requested.
The driver should always
be ready to intervene by
applying the service
Descent Control
Green Indicates descent control mode is active. brakes. On steep roads
Mode
regenerative braking may
not be able to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
A blinking telltale indicates hill start aid is off. To turn on HSA, press the
Hill Start Aid HSA OFF switch again or
Amber A solid telltale indicates a fault with the
Disengaged cycle the vehicle
system. keyswitch.
To release the brake hold,
Indicates brake hold mode is active. press the accelerator
Brake Hold Mode pedal, engage the park
Grey The service brake is maintained when the
Engaged brake, or rapidly apply
driver takes their foot off the brake pedal. and release the brake
pedal.
Park Brake Always engage the park
Red Engaged Indicates the park brake is engaged. brake before exiting the
vehicle.
Indicates air pressure in the primary or A buzzer sounds if the
secondary reservoir has dropped below park brake is released or
Low Brake Air approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Red the vehicle is moving
Pressure
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the when the air pressure is
air system repaired before continuing. below 70 psi.
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle
ABS is engaged. Even if the ABS is
Tractor Antilock
completely inoperative,
Amber Brake System Solid illumination indicates a problem with the normal braking ability is
(ABS) vehicle ABS. Repair the ABS to ensure full maintained.
braking capability.
The telltale will not illuminate if an
incompatible trailer is connected to the tractor.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer
ABS is engaged.
Trailer Antilock
Amber Brake System If the telltale lamp illuminates momentarily N/A
(ABS) during vehicle operation, then shuts off, a fault
was detected and corrected.
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the
trailer ABS. Repair the trailer ABS immediately
to ensure full braking capability.

11.9
 Brake Systems

Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps

Telltale
Color Description Related Information
Lamp
Automatic Traction A flashing telltale lamp indicates a wheel spin
Amber Control (ATC) event has been detected, and the ATC system N/A
Active is active.

Automatic Traction
Indicates the ATC SPIN switch has been Press the switch again to
Amber Control (ATC)
pressed to allow wheel slip. active ATC.
Deactivated
A solid telltale indicates a fault or malfunction
with the Antilock Braking System/Electronic
Brake System Braking System (ABS/EBS) or the electronic
Amber air processing unit (EAPU). N/A
Caution
Take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
service center as soon as possible.
A solid telltale indicates a failure in the Antilock
Braking System/Electronic Braking System
Brake System (ABS/EBS) or the electronic air processing unit
Red N/A
Warning (EAPU).
Stop the vehicle and call for service.
Table 11.1, Braking and Traction Telltale Lamps

11.10
 12
Steering System
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Steering System

Power Steering System

NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
03/21/2022 f612020
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result. Fig. 12.2, Electro-hydraulic Power Steering Error
Telltale
NOTICE
Cold Activation
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering When the ambient air temperature is below 32°F
components and could damage them. (0°C), the power steering pumps go into cold
activation mode. The driver is notified by the
The power steering pumps, which are electrically cautionary low temperature window shown in
driven, provide power assist for the steering system. Fig. 12.3.
In Cold Activation mode the speed of the power
WARNING steering pumps is limited until the motors warm up.
Power steering and adaptive power steering (APS)
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist are available, but steering requires more effort.
feature of the steering system requires much
greater effort, especially in sharp turns or at low
speeds, which could result in an accident and
possible injury.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
the adaptive and electro-hydraulic power steering
systems. If the front tires become lodged in a deep
hole or rut, drive the vehicle out instead of using the
steering system to lift the tires out of the hole.
If the power-assist feature does not work due to
hydraulic fluid loss, steering pump damage, or
another cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do
not drive the vehicle until the cause of the problem
has been corrected.
An error with the adaptive power steering system 03/28/2022 f612043
results in the red telltale shown in Fig. 12.1. An error
with the electro-hydraulic power steering system Fig. 12.3, Cold Activation Notification
results in the display of this telltale in yellow as
shown in Fig. 12.2. High Temperature Derate and
Shutdown
When the power steering pumps experience
temperatures over 203°F (95°C), they start to derate.
Steering the vehicle takes more effort. A power
steering pump derate caution, as shown in Fig. 12.4,
03/21/2022 f611659a
appears on the driver display.
If the power steering pumps reach 230°F (110°C),
Fig. 12.1, Adaptive Power Steering Error Telltale the pumps will shut down, resulting in a loss of
power steering. The driver is notified by a caution
window as shown in Fig. 12.5, stating that power
steering is not functional.

12.1
 Steering System

03/28/2022 f612045 03/28/2022 f612047

Fig. 12.4, High Temperature Derate Notification Fig. 12.6, Power Steering Malfunction Window

03/28/2022 f612044

Fig. 12.5, High Temperature Shut Down Notification

Misuse Protection
Prolonged and aggressive use of power steering that
results in a larger current draw by the pumps may
cause them to go into misuse protection mode. This
limits power steering performance. If this occurs, the
power steering malfunction window, as shown in
Fig. 12.6, appears on the driver display along with
the yellow electro-hydraulic power steering error
telltale.

12.2
 13
eAxle
eAxle 2-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
eAxle

eAxle 2-Speed Transmission Autoneutral

Gear Display Autoneutral automatically shifts the eAxle 2-speed
transmission into neutral under certain conditions.
The current eAxle 2-speed transmission gear and
current shift mode are always displayed on the driver If the vehicle is left in drive or reverse with the park
display screen. If there is a pending or recommended brake applied, after a short period of time a buzzer
gear shift, this also appears as shown in Fig. 13.1. sounds, the gear display blinks, and a popup
appears. If the driver does not shift the eAxle
2-speed transmission to neutral, the vehicle shifts the
eAxle 2-speed transmission to neutral. This change
is communicated through a popup and the eAxle
2-speed transmission mode on the driver display
changing to neutral.
If the vehicle is left in drive or reverse with no park
brake applied for an extended period of time, the
1 2 vehicle shift sthe eAxle 2-speed transmission to
neutral. This change is communicated through a
popup and the eAxle 2-speed transmission mode on
the driver display changes to neutral.
If the vehicle is left in drive or reverse and the driver
turns the keyswitch to off or requests the vehicle
power down by other means, a buzzer sounds and
3
the eAxle 2-speed transmission shifts to neutral.

DCDL Switch and ICU Display

The differential lock is activated by a switch on the
dash,′ shown in Fig. 13.2, or activated on the Axles
screen The driver-controlled differential lock (DCDL)
05/11/2022 f612042 feature (side-to-side wheel lock, traction control, or
1. Pending or 3. Current eAxle 2-speed traction equalizer) is an option available on
Recommended Gear transmission Mode eCascadia vehicles with single- or tandem-drive
2. Current Gear axles equipped with a Detroit e-axle.
Fig. 13.1, Current and Pending Gear Display The DCDL provides maximum traction for slippery
conditions by forcing the wheels on each drive axle
Selected Gear governed by the switch to rotate together. When the
DCDL is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks
If the selected gear is different than the the differential case, gears, and axle shafts together,
recommended gear for longer than a half second, the maximizing the traction of both wheels.
recommended gear display flashes and the selected The axles menu is on the infotainment display
gear value is shown. Once the recommended gear accessed by switch 5 shown in Fig. 13.3.
and selected gear match, the recommended gear
display disappears and the current gear display stops The light on the differential lock dash switch
flashing. illuminates solid amber when the lock is engaged.
Pressing the axle menu switch below the
Recommended Shift infotainment display calls up the Axles screen
In Manual mode, a recommended shift is displayed showing the axle locks on the vehicle. Unlocked
to indicate the most economical gear available. axles display as blue bubbles. Locked axles display
as yellow bubbles as shown in Fig. 13.4.
The driver can select a blue bubble on the screen to
lock that axle. When the lock engages, the blue
bubble displays yellow.

13.1
 eAxle

If the DCDL is engaged when it should not be or not

engaged when requested, the amber light on the
physical switch and the yellow axle bubble on the
infotainment screen flashes.

DCDL Operation
DIFF
LOCK WARNING
09/13/2021 f611949 Locking the wheels when the vehicle is traveling
down steep grades or when the wheels are
Fig. 13.2, DCDL Dash Switch slipping could damage the differential and/or lead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11/30/2021 f611982
1. Menu Back 5. Axles Menu 9. Radio Menu
2. Menu Forward 6. Power On/Off Switch 10. Decrease Volume
3. Gauges Menu 7. Lighting Menu 11. Increase Volume
4. Cab Menu 8. Phone Menu

Fig. 13.3, Infotainment Display Switches

11/17/2021 f611981
A generic Axles screen is pictured. eCascadia 6x4 vehicles only have a DCDL on the forward rear axle.
Fig. 13.4, Locked Forward Rear DCDL Shown

13.2
eAxle

to loss of vehicle control, causing personal injury A

and property damage.

NOTICE
Engage the driver-controlled differential lock B
(DCDL) only when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Engaging
the DCDL at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h) can
cause internal axle damage.
02/03/2017 f350079a
IMPORTANT: If equipped with the optional
A. The turning radius increases when the DCDL is
automatic disengagement feature, the DCDL will engaged (understeer condition).
not engage at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h) B. The turning radius decreases when the DCDL is
and automatically disengages at 25 mph (40 disengaged.
km/ h). The parameters of this feature are not
Fig. 13.5, Turning Radii
modifiable.
NOTE: If the DCDL is engaged when the When the lock disengages, the indicator light on
vehicle is shut down, the DCDL disengages. the switch deactivates and the lock bubble on
the Axles screen illuminates blue.
1. With the key ON, press the upper half of the
5. Resume driving at normal speed.
differential lock dash switch or the differential
lock bubble on the Axles screen to engage the
DCDL.
2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the
accelerator to relieve torque on the gears,
allowing the differential to fully lock.
The indicator light on the differential lock switch
illuminates solid amber and the bubble on the
infotainment display illuminates solid yellow when
the lock is engaged.

WARNING
Be especially careful when driving under slippery
conditions with the differential locked. Though
forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
control, personal injury, and property damage.
3. Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40
km/h). When the differential is fully locked, the
turning radius increases because the vehicle
under steers. See Fig. 13.5.
4. To disengage the DCDL after leaving poor road
conditions, briefly let up on the accelerator to
relieve torque on the gears and press the lower
half of the differential lock dash switch or select
the yellow bubble on the Axles screen in the
infotainment display.

13.3
 14
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10
Fifth Wheels

Fifth Wheel Lubrication

WARNING
A standard fifth wheel plate must be kept
lubricated to prevent binding between the tractor
and trailer. A binding fifth wheel could cause
erratic steering and loss of vehicle control, A
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well
lubricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
binding between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the
trailer.
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the
eCascadia Maintenance Manual.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside 04/22/2020 f311258
edges is normal.
Fig. 14.1, No-Lube Plate Wear Inspection
For no-lube fifth wheel plates, inspect the condition
of the no-lube pads. If any of the following conditions
are present, replace the lube plates. NOTICE
• Plates severely chipped, cracked, gouged, or Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding
bent. rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
• More than 20% of the lube plate coating sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
missing from one or both plates due to normal locked to prevent the top plate from sliding
wear. rapidly forward or rearward, causing damage to
the fifth wheel or kingpin.
• A straight edge laid across the lube plate
contacts parts of the surrounding fifth wheel as Trailer Auxiliary Switch
shown in Fig. 14.1.
The trailer auxiliary switch energizes an optional
circuit that allows the trailer electrical system to draw
Fifth Wheel Coupling power.
Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer
WARNING auxiliary function. Press the bottom of the switch to
turn trailer auxiliary function off. See Fig. 14.2.
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle
control, possibly resulting in severe personal
injury or death.
Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the lock control
handle located on either the right or left side of the
fifth wheel. Coupling has successfully occurred when
the kingpin is in the fifth wheel jaws and the control TRLR
handle has moved to the locked position. AUX

Due to the number of options available, your vehicle

may be equipped with a fifth wheel not described in 04/18/2016 f611408
this manual. In this situation, please reference the
vendor literature on the fifth wheel installed. Fig. 14.2, Trailer Auxiliary Switch

14.1
 Fifth Wheels

Fontaine Fifth Wheel Coupling 4. If the vehicle is equipped with a standard fifth
wheel, inspect the trailer kingpin plate to verify it
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to is large enough to completely cover the fifth
prevent the trailer from moving. wheel and that it is properly greased.
2. If equipped with a standard fifth wheel, check 5. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted down
the surface of the fifth wheel for a liberal coating and the ramps are as low as possible.
of grease.
6. Position the tractor so the kingpin is in a position
3. Ensure the fifth wheel jaws are fully open and to enter the throat of the fifth wheel.
the lock control handle is fully extended as
shown in Fig. 14.3. WARNING
A When coupling, always inflate the tractor
suspension air bags prior to coupling.
Inflating the tractor suspension air bags while
positioned underneath the trailer may result in
1 damage to and incorrect coupling of the fifth
wheel, possibly resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
2
NOTICE
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
B cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
7. Adjust the trailer height if required.
1 For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel at the top of the
approach ramps as shown in Fig. 14.4.
2
D
C A
C

B
1
2
04/28/2017 f311124
11/18/2021 f311376
A. The fifth wheel must lift the trailer.
A. The base of the pull handle within 1 inch of the fifth B. Adjust the trailer height if necessary.
wheel indicates the fifth wheel jaws are locked. C. Tilt the ramps down.
B. A gap of more than 1 inch between the pull handle D. The trailer should contact the fifth wheel 4-6 inches
and fifth wheel indicates the fifth wheel jaws are behind the pivot point.
partially open.
C. A fully extended pull handle indicates the fifth wheel Fig. 14.4, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth
jaws are open. Wheel
1. Pull Handle 2. Fifth Wheel
8. With the fifth wheel opening aligned with the
Fig. 14.3, Fontaine Fifth Wheel Lock Handle Positions trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. To prevent the trailer from slamming into

14.2
Fifth Wheels

the kingpin, stop after sliding under the trailer.

Then resume backing up slowly until the fifth
1
wheel locks. A
9. Apply the tractor parking brakes.

WARNING
A visual inspection is required by law. 2
Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. 08/23/2021 f311363
Sound is not reliable. A. Make sure there is less than a one inch gap
between the back of the pull hand and the fifth
Get out of the cab and look. wheel skirt.
Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to 1. Pull Handle 2. Skirt of Fifth Wheel
disconnect, possibly resulting in serious
Fig. 14.6, Fontaine Fifth Wheel Handle Retracted
personal injury or death.
10. Perform a coupling inspection. 12. After lockup is completed and verified, connect
the tractor-to-trailer air system lines and the
10.1 Verify that there is no gap between the electrical cable to the trailer. Take care to prevent
bottom of the trailer and the fifth wheel as dirt or foreign material from entering the air
shown in Fig. 14.5. system lines.
10.2 Make sure the jaw and wedge of the fifth
wheel are locked in place behind the NOTICE
kingpin as shown in Fig. 14.5.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
10.3 Check that the lock control handle is fully
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
retracted as shown in Fig. 14.3; the gap
positioned so that they do not rub on anything.
between the back of the pull handle and
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables,
the skirt of the fifth wheel should be less
resulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires,
than one inch as shown in Fig. 14.6.
potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical
systems.
13. Charge the air brake system with air, checking
that the air connections do not leak.
14. Fully retract the landing gear legs and secure the
A B crank handle.
04/28/2017 f311126 15. Remove the chocks.
A. Check that there is no gap between the trailer and
fifth wheel. Holland Fifth Wheels Coupling
B. Verify the kingpin is locked in the fifth wheel jaws.
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
Fig. 14.5, Coupling Inspection View prevent the trailer from moving.
2. If equipped with a standard fifth wheel, check
WARNING the surface of the fifth wheel for a liberal coating
of grease.
Incorrect fifth wheel locking could cause the
trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious If equipped with a no- or low-lube fifth wheel
personal injury or death. plate, ensure there are no sharp edges, nuts,
bolts, gouges, or large holes along the leading
11. Release the tractor parking brakes. edge of the trailer or in the path of the fifth
Test for kingpin lockup by slowly inching the wheel, as shown in Fig. 14.7, and that any
tractor forward, pulling on the trailer against the residual grease on the upper coupler is free of
chocks. coarse grit.

14.3
 Fifth Wheels

A
1

6" MIN.

40" C
6" MIN.

B B
08/24/2021 f311356
A. Keep the direct path of the fifth wheel and six
inches to either side free of large holes and gouges.
B. Keep bolts and nuts clear of the bolster plate. A
11/12/2021 f311358
Fig. 14.7, Path of a Fifth Wheel
A. Slide the handle forward to move the front notch
3. Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the clear of the bracket.
release handle is in the unlocked position. B. Pull the handle completely out.
C. Slide the handle forward to hook the rear notch onto
3.1 To unlock a Holland FW35 fifth wheel, the bracket.
pull out the release handle as shown in 1. Locking Plate Rear Notch
Fig. 14.8.
Fig. 14.9, Unlocking a Holland FWAL

5. Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth

2
wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin as shown
1
in Fig. 14.10. The kingpin should be in a position
to enter the throat of the locking mechanism.

A
A

08/25/2021 f311346
A. Pull the release handle to open the lock.
1. Lock Open 2. Lock Closed
1
Fig. 14.8, FW35 Holland Lock Open and Closed

3.2 To unlock a Holland FWAL: 08/24/2021 f311347

• Slide the release handle forward to A. Line up the fifth wheel throat with the trailer kingpin.
move the front notch on the locking 1. Kingpin
plate clear of the bracket.
Fig. 14.10, Positioning the Tractor
• Pull the release handle completely
out.
NOTICE
• Slide the release handle forward
again to hook the rear notch on the Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
locking plate onto the bracket as cause improper coupling, which could result in
shown in Fig. 14.9. damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
4. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted 6. Adjust the trailer height if required.
rearwards with the ramps down and resting on For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
the tilt stops. should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to

14.4
Fifth Wheels

8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel • Verify that there is no gap between
pivot as shown in Fig. 14.4. the bottom of the trailer and the fifth
For a no- or low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel as shown in Fig. 14.12.
wheel must slide freely under the trailer; the
trailer should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot
point shown in Fig. 14.11.

04/28/2017 f311125 11/12/2021 f311402

A. Adjust the trailer height as needed.
B. Verify that the pivot point allows the fifth wheel to Fig. 14.12, No Gap Between Fifth Wheel and Trailer
slide under the trailer.
• Verify that the kingpin is securely
Fig. 14.11, Trailer Connection Point, No- and Low-Lube locked as shown in Fig. 14.13.
Fifth Wheel

7. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the A

trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, stop to
prevent from hitting the kingpin too hard, then
resume backing up slowly until the fifth wheel
locks.
On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must
lift the trailer. B

On a no- or low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the

08/24/2021 f311351
trailer. Lifting the trailer with a no- or low-lube
fifth wheel may damage the fifth wheel plate. A. Verify there is a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) or less gap.
B. Verify that the locks are completely closed around
8. Apply the tractor parking brakes. the kingpin.
Fig. 14.13, Kingpin Locked in Holland FW35 Fifth
WARNING Wheel Jaws

A visual inspection is required by law. • Verify that the nut and washer are
snug against the fifth wheel as
Some improper couplings can pass a pull test.
shown in Fig. 14.14.
Sound is not reliable.
9.2 Verifying a Holland FWAL is locked:
Get out of the cab and look.
• Verify that there is no gap between
Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to
the bottom of the trailer and the fifth
disconnect, possibly resulting in serious
wheel as shown in Fig. 14.12.
personal injury or death.
• Verify that the kingpin is securely
9. Perform a coupling inspection.
locked as shown in Fig.14.15.
9.1 Verifying a Holland FW35 fifth wheel is
locked:

14.5
 Fifth Wheels

08/24/2021 f311350
A. Verify the nut and washer are snug against the fifth
wheel
1
Fig. 14.14, Nut and Washer Snug Against Locked 11/15/2021 f311401
Holland FW35 1. Handle
2. Locking Plate Rear Notch (behind top of bracket)
1 3. Locking Plate Front Notch (behind arm of bracket)
Fig. 14.16, Holland FWAL Handle Fully Retracted

potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical

systems.
12. Charge the air brake system with air, checking
that the air connections do not leak.

WARNING
2 Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause
11/12/2021 f311403 the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in
1. Lock Completely Closed Around Kingpin serious personal injury or death.
2. Lock Retainer Securing Lock 13. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes
Fig. 14.15, Holland FWAL Lock Closed Around Kingpin set, check for clearance between the kingpin and
the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
• Verify that the handle is fully and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack
retracted as shown in Fig. 14.16. is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified
10. Release the tractor parking brakes.
technician.
Test for kingpin lockup by slowly inching the
tractor forward, pulling the trailer against the Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling
chocks.
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
11. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to- prevent the trailer from moving.
trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to
the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign 2. Tilt the fifth wheel ramps down.
material from entering the air system lines. 3. Unlock the fifth wheel jaws.
Lift the release handle up into the wide slot and
NOTICE then pull the release handle out while moving it
forward as shown in Fig. 14.17. Lock the handle
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
into the open position on the notch provided.
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
positioned so that they do not rub on anything. 4. Back the vehicle close to the trailer, centering the
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, kingpin on the fifth wheel throat as shown in
resulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, Fig. 14.10.

14.6
Fifth Wheels

the narrow slot as shown in Fig. 14.18 or the

release handle should abut the casting as shown
in Fig. 14.19.
There should be no gap between the trailer and
B the fifth wheel.

11/01/2021 f311395
A. Lift the release handle up into the wide slot.
B. Pull the handle out.
C. While pulling the handle out, move it forward.
Fig. 14.17, Unlocking the Jost Fifth Wheel
11/01/2021 f311396
NOTICE A. Verify the handle is inside the narrow slot.

Attempting to couple at the wrong height may Fig. 14.18, Locked Jost Fifth Wheel
cause improper coupling, which could result in
8. Release the tractor parking brakes and test for
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
kingpin lockup by slowly moving the tractor
5. Adjust the trailer height if required. forward, pulling the trailer against the chocks.
The trailer should contact the fifth wheel at the 9. After lockup is verified, connect the tractor-to-
top of the approach ramps or approximately 4 to trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to
6 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot point as the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign
shown in Fig. 14.4. material from entering the air system lines.
6. Back the tractor slowly toward the trailer. After
picking up the trailer—stop. This is to prevent NOTICE
hitting the kingpin too hard.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
Then resume backing up slowly until the fifth the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
wheel locks. positioned so that they do not rub on anything.
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables,
WARNING resulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires,
potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical
A visual inspection is required by law. systems.
Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. 10. Charge the air brake system with air, checking
Sound is not reliable. that the air connections do not leak.
Get out of the cab and look. 11. Fully retract the landing gear legs and secure the
Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to crank handle.
disconnect, possibly resulting in serious 12. Remove the chocks.
personal injury or death.
7. Apply the tractor parking brake, then perform a
physical check for positive kingpin lockup.
Depending on the fifth wheel model, the handle
should be fully retracted with the handle inside

14.7
 Fifth Wheels

OK OK

04/28/2017 f311127

Fig. 14.19, Jost Release Handle Locked

Fifth Wheel Uncoupling Slide the handle forward again to hook the
rear notch on the locking plate onto the
Manual Uncoupling bracket as shown in Fig. 14.9.
1. Slowly back the tractor tightly against the trailer 7.4 Jost: Depending on the fifth wheel either:
to relieve pressure on the fifth wheel lock. Lift the release handle up into the wide
2. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. slot and then pull the release handle out
while moving it forward as shown in
3. Chock the trailer rear wheels. Fig. 14.17. Then lock the handle into the
4. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is open position on the notch provided.
removed from the fifth wheel. Or, in the event of a failure in the air
release system, pull the handle directly
5. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
out and hook it open on the notch as
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
shown in Fig. 14.20.
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
6. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red
trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer
is prepared for uncoupling.
7. Release the kingpin locking mechanism following
the instructions for each manufacturer below.
7.1 Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the
lock control handle to the unlocked A
position as shown in Fig. 14.3.
B
7.2 Holland FW35: Pull out the release
handle as shown in Fig. 14.8.
11/01/2021 f311397
7.3 Holland FWAL: Slide the handle forward
A. Pull the retractable handle out.
to move the front notch on the locking B. Hook the handle open using the notch.
plate clear of the bracket.
Pull the handle completely out. Fig. 14.20, Jost Release Handle Unlocked

14.8
Fifth Wheels

8. Release the tractor parking brake then drive Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock
forward slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down
the fifth wheel and off the ramps. NOTE: The kingpin release will not activate if
the vehicle is moving, the parking brake is not
Air-Actuated Uncoupling set, or if the switch is pushed for less than 3
seconds. Unless all of these conditions are met,
A dash-mounted kingpin release switch (if so the trailer will not be uncoupled.
equipped) may be used to uncouple the trailer. See
Fig. 14.21. If the kingpin release switch is pressed for less
than 3 seconds, Fig. 14.22 will appear on the
driver display. Press the back arrow to dismiss
the popup.

K−PIN
REL

03/09/2016 f611341

Fig. 14.21, Kingpin Release Switch

NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, air-

actuated kingpins can be manually released
following the instructions for manual uncoupling.

11/23/2021 f611985
WARNING
Fig. 14.22, Kingpin Release Not Activated Popup, ICC5
Once the kingpin release switch has been
pushed, the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle If the other two conditions are not met, a ’Kingpin
MUST NOT be driven with the trailer until the Release’ popup will appear listing the condition(s)
trailer has been uncoupled and coupled again. that need to be met.
Failure to do so may result in separation of the
trailer from the tractor, possibly causing serious 1. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red
personal injury or death. trailer-air supply knobs are out, the tractor and
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling is prepared for uncoupling.
Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel 2. Push and hold the kingpin release switch, shown
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows. in Fig. 14.21, for a minimum of 3 seconds. The
system will apply air for 20 to 30 seconds to
1. Slowly back the tractor tightly against the trailer ensure the kingpin unlocks. When the kingpin is
to relieve pressure on the fifth wheel locks. unlocked, a popup notification is displayed as
2. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. shown in Fig. 14.23.
3. Chock the trailer rear wheels. If there is a problem with releasing the kingpin,
Fig. 14.24 will appear on the driver display.
4. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel. 3. Release the tractor parking brake.

5. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and 4. Drive out from under the trailer.
electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt
or foreign material from entering the lines.

14.9
 Fifth Wheels

are positioned through the slots to hold the fifth

wheel in the desired position.
The amount of load distribution on the front steering
axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
the steering control of the vehicle. Determine the
front and rear axle weights by weighing the vehicle
on scales designed for this purpose.
The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) label; see the ’Vehicle Identification’
chapter for the location of these labels on your
vehicle. The desired load on the axle is no less than
11/23/2021 f611984
80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating, but in
no instances should the axle load exceed the
Fig. 14.23, Kingpin Release Activated Popup, ICC5 maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
CMVSS label.

Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch

NOTICE
Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the
kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
drivetrain.
The fifth wheel air slide switch operates an air
cylinder that locks and unlocks the slide. See
Fig. 14.25.
11/23/2021 f611986
SLIDE
Fig. 14.24, Kingpin Release Not Confirmed Popup, ICC5

Fifth Wheel Slide

WARNING AIR
SLIDE

Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly. Do not

LOCK
overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading 09/28/2016 f611343
the trailer.
Incorrect slide adjustment or improper axle Fig. 14.25, Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
loading could cause erratic steering and loss of Moving the air slide control valve switch to the lock
vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious position deactivates the control valve and locks the
personal injury or death. fifth wheel to the baseplate. Moving the switch to the
On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth-wheel SLIDE position activates the control valve and
plate is attached to rails that allow forward and unlocks the fifth wheel slide mechanism, allowing
rearward movement of the fifth wheel to optimally changes to the total length of the tractor-trailer and
distribute the load across the axles. Slots are evenly changes to axle loads to comply with varying
spaced along the slide rails, and retractable wedges jurisdictional laws.

14.10
Fifth Wheels

Air Slide Operation 1 1

1. Set the air-slide switch to SLIDE. 2
Ensure the locking plungers have released.
For Fontaine fifth wheels, see Fig. 14.26 and
Fig. 14.27 for depictions of the locked and
unlocked states.
For Holland fifth wheels, the locking plungers A
retract as shown in Fig. 14.28.
For Jost fifth wheels, the mechanism activates 1 1
as shown in Fig. 14.29. 2 2

B
08/25/2021 f311364
A. Unlocked with plungers retracted.
B. Locked with plungers in rack.
1. Racks 2. Plungers
Fig. 14.28, Holland Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel

2. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to

remove the weight from the tractor.
11/05/2021 f311399 3. Pull the red trailer-air-supply knob to set the
trailer-parking brakes.
Fig. 14.26, Locked Fontaine Air-Operated Sliding Fifth
Wheel 4. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
NOTE: Ensure the trailer landing gear does not
come in contact with the tractor frame or other
components, and that the front of the trailer will
not come in contact with the rear of the cab or
other components if they extend beyond the
rear of the cab.
5. Apply the tractor parking brakes.

WARNING
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal
11/05/2021 f311400
injury or death.
6. Set the air-slide switch to LOCK. Visually inspect
Fig. 14.27, Unlocked Fontaine Air-Operated Sliding the locking wedges or plungers to make sure
Fifth Wheel that they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots.

14.11
 Fifth Wheels

09/10/2010 f311131
A. Unlocked B. Locked
Fig. 14.29, Jost Sliding Fifth Wheel

The fifth wheel may need to be moved slightly to

enable the locking wedges to fully lock.
Further verify that the plungers have engaged by
tugging the tractor forward while the trailer
brakes are locked and the wheels are chocked.

14.12
 15
Headlight Aiming
Before Checking the Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Checking the Aim of the Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Adjusting the Aim of a Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Headlight Aiming

Before Checking the Headlight

Aim A
Do the following before checking or adjusting the
headlight aim.
• Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and
water.
• Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
the underside of the fenders.
• Check for damage to the hood and hinge
assembly. Repair as necessary.
• Check that the hood is closed and latched. 09/21/2016 f546613

• Check the springs for sagging or broken A. The height adjusting dot is located in front of the
low-beam lamp on the headlight lens.
leaves.
• Check the suspension for proper functioning of Fig. 15.1, Headlight
the leveling mechanism. On cabs with air If the distance between either projection center
suspensions, make sure that the height is and the mark made on the wall or screen is
properly adjusted. greater than the maximum distance given in
• With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires Table 15.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
are inflated to the recommended air pressure. headlight.

Checking the Aim of the

Headlights
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 ft (7.6 m)
away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the
parking brake. Chock the tires.
2. Each headlight has a height adjusting dot on the
lens as shown in Fig. 15.1. Measure the
distance from the ground to the height adjusting
dot on each headlight See Fig. 15.2, item A.
Make a note of these measurements.
3. On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each
headlight bulb center using the measurements
found in step 2. See Fig. 15.2, items 2 and 3.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlights.
5. Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.
The center of each beam projection should fall
on or near the marks made during step 3. See
Fig. 15.3.
6. Use Table 15.1 to determine the maximum
vertical distance allowable between the marks on
the wall and the center of each low-beam
projection.

15.1
 Headlight Aiming

2
3

A A
B
B

7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
02/25/2016 f546264
A. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
B. Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
1. Screen or Wall 3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
2. Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 15.2, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall

1
2

10/04/2021 f546265b
A. Measurement: 25 ft (7.6 m)
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit 3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection

Fig. 15.3, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

15.2
Headlight Aiming

Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Distance Between Ground Desired Variation (Fig. 15.3, Upper Limit (Fig. 15.3, Item Lower Limit (Fig. 15.3, Item
and Headlight: inches (mm) Item 2): inches (mm) 1): inches (mm) 3): inches (mm)
22–36 (560–900) 0 3.9 (100) 3.9 (100)
36–48 (900–1200) 2 (50) down 2 (50) 6 (150)
48–54 (1200–1400) 4 (101.6) down 1.6 (40) 6.5 (165)
Table 15.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Adjusting the Aim of a 2. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to raise the
beam of the headlight or counterclockwise to
Headlight lower it.
3. Adjust the beam until the center of the low-beam
NOTICE projection and the mark on the wall or screen is
within the limits given in Table 15.1.
Do not use power tools to adjust headlight aim.
Doing so will strip or break the adjusting screw. 4. If necessary, adjust the other headlight.

The adjusting screw is located on the bottom of the

headlight assembly, accessible from inside the wheel
well when the hood is closed. See Fig. 15.4.

02/25/2016 f546266

Fig. 15.4, Headlight Adjusting (shown with the hood

open)

1. Remove the plug.

15.3
 16
Vehicle Appearance and
Care
Cleaning and Disinfecting Cab Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Cleaning the Cab Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Cleaning the Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Washing and Polishing the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Caring for External Chrome Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Vehicle Appearance and Care

Cleaning and Disinfecting Cab NOTICE

Surfaces
Any disinfectant dispensed by a pressurized
Cleaning and Disinfecting Safely aerosol container is not recommended. The
direct spray of liquids onto the vehicle’s interior
The following guidelines are for cleaning and panels, electronic components, or permeable
disinfecting commonly touched surfaces on the inside materials is not recommended.
and outside of a vehicle.
Using an aerosol disinfecting spray may cause
For best results, follow cleaning and disinfecting
damage to parts of the vehicle.
procedures fully and consistently. Ensure there is
adequate ventilation when using chemicals. Examples of either a dilutable or ready to use
quaternary ammonium based disinfectant include:
• Doors and windows should remain open when
cleaning inside the vehicle. • Lysol® Deodorizing Disinfectant Cleaner
• When cleaning and disinfecting, individuals • Fantastik® Disinfectant Multi-Purpose Cleaner
should wear disposable gloves compatible with • Hillyard Vindicator®+ Disinfectant
the products being used as well as any other
personal protective equipment (PPE) required All exterior high-touch surfaces should be cleaned
according to the product manufacturer’s with soap and water before applying disinfectant.
instructions and the safety data sheet (SDS). Exterior high-touch surfaces include, but are not
• Gloves and any other disposable PPE used for limited to, the following:
cleaning and disinfecting the vehicle should be • grab handles
removed and disposed of after use.
• door handles
• Wash hands with soap and water for at least
20 seconds immediately after removal of • hood latches and handles
gloves and PPE, or use an alcohol-based hand • trailer glad hands
sanitizer with at least 60 percent alcohol.
Freightliner recommends applying the disinfectant
Cleaning and Disinfecting High-Touch solution to a microfiber cloth until it is damp but not
dripping and then wiping down high-touch areas.
Surfaces Take care to fully wet surfaces with the disinfectant,
NOTE: Depending on how a vehicle is used, it and ensure that it remains wet for the period of time
may be helpful to create an inclusive checklist stipulated by the disinfectant manufacturer to
of high-touch surfaces to regularly clean. effectively disinfect the surface. Afterwards, if
necessary, wipe off excess disinfecting solution with
To clean surfaces, soak a microfiber cloth with a a new clean cloth.
detergent/water solution, wring the cloth out, and
wipe down high-touch areas. Allow the detergent If an interior high-touch surface is visibly dirty, clean
water/solution to sit on the surface for 20-30 seconds it before applying disinfectant; if it appears clean,
before using a fresh microfiber cloth slightly wipe down the area with disinfectant.
dampened with water to remove it. Interior high-touch surfaces include, but are not
After this soap and water wash, Freightliner limited to, the following:
recommends the use of either a dilutable or ready to • grab handles
use quaternary ammonium based disinfectant on
vehicle interior and exterior surfaces. • seats

IMPORTANT: Follow the manufacturer’s • arm rests

instructions for using a disinfectant as these • steering wheel
vary by product.
• switch pods
• shift knob
• door handles

16.1
 Vehicle Appearance and Care

• seat belt buckles The supplemental restraint system (SRS)/crash

detection equipment located behind the driver’s seat,
• light and air controls
shown in Fig. 16.1, should not get wet. When
• doors and windows cleaning the cab floor, do not allow any water to
come in contact with the SRS/crash detection
Dashboard and Touch Screen Care equipment housing.

NOTICE
When cleaning the dashboard do not use Armor-
All Protectant ®, STP Son-of-a-Gun®, window
cleaner, or other equivalent treatments. These
cleaners contain vinyl plasticizers which can
cause stress crazing and cracking in the interior
plastic panels. This type of damage is not
covered by vehicle warranty.
Wipe down fragile components carefully to avoid
damaging the vehicle.
Do not directly spray the screen or any other
device in the vehicle. Do not use soap and water
on a touch screen. Excess water or disinfectant 06/08/2022 f602912
will damage electrical components.
Fig. 16.1, SRS/Crash Detection Equipment Location
If the vehicle contains a touch screen, follow the
manufacture’s instructions for cleaning and
disinfecting it. If manufacturer guidance is Cleaning the Upholstery
unavailable, spray a lint-free cloth with a mix of at To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light
least 70 percent isopropyl alcohol and distilled water brushing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. In
and gently wipe down the screen and then dry it with most cases, quickly wiping down a seat with a damp
a clean cloth. cloth will remove dirt, spills, and pet hair.
Cleaning and Disinfecting Chemicals To preserve the upholstery and prevent damage,
carefully review the following sections for
to Avoid recommended cleaning procedures.
Freightliner vehicles should not be cleaned or
disinfected with products that contain the following Cleaning Mordura® and Other Cloth
chemicals: Seats
• hydrogen peroxide Vacuuming cloth seats regularly and cleaning spills
• sodium chlorite and stains as soon as they occur and will help keep
the seats looking new.
• sodium hypochlorite (chlorine bleach)
NOTE: Using diluted laundry detergent to clean
• glycol acid cloth seats may create excess suds.
• octanoic acid Mordura is a highly durable cloth treated with a fire
• hypochlorous acid retardant, a Teflon water repellent, and other finishes
that prevent color fading and wear. It is the standard
• silicone cloth used in seats for the eCascadia.
How to clean a Mordura or other cloth seat:
Cleaning the Cab Floor
1. Vacuum the seats to remove loose dirt and
Do not pressure wash the cab floor in an electric debris. Make sure to vacuum the seams where
vehicle. crumbs and debris can gather.

16.2
Vehicle Appearance and Care

2. Lightly spray a cloth cleaning solution on a soiled caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a
or discolored area of the seat. permanent dull appearance.
Don’t spray the whole seat. Spray and clean one
area before moving onto another.
Chewing Gum
If the stain has an odor, consider creating a Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a
solution of 1/4 cup (60 mL) baking soda and 1 plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any
cup (250 mL) of warm water to spray on the remaining traces of gum can be removed with an
stain. all-purpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and
wiped off.
A cleaning solution of 1 cup white distilled
vinegar, a few drops of dish soap, and a gallon Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote
(4 liters) of hot water may also be used. The
smell of the vinegar will dissipate. Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged
contact. They should be wiped off immediately and
Do not saturate the cloth of the seat with any the area carefully cleaned, using a cloth dampened
cleaner; soaking a cloth seat may lead to mold with naphtha.
or mildew.
3. Using a soft or medium bristle brush, lightly Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
scrub the sprayed area of the seat. Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use
Do not use a stiff bristle brush as it may damage paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl.
the upholstery. An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or
turpentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact
4. Use a clean microfiber cloth to wipe away suds with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl.
as they form.
Using a light colored cloth will enable you to see Sulfide Stains
the dirt removed with the suds. Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and
5. Repeat this spray, scrub, wipe process until the some canned goods, can stain after prolonged
area is clean. Stains may take 3 to 7 sprays to contact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by
remove. placing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the
spotted area and pouring a liberal amount of 6
6. Vacuum the seat again to help dry the cloth. percent hydrogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the
Make sure the cloth is completely dry before saturated cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60
sitting in the seat. minutes. For stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-
peroxide saturated cloth to remain on the area
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning overnight. Use caution to prevent the solution from
Harsh cleaning agents can cause permanent seeping into the seams, or it will weaken the cotton
damage to vinyl upholstery. Waxing or refinishing thread.
improves soil resistance for all vinyls.
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover
Ordinary Dirt Prolonged contact with these substances causes
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap, permanent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a immediately after contact minimizes damage. Do not
large area and let it soak for a few minutes, then rub spread the liquid during removal.
briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can be
repeated several times, as necessary.
Shoe Polish
Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush
vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be
after applying the soap.
wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used
preparations normally found around the home can be for sulfide stains.
used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for
sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with

16.3
 Vehicle Appearance and Care

Ball Point Ink • Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun.

Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed • Always use water. After the cab is completely
immediately with a damp cloth, using water or washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
rubbing alcohol. If this does not work, try the • Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth,
procedure used for sulfide stains. as this will scratch the paint.
Miscellaneous • Do not remove ice or snow from a painted
surface with a scraper of any sort.
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments
described above, it is sometimes helpful to expose • To prevent damage to the finish, wax it
the vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. regularly. Before waxing, if the finish has
Mustard, ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and become dull, remove oxidized paint using a
dyes often bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the cleaner specifically designed for this purpose.
vinyl undamaged. Remove all road tar and tree sap before
waxing. Freightliner recommends that a quality
Washing and Polishing the brand of cleaner or cleaner-polish and
polishing wax be used.
Cab • Do not let antifreeze stand on a painted
IMPORTANT: Carefully read all instructions surface. If this should occur, rinse the surface
before using or applying any cleaner or product off with water.
on the vehicle or components. Failure to follow • To prevent rust, have any nicks or other
manufacturers’ recommendations can result in damage on the finish touched up as soon as
damage to the finish. possible.
• Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
WARNING possible.
Do not power wash or steam clean in the area of Protecting Vehicle Labeling
vehicle electrical components, unless specified
by vehicle manuals or service literature. Power A majority of the labels applied to cab are required
washing and steam cleaning can cause for reasons of safety or identification. To prevent
corrosion, permanently damaging these delamination and deterioration of labels and stickers,
components, which could result in fire, personal follow these guidelines carefully:
injury, or property damage.
• Do not pressure wash the label or sticker or
surfaces near it.
Protecting Your Vehicle’s Finish
• Do not use strong alkaline soaps on or near
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these the label or sticker.
guidelines carefully.
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle Care of Exterior Lights
frequently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use
a mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent.
NOTICE
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals, Do not use a power buffer, paper towels,
and cleaners may scratch the finish. chemical solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your headlight lens, all of which can remove the UV
vehicle. coating from the surface, and result in yellowing
of the lens.
Keeping Your Vehicle Looking New Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these
and water.
guidelines:

16.4
Vehicle Appearance and Care

Caring for External Chrome

Components
NOTE: Chrome components are optional on the
eCascadia.
To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and
protected at all times. This is especially important
during winter driving and in coastal areas where
there is exposure to salt air.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
used.
Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a non-
abrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as
exhaust pipes.

Care of Fiberglass Parts

Wash any fiberglass components monthly with a mild
detergent, such as dishwashing liquid. Avoid strong
alkaline cleansers.
Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass.

16.5
 17
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists

Periodic Inspections and Inspection of Wheels and Tires Done

Inspect wheel bearing oil seals and
Maintenance, General 5
lubrication levels.
Information 6 Check mud flaps.

It is the driver’s responsibility to inspect the vehicle Mid-Frame Area Inspection Done
and ensure it is completely roadworthy before placing Drain brake system air reservoirs on vehicles
it into service. 1
without automatic drain valves.
Commercial vehicles may be subject to inspection by 2 Inspect frame rails and crossmembers.
authorized inspectors; an unsafe vehicle can be
taken out of service until the driver or owner repairs Front Box Inspection Done
it. 1 Check for oil leaks.
2 Check for coolant leaks.
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle 3 Check power steering reservoir fluid level.
components are in good working condition before
4 Check eDrive surge tank coolant levels.
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate downtime to
fix overlooked or forgotten items. 5 Check battery surge tank coolant levels.
6 Inspect visible wiring.
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept 7 Inspect frame rails.
as a record that the procedures have been
completed. For details on how to inspect each item Cab Inspection Done
on the checklists, see the corresponding procedure 1 Check the air pressure warning systems.
(step number) in Chapter 18. Check the air governor cut-in and cut-out
2
pressures.
Checklists 3 Check the air pressure build-up time.
4 Check the air system leakage.
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond
5 Check the air pressure reserve.
with the procedures and steps in Chapter 18,
6 Inspect mirrors, windows, and windshield.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and
Ensure the horn, windshield wipers, and
Maintenance. Your vehicle may not be equipped 7
windshield washers are working properly.
with all components listed below. Verify heater and defroster are working
8
properly.
Daily Pre-Trip Inspection Checklists 9 Check the operation of all interior lamps
See the following tables for a list of procedures that 10 Check the operation of all exterior lamps.
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place 13 Inspect all seat belts and tether belts.
a check mark in the Done column to indicate a 14 Make necessary mirror adjustments.
procedure has been performed. 15 Test the service brakes.
16 Test the backup beep.
Inspector Date 17 Test the gas detection system.

Weekly Post-Trip Inspection Checklist

Suspension and Slack Adjusters Inspection Done See the following table for procedures that should be
1 Inspect suspension components. performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in
2 Inspect slack adjusters. the Done column to indicate a procedure has been
performed.
Inspection of Wheels and Tires Done
1 Inspect wheel covers. Inspector Date
2 Examine tire condition.
3 Check tire inflation.
Examine and clean rims and wheel Front Box Inspection Done
4
components.
2 Check the windshield washer reservoir level.

17.1
 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists

Front Box Inspection Done Fluids Added During Inspection

3 Inspect all water evacuation components. Fluid Amount Added
4 Inspect air vent hoses. Battery circuit coolant
5 Inspect the steering components.

Monthly Post-Trip Inspection

Checklists
See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the Done column to indicate a procedure has
been performed.

Inspector Date

Brake Components Done

1 Inspect brake system component fasteners.
2 Inspect brake chamber exterior surfaces.
3 Inspect air brake lines.
4 Inspect flex air lines.
5 Inspect brake linings and brake drums/rotors.
6 Check thickness of brake linings.

eAxle Done
1 Inspect rear pads.
2 Inspect bolts on mounting brackets.

Mid-Frame Area Done

Drain brake system air reservoirs on vehicles
1
without automatic drain valves.
2 Inspect aerodynamic components.

Front Box Inspection Done.

1 Inspect the hood and bumper.
2 Inspect radiator and heater hoses.
3 Inspect the low-voltage batteries.
4 Check the steering wheel for excessive play.

Fluids Added
Use the following table to note any fluids that were
added during the inspection and maintenance
procedures.

Fluids Added During Inspection

Fluid Amount Added
Wheel hub oil
Power steering fluid
eDrive coolant
Windshield washer fluid

17.2
 18
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Daily Pre-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

Safety Precautions 1. Inspect the following suspension components for

signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear.

DANGER • springs
• spring hangers
When working on the vehicle, turn the key to the
off position, set the parking brake, and chock the • shocks
tires. • suspension arms
Before working on the high-voltage (HV) system, • suspension brackets
decommission the vehicle and verify the HV
system is shut down • axle seats
Before working under the vehicle, always place • bushings
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the 2. Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See
vehicle cannot drop. Fig. 18.1.
Failure to follow these directions could result in
serious personal injury or death.

Daily Pre-Trip Inspections and 3

Maintenance 4
5
Complete the following inspection and maintenance
procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
6
good working condition before each trip. A driver who
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can 7
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled. 8

If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a

consistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly
inspection and maintenance procedures should be
2
performed before the trip.
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,
inspections, and maintenance procedures
detailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive.
Refer to other component and body
manufacturers’ instructions for specific
inspection and maintenance instructions, as well
as local, state, and federal guidelines. 9
1 10
05/05/2017 f422530
NOTE: If any system or component does not
pass this inspection, it must be corrected before 1. Grease Fitting (if 5. Clevis Pin (large)
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment equipped) 6. Clevis Pin (small)
2. Slack Adjuster 7. Actuator Rod
requires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair, Housing 8. Boot
see the eCascadia Workshop Manual for 3. Brake Chamber 9. Manual Adjusting Nut
procedures and specifications. Pushrod 10. Camshaft Splines
4. Clevis
Suspension and Slack Adjuster Fig. 18.1, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
Inspection
• Inspect slack adjuster boots for cuts or
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect tears.
suspension and slack adjuster components.

18.1
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

• Look for worn clevis pins on brake order to maintain compliance with greenhouse
chamber pushrods. gas and fuel efficiency regulations.
• Look for missing or damaged cotter pins Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to
on the clevis pins. determine the rolling resistance of the originally
• Ensure chamber piston rods are in line installed tires. Visit www.epa.gov/smartway for
with the slack adjusters. additional information and resources.
3. Check tire inflation.
Wheel and Tire Inspection
For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each the tire manufacturer’s guidelines. Inflate the tires
wheel and tire assembly. to the applicable pressures if needed.
IMPORTANT: Wheel covers decrease drag force If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check
as a vehicle moves, thereby improving fuel the wheel and tire for damage before adding air.
efficiency. If replacement of a wheel cover is Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry
necessary, the replacement cover must meet or during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline
exceed the drag reduction performance of the moisture traps and service them regularly.
originally installed cover in order to maintain
compliance with greenhouse gas and fuel WARNING
efficiency regulations.
1. If the vehicle was originally equipped with wheel Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
covers, ensure all wheel covers are present and overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
inspect them for damage or wear. the tires and make the tires and rims more
susceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
If equipped, remove the wheel covers from rear tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
drive wheels prior to inspecting the tires and in serious personal injury or death.
wheel components.
NOTE: To install a wheel cover, align the center NOTICE
cover opening on the cover support bracket and
rotate 60 degrees until the cover latches. A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more
in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
2. Inspect each tire for the following: inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
• valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on by a qualified tire service facility.
finger-tight IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation
• bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations pressure must not exceed the rim or wheel
manufacturer’s recommendations, even though
• oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will the tire may be approved for a higher load
soften the rubber and destroy the tire) inflation. Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer
• tread depth—if tread is less than 4/32 inch for the correct tire inflation pressure for the
(3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32 vehicle load.
inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the
tire 4. Examine each rim and wheel component.
• debris lodged between dual tire sets 4.1 Remove all dirt and debris from the
assembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up
IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR) tires around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn
minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls, thereby stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel
decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel nuts.
efficiency. If tire replacement is necessary,
replacement tires must meet or have less rolling
resistance than the originally installed tires in

18.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

the vehicle from service until the leak has been

WARNING fixed.
Have any worn or damaged wheel components If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel the hub cap. See Group 35 of the eCascadia
manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel Maintenance Manual for recommended
industry’s standard safety precautions and lubricants.
equipment. Otherwise a vehicle or workshop 6. Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang
accident could occur, possibly resulting in 10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground.
serious personal injury or death.
4.2 Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn, Mid-Frame Area Inspection
bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
WARNING
NOTICE
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
Use the recommended torque values and follow the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient sludge particles may be in the airstream and
wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, could cause injury.
resulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and
extreme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut NOTICE
torque can break studs, damage threads, and
crack discs in the stud hole area. If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
4.3 Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
tightening is necessary, use the tightening compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
pattern in Fig. 18.2 to initially tighten the air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
flange nuts 50 to 100 lbf·ft (68 to 136 brake system, which could adversely affect
N·m). Then tighten the flange nuts 450 to braking.
500 lbf·ft (610 to 678 N·m). 1. On vehicles without automatic drains, drain the
brake system air reservoirs.
1 2. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
10 8 areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible
crossmembers for damage or signs of looseness.

3
Front Box Inspection
6
1. Check the ground underneath the front box for
oil leaks.
2. Check the ground underneath the front box and
5 4 along the chassis for coolant leaks.
3. Open the hood.
Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.
7 9
2
The power steering fluid level should be between
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
04/30/2007 f400268
above it. See Fig. 18.3.
Fig. 18.2, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels If needed, fill the reservoir with automatic
transmission fluid that meets Dexron III or TES-
5. Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and 389 specifications.
the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
on wheel and tire or brake components, remove

18.3
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

1 2
2
3
04/30/2020 f462252a
1
NOTE: Typical reservoir shown; configurations may
vary.
09/23/2021 f200971
1. Filler Cap 3. COLD MIN Fill Line
2. MAX Fill Line 1. eDrive Surge Tank 3. COLD MAX Fill Line
2. Battery Surge Tank 4. COLD MIN Fill Line
Fig. 18.3, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Fig. 18.4, Coolant Surge Tanks

NOTICE 7. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny

areas, or rust streaks.
Coolant must be filled to the COLD MAX line of
8. Close the hood.
the surge tanks. Low coolant could result in
overheating, which could cause component
damage. Cab Inspection
IMPORTANT: The surge tanks must be cool to 1. With the key in the OFF position, check the air-
check the coolant levels. pressure warning system.

4. Check the coolant level in the eDrive surge tank. NOTE: The low-air warning buzzer only
See Fig. 18.4. works when the park brake is released. The
low-air warning buzzer is silenced when the
If the coolant is low, fill the tank to the COLD
park brake is set.
MAX line with a 50/50 mixture of water and the
type of antifreeze currently installed in your 1.1 If not previously drained, drain the air
vehicle. reservoirs using moderate brake
5. applications until pressure in both
Check the coolant level in the battery surge tank.
reservoirs is less than 70 psi (483 kPa).
See Fig. 18.4.
1.2 Turn the key to the ON position. The ICU
If the coolant is low, fill the battery system surge
tank to the COLD MAX line with a 50/50 mixture will complete a self-check, and a low-air
of water and the type of antifreeze currently warning buzzer will sound. Ensure the low
installed in your vehicle. air pressure lamp (BRAKE AIR) remains
illuminated and a low-air warning buzzer
6. Inspect visible wiring for damage or looseness. continues to sound after the ICU self-
Check for loose wiring, chafed insulation, and check is complete.
damaged or loose hold-down clamps.
2. Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.

18.4
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

2.1 Start the vehicle and ensure the BRAKE Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
AIR lamp goes out and the buzzer
Pressure Drop:
silences when pressure reaches
Description psi (kPa) Per Minute
approximately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air
reservoirs. Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only 2 (14) 3 (21)
The air governor should cut out at Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer 3 (21) 4 (28)
approximately 120 psi (827 kPa). Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers 5 (35) 6 (42)
2.2 Apply the brake pedal several times. The Table 18.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
air governor should cut in when pressure
in the primary air reservoir (top air gauge)
reaches approximately 100 psi (689 kPa).
WARNING
3. Check air pressure build-up time.
When cleaning windshields and windows, always
3.1 With the air system fully charged, make stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
one full brake application and note the air platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner.
pressure reading on the primary air
gauge. Do not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel
tanks, engine, or under-hood components to
3.2 Further reduce air pressure using access the windshield or windows. Doing so
moderate brake applications, then run the could cause a fall and result in a severe injury.
vehicle at governed rpm.
3.3 Note the time that the pressure reaches NOTICE
the previously noted reading on the
primary air gauge, then note the time that Do not use the turning vanes as handholds.
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure. Doing so could cause damage to the vehicle.
3.4 If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach 6. Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and
cut-out pressure after the primary air windshield for cracks or other damage.
gauge passes the previously noted
pressure (noted after one full brake 7. Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
application), eliminate any leaks or replace windshield washers are operating properly.
the air compressor before operating the These devices must be in good working order for
vehicle. safe vehicle operation.
4. Check air leakage in the system. 8. Turn the fan on and ensure the cab heater and
window defroster are operating properly.
4.1 With the parking brake applied and the air
system fully charged, release the service 9. Check the operation of all interior lights.
brakes and shut down the vehicle. 9.1 Turn on the headlamps and leave them
4.2 Wait one minute and note the air pressure on.
drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the 9.2 Ensure ICU screens illuminate.
primary air reservoir.
9.3 Ensure all equipped driver control
If the pressure drop exceeds the limits switches illuminate and verify the interior
shown in Table 18.1, eliminate any leaks cab lights controlled by these switches
before operating the vehicle. illuminate.
5. Check the air pressure reserve. 9.4 Ensure both turn signal indicators
With the vehicle still off, make one full brake illuminate when the turn signal switch is
application and observe the pressure drop on the activated.
primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than 10. Check the operation of all exterior lamps.
25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before
operating the vehicle. Use the lamp check button on the key fob,
shown in Fig. 18.6, or, if equipped, the LIGHT
TEST switch on the dash as shown in Fig. 18.7.

18.5
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

1
2
1

3
4
5
6 8

04/28/2022 f547817

1. Clearance (Marker) Lamps 5. Headlamp, Low Beam

2. Identification Lamps 6. Headlamp, High Beam
3. Turn Signal 7. Side Marker Lamp
4. DRL/Accent Lamps 8. Stop Lamps (Tail Lights), Turn Signals, Back-Up Lamp
Fig. 18.5, Exterior Lights

If neither are available, manually check the

operation of all exterior lamps. 2 1
3
NOTE: Lamps added post-production, such as
by a body builder, may or may not be
incorporated in the light test groups. Manually
check exterior lamps not included in the self-
test.
11. To check the exterior lamps using the key fob
lamp check button or the dash LIGHT TEST
switch:
11.1 Make sure the parking brake is set.
NOTE: Vehicle factory settings will have
groups of lamps activate sequentially up to
100 times or until manually stopped.
10/23/2019 f546880a
1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Lamp Check

Fig. 18.6, Key Fob

18.6
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

12.3 Activate the high-beam headlamps and

hazard warning lamps.
12.4 Exit the cab and check that all exterior
lamps and reflectors are clean and intact.
12.5 Check that the brake lamps, tail lamps,
headlamps, turn signals, marker lamps,
LIGHT identification lamps, and clearance lamps
TEST
are working properly.
05/09/2022 f611436
WARNING
Fig. 18.7, Pretrip Light Test Switch
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
11.2 Press either the LIGHT TEST switch or a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
lamp check button to begin the pre-trip seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
light inspection. If equipped, groups of buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
lamps will cycle on and off in the following accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
sequence: the entire vehicle seat belt system must be
replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not
• Group 1: Always ON: marker lamps,
attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
clearance lamps, tail lamps, licence
could change the effectiveness of the system.
plate lamp
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
• Group 2: Low beam headlamps making any modifications to the system, may
result in personal injury or death.
• Group 3: High beam headlamps and
stop lamps 13. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
• Group 4: Backup lamps and daytime 13.1 Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme
running lamps dirt and dust, or for severe fading from
exposure to sunlight, especially near the
• Group 5: Front and rear fog lamps
buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide
• Group 6: Turn signals and utility area.
lamps 13.2 Check operation of the buckle, latch, web
NOTE: LED accent lighting turns off when retractor, and upper seat belt mount on
the high beam headlamps turn on. the door pillar. Check all visible
components for wear or damage.
11.3 Walk around the truck and check that the
lamps are working properly. 13.3 Check the seat belt and tether belt
connection points and tighten any that are
11.4 Verify that all exterior lights and reflectors loose.
are clean and intact.
14. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as
11.5 The pretrip light inspection can be stopped necessary.
by:
15. Test the service brakes.
• releasing the parking brake;
15.1 With the key ON and air system fully
• pressing either the lamp check charged, set the parking brake.
button on the key fob or the LIGHT
TEST switch on the dash. 15.2 Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and
gently attempt to move it forward. The
12. To check exterior lamps manually: vehicle should not move.
12.1 Turn the keyswitch to the ON or ACC ON If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes
position. are not operating correctly and must be
repaired before the vehicle is operated.
12.2 Make certain the parking brake is set.
16. Test the backup beep.

18.7
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

16.1 Release the parking brake.

16.2 Move the vehicle slightly backward to
ensure that the backup beep is audible.
17. Press the ’Test’ button on the combustible gas
detection system control panel.
The system will illuminate the ’Trace Gas,’
’Significant,’ and all other sensor LEDs, and 2
sound the piezo buzzer. Watch to see that all
lights illuminate or flash and listen to verify the
buzzer alarm goes off.
If the self-diagnostic test fails, have the gas
detection system repaired before putting the
vehicle into service.

Weekly Post-Trip Inspections 1

and Maintenance
Front Box Inspection
WARNING
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous.
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s
recommended safety precautions.
10/04/2021 f820442a
1. Open the hood. 1. Washer Fluid Filler Cap
2. Battery Cable Access (BCA) Box
2. Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level.
The reservoir is located near the right-hand Fig. 18.8, Windshield Washer Reservoir
frame rail. See Fig. 18.8.
5.2 Check the steering gear mounting bolts for
3. Inspect water evacuation components. signs of looseness.
3.1 Inspect the rain tray installed at the base 5.3 Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and
of the windshield. Ensure that the seal on end yokes for excessive looseness or
the forward edge of the rain tray is in other damage.
good condition.
6. Close the hood.
3.2 Inspect the drain hoses installed on the
rain tray. Both hoses should be securely
attached to the rain tray and direct water Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
down the aft side of the front fenders. and Maintenance
4. Inspect the air vent hoses and verify the red
caps are in place. Brake Component Inspection
5. Inspect the steering components. Walk around the vehicle and inspect brake system
components for visible damage.
5.1 Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the
drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with a
spots or rust tracks). brake check valve on the dash, which allows the
driver to set the service brakes and exit the
vehicle to check the brake system for leaks. The

18.8
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

parking brakes must be applied before the

brake check valve will function. NOTICE
1. Inspect all visible brake system components for If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
rust tracks. compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
NOTICE brake system, which could adversely affect
braking.
If the external breather tube or breather cap is 1. On vehicles without automatic drain valves, drain
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and the brake system air reservoirs.
debris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt IMPORTANT: Aerodynamic components
and debris can cause the internal parts of the decrease drag force as a vehicle moves,
chamber to deteriorate faster. thereby improving fuel efficiency. If replacement
2. Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers of an aerodynamic component is necessary,
for damage. Make sure that breather holes are replacement components must meet or exceed
open and free of debris. the drag reduction performance of the originally
installed component in order to maintain
NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of compliance with greenhouse gas and fuel
anything likely to be stepped on. efficiency regulations.
3. Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks, 2. Inspect the following aerodynamic components, if
twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near equipped, for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
moving parts.
• Roof fairing/deflector
4. Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of
abrasion. • Side skirts
5. Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated • Cab extenders
brake linings and brake drums (or rotors).
6. Check the thickness of the brake linings.
Front Box Inspection and Adjustments
Replace brake linings on all brake assemblies on IMPORTANT: If replacement of the hood or
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than bumper is necessary, the replacement
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest component must meet or exceed the drag
point. reduction performance of the originally installed
item in order to maintain compliance with
eAxle Inspection greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency regulations.
1. Check and inspect the rear pads.
NOTE: Anytime a hood is adjusted, removed, or
2. Check and inspect the mounting brackets for reinstalled, the headlamp aim should be
loose bolts. checked.
Mid-Frame Area Inspection 1. Inspect the bumper and hood for structural
damage, cracks, or wear.
WARNING 2. Open the hood.
Inspect the radiators and heater hoses, including
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into the clamps and support brackets.
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
could cause injury. insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiators as often
as every 200 miles (320 km).

18.9
 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance

2.1 Inspect the battery radiator for damage 4.1 Turn the key to the ON position. With the
and accumulated debris. Straighten bent front tires straight ahead, turn the steering
or damaged fins to permit airflow across wheel until motion is observed at the front
all areas of the cores. wheels.
2.2 Inspect the vehicle radiator for damage 4.2 Align a reference mark on the steering
and accumulated debris. Straighten bent wheel to a rule, then slowly turn the
or damaged fins to permit airflow across steering wheel in the opposite direction
all areas of the cores. until motion is again detected at the
wheels.
2.3 Make sure the inlet and outlet hoses on
the radiators are pliable and are not 4.3 Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of
cracking or ballooning. the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/4
2.4 Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
inches (57 mm) with an 18 inch (450 mm)
and are not cracking or ballooning.
steering wheel.
2.5 Tighten hose clamps as necessary. 4.4 If there is excessive lash, check the
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose steering system for wear or incorrect
clamps, as hose life can be adversely adjustment before operating the vehicle.
affected.
2.6 Ensure hose support brackets are
securely fastened. Make sure hoses are
not located near sources of wear,
abrasion, or high heat.
IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install
service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contact your Freightliner dealer.
3. Inspect the low-voltage batteries.

WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible
personal injury, always wash your hands after
handling battery parts and related accessories.
3.1 Remove the battery box cover and inspect
all visible battery cables for loose wiring or
damage.
3.2 Check that the battery hold-down is
secure.
3.3 Install the battery box cover
3.4 Close the hood.
4. Check the steering wheel for excessive play.

18.10
 19
In An Emergency
Shutting Down the High-Voltage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Crash Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Activating the Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Optional Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
In Case of an Under-Inflated or Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
Jump Starting an eCascadia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4
Lifting and Lowering the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.8
Combustible Gas Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.9
In Case of a High-Voltage Battery Thermal Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.16
In Case of Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.17
Dealing With a Submerged Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.17
Emergency Responder Cable Cut Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.18
In An Emergency

Shutting Down the High- Activating the Hazard Warning

Voltage System Lights
In case of fire, submersion, accident, or other The hazard warning light switch is located on the
emergency, shut down the high-voltage system. dash as shown in Fig. 19.2.
To shut down the high-voltage system, press the red
Emergency High-Voltage Disconnect, or eStop,
button on the dash, shown in Fig. 19.1.

1 09/27/2021 f547634
1. Hazard Warning Lights Switch
2. Emergency High-Voltage Disconnect Button
04/29/2022 f612075
Fig. 19.2, Emergency Switches on the eCascadia Dash
2. eStop Button
The hazard warning lights can be activated
Fig. 19.1, Emergency High-Voltage Disconnect Button regardless of the key position.
Pressing the red button immediately disables the To activate the hazard lights, push the center of the
high-voltage system by stopping the flow of power to triangular switch. All the turn signal lights on the
and from the high-voltage batteries. vehicle and trailer, as well as the turn signal
indicators in the ICU flash simultaneously when the
Affixing a lock through the yellow switch guard stops hazard lights are activated.
the red button from popping out.
Push the switch again to turn the hazard lights off.
To release the button and resume the flow of power,
remove any attached lock and spin the button to
either the left or right. Optional Emergency
Equipment
Crash Detection
Optional emergency equipment that can be ordered
The crash detection feature monitors the vehicle for with the vehicle includes:
horizontal accelerations and rollover angles that
• a fire extinguisher
would happen during a crash and that have a
potential to injure the driver or cause damage to the • a first aid kit
high-voltage components.
• triangular reflectors
When these movements are detected, the crash
detection feature shuts down the high-voltage system • road flares
and, if equipped, deploys the SRS air bag. If ordered, optional emergency equipment will be
located in the cab, usually near the driver’s seat. It is
recommended that the driver store emergency
equipment within easy reach.

19.1
 In An Emergency

Amber status indicates a condition that may result in

WARNING damage to the vehicle. Driving with under-inflated
tires may permanently damage the tires and
Use extreme care when placing road flares in increases the likelihood of tire failure.
emergency situations that involve exposure to
flammable substances. A fire could occur Pull off the road to a safe location as soon as
causing serious personal injury. possible if any tire displays as amber or red. Avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking.
If there is an emergency while driving:
If the TPMS issues a warning when all tires are
• Quickly and safely pull off the road. properly inflated, have the vehicle checked at an
• Turn on the hazard warning lights. authorized Freightliner facility.
• Place reflectors or road flares along the side of Repair a flat tire as soon as possible.
the road to alert other drivers that an
emergency situation exists. Jump Starting an eCascadia
In Case of an Under-Inflated or WARNING
Flat Tire Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
The eCascadia is equipped with a tire pressure when working around batteries. Put out all flames
monitoring system (TPMS) which monitors tire and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
pressure and temperature. For full information on the in the vicinity of the battery.
TPMS, see Chapter 3: Instruments. The TPMS can
Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. Do
be accessed on the infotainment panel in the vehicle.
not lean over the batteries when making
The TPMS shows the tire pressure in pounds per connections. Keep all other persons away from
square inch (psi) or bar units and color codes this the batteries.
information to communicate its severity level. See
Failure to follow these precautions could lead to
Fig. 19.3.

10/29/2021 f611974
1. Red Status Underinflated Tire 2. Amber Status Underinflated Tire 3. Units of Measurement
Fig. 19.3, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Tire Pressure - ICC5

Red status indicates that the tire pressure poses a severe personal injury as a result of an explosion
threat to the control of the vehicle. or acid burns.

19.2
In An Emergency

NOTICE
The eCascadia contains two low-voltage
systems: 24V and 12V. These directions detail the
steps to charge or ’jump start’ the 12V batteries. 1
On an eCascadia, the 12V batteries must be
operational for the high-voltage batteries to
activate.
To jump start another vehicle from an eCascadia,
both the 12V and the high-voltage (HV) batteries
on the eCascadia must be active. An active high-
voltage system is necessary to keep the low-
voltage (12V) charge at a sufficient level to
provide the ’jump.’
To jump start another vehicle from an eCascadia,
follow the directions below, switching out the
other vehicle for ’the eCascadia’ and ’the
eCascadia’ for the ’the power source.’
Only use jumper cables approved for use with
heavy duty vehicles. The use of inadequate or
damaged jumper cables may damage both
vehicles.
2
Do not connect an eCascadia to a vehicle with a
different operating voltage. Electronic devices on
both vehicles can be damaged if vehicles with
different operating voltages are connected.
11/18/2021 f547684
NOTE: eCascadia vehicles are equipped with 1. Positive Post 2. Negative Post
under-hood jump start posts; always connect to
these posts instead of the batteries. Fig. 19.4, Positive and Negative Posts on the EVDM

When using jumper cables, follow the instructions 4. Connect the other end of the 12V positive (+)
below. jumper cable to the 12V positive (+) connection
1. on the power source providing the jump start.
Apply the parking brakes and turn off the lights
and all other electrical devices. The power source may be a battery, external
battery charger, or the jump start post of a
2. Open the hood. vehicle.

NOTICE WARNING
Always connect the battery, jumper cables, and Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
charger correctly (positive-to-positive, negative- allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
to-negative). Connecting a charging device clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
backwards (positive-to-negative or negative-to- could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
positive) will damage the vehicle. severe personal injury from explosion or acid
3. Connect one end of a 12V positive (+) jumper burns.
cable to the 12V positive (+) post on the electric 5. Connect one end of the negative (-) jumper cable
vehicle distribution module (EVDM) as shown in to the negative (-) connection on the power
Fig. 19.4. source providing the jump start.

19.3
 In An Emergency

The power source may be a battery, external towing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be
battery charger, or the jump start post of a inadequate, which could result in personal injury
vehicle. or death.
6. Connect (ground) the other end of the (-) jumper
cable to the negative (-) jump start post on the WARNING
eCascadia as shown in Fig. 19.4.
Before towing an eCascadia all rear axle shafts
7. Start the power source providing the jump start. must be removed. Failure to remove the axle
This could mean starting the engine of the shafts will result in damage to the axle/vehicle,
vehicle providing the jump start or turning on an and the driven electric motors may cause
12V external battery charger. induction currents and thus pose an electrical
Let the power source run a few minutes to hazard.
charge the batteries of the vehicle being jump If the vehicle is in a location where the drive
started. shafts cannot be removed, the vehicle being
8. On the vehicle being jump started, turn the key rescued may only be towed out of the danger
to the “start” position. zone for a short distance and at a walking pace.
Where possible, the ignition should be switched
9. Once the high-voltage system is enabled, on and the neutral gear should be engaged. Once
continue to allow the eCascadia to charge until the vehicle is out of the danger zone, the drive
all ICU low-voltage warnings turn off. shafts must be removed.

WARNING Use of Tow Loops

Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not Tow loops are not designed for on-road towing; they
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the should be used to recover and move the vehicle to a
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark position where it can be hooked up properly for front
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in towing.
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns. NOTICE
10. Disconnect the negative (-) (grounded) jumper When using tow loops to move the vehicle, do
cable from the negative post on the vehicle that not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
needed the jump start. See Fig. 19.4. from one loop to another. Known as reeving, this
11. Disconnect the other end of the negative (-) practice is not permissible in most industrial
jumper cable from the power source that applications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
provided the jump start. overload the loops and result in damage to the
vehicle. See Fig. 19.5.
12. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) power source that provided the jump Front Towing Hookup With
start.
Removable Tow Loops
13. Disconnect the other end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the 12V positive (+) post on 1. Press the eStop button on the dash and secure it
the EVDM of the eCascadia. See Fig. 19.4. with a lock.
14. Close the hood.
DANGER
Towing the Vehicle When working on the vehicle, engage the parking
brake, shut down the electrical system, and
WARNING chock the tires.
Before working under the vehicle, always place
Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the

19.4
In An Emergency

3. Install the tow loops onto the tow loop receivers

through the tow loop holes in the bumper. Pull
the tow loops to ensure they are securely
engaged in the tow loop receivers.

IMPORTANT: Do not reeve when towing.

1. Tow Loop 2. Chain

Fig. 19.5, Reeving 06/02/2022 f130146a

steps could result in serious personal injury or Fig. 19.6, Tow Loops
death.
4. Lower the stinger assembly so that it is level and
2. Open the hood. Remove the tow loops, located approximately 1 inch (0.3 cm) off the ground.
behind the driver’s-side bumper. See Fig. 19.6. Back the tow truck so that the crossbar with lift
Close and latch the hood. adaptors is within 6 inches (15 cm) of the
aerodynamic bumper. See Fig. 19.7.
NOTICE
New or ungreased tow loops may be hard to
NOTICE
install. Tow loops that are not properly installed When using tow loops to move the vehicle, do
may be damaged or break. not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one loop to another. Known as reeving, this

19.5
 In An Emergency

06/07/2022 f130149 06/14/2017 f130151

Fig. 19.7, Positioning the Stinger Assembly Fig. 19.9, Moving the Stinger and Crossbar Under the
Bumper
practice is not permissible in most industrial
applications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
overload the loops and result in damage to the WARNING
vehicle. See Fig. 19.5.
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
5. Pull the tow cables out of the tow truck and truck’s air brake system before releasing the
connect the tow cable lifting hooks onto the tow spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
loops, then extend the recovery boom within 4 to vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause
6 inches (10 to 15 cm) of being vertical of the property damage or personal injury.
tow loops. See Fig. 19.8.
7. Chock the rear tires.
6. Lift the front of the truck until there is enough
clearance for the stinger and crossbar to pass
under the bumper. See Fig. 19.9.
WARNING
If enough clearance cannot be gained with a Before towing an eCascadia all rear axle shafts
single lift, jack stands or other means capable of must be removed. Failure to remove the axle
supporting the weight on the front axle must be shafts will result in damage to the axle/vehicle,
used while the cables are shortened to allow a and the driven electric motors may cause
second lift. induction currents and thus pose an electrical
hazard.
If the vehicle is in a location where the drive
shafts cannot be removed, the vehicle being
rescued may only be towed out of the danger
zone for a short distance and at a walking pace.
Where possible, the ignition should be switched
on and the neutral gear should be engaged. Once
the vehicle is out of the danger zone, the drive
shafts must be removed.
8. Remove all rear axle shafts.
For any axle shaft that has been removed, cover
06/14/2017 f130150
the ends of the hubs with metal plates or
plywood cut to fit the axle opening and drilled to
Fig. 19.8, Tow Cables Connected to the Tow Loops fit the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant
from leaking out and will keep contaminants from
getting into and damaging the wheel bearings
and axle lubricant.

19.6
In An Emergency

9. Use mid-rise or high-rise forks, or lift adaptors

(part number 0200020) on the crossbar to
provide clearance for the aerodynamic bumper.
See Fig. 19.10 and Fig. 19.11.

06/14/2017 f130154

Fig. 19.12, Positioning the Stinger with Lift Adaptors

Under the Axle

06/14/2017 f130152

Fig. 19.10, Lift Adaptors Installed on the Crossbar

06/14/2017 f130155

Fig. 19.13, Stinger with Lift Adaptors Under the Axle

(tow truck shown)
06/14/2017 f130153

Fig. 19.11, Backing the Tow Truck with Lift Adaptors on

the Crossbar

10. Extend the stinger and place the lift adaptors

under the axle. Make certain the lift adaptors are
under the front suspension springs between the
U-bolts. See Fig. 19.12 and Fig. 19.13.

WARNING
Failure to protect high-voltage (HV) cables from
06/07/2022 f130156
towing chains could cause property damage,
severe personal injury, or death.
Fig. 19.14, Retracting the Recovery Boom
11. Secure the vehicle axle to the tow truck crossbar
with a chain or ratchet strap. 14. Connect the air and electrical supply lines from
the tow truck to the truck being towed.
12. Remove the tow cables from the tow loops and
retract the recovery boom. See Fig. 19.14. IMPORTANT: On trucks equipped with a front
air suspension, either air pressure must be
13. Remove the tow loops from the bumper.
supplied to the secondary air system or the front

19.7
 In An Emergency

suspension must be blocked to operating height Lifting and Lowering the

with wooden spacers and the axle chained to
the frame to prevent damage to the truck. Vehicle
15. Release the park brake and remove the chocks Raising a Vehicle with Air Suspension
from the rear tires.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, set the
16. Use the stinger to pull the truck close to the back parking brakes, and shut down the vehicle.
of the tow truck for final towing position. See Chock the tires.
Fig. 19.15.
WARNING
Remove the air from the suspension. Failure to
remove the air from the suspension may cause
the vehicle to move or shift on the jack stands as
air pressure drains from the system; this could
cause the vehicle to fall, resulting in damage to
the vehicle, serious injury, or death.
2. Exhaust all air from the air suspension.

WARNING
06/14/2017 f130157
Do not use bottle jacks to raise the vehicle.
Fig. 19.15, Final Towing Position Always use floor jacks.
Bottle jacks can slip, allowing the vehicle to fall,
17. Connect the safety chains. See Fig. 19.16. which could result in damage to the vehicle,
serious injury, or death.

NOTICE
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of
the suspension components; doing so could
cause suspension component damage. Jack
stands can be placed at any point below the axle,
including the differential area.
Do not lift the vehicle from the batteries, eCarrier,
or frontbox. See Fig. 19.17 for an illustration of
no lift areas.
06/14/2017 f130158
IMPORTANT: Only lift unloaded vehicles and
Fig. 19.16, Safety Chains Connected on the Towed vehicles disconnected from trailers.
Vehicle
3. Place a floor jack under the axle housing, the
Rear Towing clamp group, or the frame rail.
Rear towing is not an option for the eCascadia.
NOTICE
The deck plates which protect the batteries interfere
with tying down the cab; if not tied down, wind lifts 4. Raise the vehicle. Add additional jack stands
the cab during rear towing and damages the air under the axles as needed to support the
springs and other components. vehicle.
In addition, rear towing can damage the aerodynamic
front bumper.

19.8
In An Emergency

10/19/2021 f311392

Fig. 19.17, No Lift Areas of an eCascadia

Lowering a Vehicle with Air The gas detection system must be wired directly
Suspension into the 12V batteries so that it can only be
powered off by disconnecting the 12V batteries.
WARNING When servicing the vehicle, disconnect the 12V
batteries only when necessary and do not leave
Do not use bottle jacks to raise the vehicle. them disconnected for extended periods of time.
Always use floor jacks.
A USA Pro Shoreline multizone combustible gas
Bottle jacks can slip, allowing the vehicle to fall, detection system is standard equipment on an
which could result in damage to the vehicle, eCascadia. The system is designed to give early
serious injury, or death. warning of a high-voltage battery thermal event. It
does this through detecting hydrocarbon gas levels
NOTICE — methane, propane, butane, hydrogen, methanol,
ethanol, diesel fuel, gasoline — and warning about
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of these gas levels before they reach their lower
the suspension components; doing so could explosive limit (LEL).
cause suspension component damage. The LEL is the smallest amount of the gas that
Jack stands can be placed at any point below the supports a flame when mixed with oxygen and
axle, including the differential area. ignited. Zero percent (0%) LEL indicates a gas-free
atmosphere. One hundred percent (100%) LEL
1. Using a floor jack, raise the vehicle to remove indicates that the air concentration for that gas has
any jack stands used to support the vehicle. reached its lower explosive limit.
2. Slowly lower the vehicle to the ground. The system consists of two external sensors and a
3. Inflate the air suspension, and check for proper control panel.
operation. Refer to Group 32 of the eCascadia The sensors are located under the deck plates at the
Workshop Manual for instructions. midpoint of the high-voltage batteries as shown in
Fig. 19.18. This places them where rising gas vapors
Combustible Gas Detection from the high-voltage batteries pass by or
accumulate.
System
Two labels on the control panel highlight important
IMPORTANT: The gas detection system must be information about the combustible gas detection
powered at all times.

19.9
 In An Emergency

11/19/2021 f547629b
1. Right-Hand Zone 2 Sensor 2. Left-Hand Zone 1 Sensor
Fig. 19.18, Gas Detection System Sensors

system. The combustible gas status label shown in

Fig. 19.19 serves as a reminder to what the warning
light colors represent. The warning label shown in
Fig. 19.20 outlines what to do if the buzzer sounds
and the lower red indicator illuminates.
The control panel is mounted in the front overhead
panel of the cab as shown in Fig. 19.21.

08/03/2022 f612049
11/18/2021 f080387
Fig. 19.19, Combustible Gas Status Label
Fig. 19.20, Control Panel Warning Label
WARNING ’Significant’ LED illuminates. Apply the park
brake, turn off the ignition, and get clear of the
Immediately bring the vehicle to a safe stop when
vehicle.
the buzzer alarm sounds and the lower red

19.10
In An Emergency

If possible, hit the eStop button the dash prior to It is good practice to verify the system LED is green
exiting the cab. before entering the vehicle. Though the panel is
designed to be read when sitting inside the cab, the
Move a safe distance from the vehicle, fifty to green light can clearly be seen through the back
one hundred feet if possible, and upwind of any windows of the cab. It is also visible when standing
smoke. Call emergency services. next to the B-pillar and looking up through the side
If possible, set out reflectors or flares to keep windows.
other people and vehicles at a safe distance and
to guide them around the vehicle. Trace Gas Levels Detected

2
1

4
13
5
12
11 6

10 9 8 7
08/03/2022 f611034b
1. Combustible Gas Status Label 6. Yellow System Reset LED 10. Yellow System Fault LED
2. Warning Label 7. System Reset Switch 11 Green System Normal LED
3. Alarm Silence Switch 8. Test Switch 12. Yellow Trace Gas LED
4. Yellow Alarm Silence LED 9. Yellow Sensor Zone LED 13. Red Significant Gas LED
5. Piezo Buzzer
Fig. 19.21, USA Pro Shoreline Multizone Detection System Control Module

How the System Works A steady yellow ’Trace Gas’ LED indicates a gas
concentration greater than 20% of the LEL for that
Systems Normal gas has been detected. A sensor has to detect an
A steady green ’System Normal’ LED indicates: excess of 20% LEL for two continuous seconds
before this lamp will illuminate.
• the system is powered on,
The yellow ’Sensor Zone’ LED will flash to indicate
• all components are operating normally, what sensor is reporting the LEL levels. A single
flash indicates zone 1, the left-hand sensor, and a
• gas levels, if detected, are equal to or below
double flash indicate zone 2, the right-hand sensor.
50% the LEL.

19.11
 In An Emergency

The detection of trace gas amounts will not cause • If you observe smoke, move a safe distance
the buzzer alarm to sound. from the vehicle, fifty to one hundred feet if
possible. Avoid inhaling the smoke. When in a
If ambient gas levels return to normal, the yellow
safe location, call emergency services.
’Trace Gas’ LED will go out and the green ’Systems
Normal’ LED will illuminate. • If no smoke is observed after fifteen minutes,
enter the truck and check for high-voltage or
What To Do When Trace Gas Levels Are battery faults and warnings.
Detected If faults are active HV related fault codes that
Look in the mirrors for evidence of white smoke prevent High Voltage from energizing, contact
escaping from behind the cab or from the batteries. a supervisor. If there are HV related fault
codes, but HV is energized and truck is able to
If there is smoke: drive, follow the information displayed on the
• Pull over into a safe location as soon as instrumentation cluster or B-panel (most likely
possible. drive to nearest service center).

• Turn off the ignition, set the park brake, press If no faults are present, drive the vehicle to the
the eStop button, and exit the vehicle. nearest service center. The vehicle should not
be in operation until the problem is diagnosed
• Move a safe distance from the vehicle, fifty to and resolved.
one hundred feet if possible. Avoid inhaling the
smoke. When in a safe location, call Significant Gas Levels Detected
emergency services.
WARNING
NOTICE
Immediately bring the vehicle to a safe stop when
If possible, set out reflectors or flares to keep the buzzer alarm sounds and the lower red
other people and vehicles at a safe distance and ’Significant’ LED illuminates. Apply the park
to guide them around the vehicle. brake, turn off the ignition, press the eStop
button, and get clear of the vehicle.
If the alarm is false, do not consider the area
clear until emergency responders have declared Waiting to see if the upper red ’Significant’ LED
the area safe, all alarm indicators are OFF, and illuminates after one minute could result in
the alarm panel light illuminates green. severe personal injury or death.
If smoke or flames are coming from a high
voltage battery, trained emergency responders WARNING
should use large amounts of water to cool the
battery. Battery fires can take up to 24 hours to If outside the vehicle when the alarm buzzer
extinguish. Emergency responders should sounds, do not attempt to open or enter the cab
consider allowing the battery to burn in place. to retrieve items, turn off the ignition, or hit the
eStop button; doing so could result in severe
Do not tow a vehicle until all fires have been personal injury or death.
extinguished and the high-voltage batteries are
no longer giving off heat. After a fire, do not NOTE: The green ’Systems Normal’ light is
store a towed vehicle indoors. extinguished when the red ’Significant’ LED
illuminates. This does not indicate that the
If there is no smoke:
system has lost power or is not operating
• Pull over into a safe location normally.
• Turn off the ignition, set the park brake, and If gas concentrations increase to the 50% LEL for
exit the vehicle. that gas, and maintain or exceed that level for six
• If applicable, call a supervisor for assistance. continuous seconds, the lower red ’Significant’ LED
illuminates and the buzzer alarm activates and emits
• Observe the vehicle for fifteen minutes. a continuous alarm.

19.12
In An Emergency

If ambient gas levels return to normal, the lower red If there is no smoke:
’Significant’ LED goes out and the green ’Systems
• Pull over into a safe location
Normal’ LED illuminates.
• Turn off the ignition, set the park brake, and
If gas concentrations greater than 50% of the LEL for
exit the vehicle.
that gas persist or increase for more than one
minute, the upper red ’Significant’ LED illuminates • If applicable, call a supervisor for assistance.
and the buzzer alarm starts beeping.
• Observe the vehicle for fifteen minutes.
Once the upper ’Significant’ LED comes on and the
buzzer starts beeping, they continue to do so until • If there is smoke, move a safe distance from
the ’System Reset’ button is pressed. the vehicle, fifty to one hundred feet if possible.
Avoid inhaling the smoke. When in a safe
If the ’System Reset’ button is pressed before location, call emergency services.
ambient gas levels have dropped, the gas detection
system will restart the alarm sequence. • If there is no smoke, enter the truck and check
for high-voltage or battery faults and warnings.
What To Do When Significant Gas Levels If there are active HV related fault codes that
Are Detected prevent High Voltage from energizing, contact
a supervisor. If there are HV related fault
Look in the mirrors for evidence of white smoke codes, but HV is energized and truck is able to
escaping from behind the cab or from the batteries. drive, follow the information displayed on the
If there is smoke: instrumentation cluster or B-panel (most likely
drive to nearest service center).
• Pull over into a safe location as soon as
possible. If no faults are present, and if applicable, call a
supervisor to discuss next steps. The vehicle
• Turn off the ignition, set the park brake, press cannot be driven until the problem is
the eStop button, and exit the vehicle. diagnosed and resolved.
• Move a safe distance from the vehicle, fifty to
one hundred feet if possible. Avoid inhaling the System Faults
smoke. When in a safe location, call If a sensor has been disconnected or malfunctioned,
emergency services. the green ’System Normal’ LED goes out and the
yellow ’System Fault’ LED illuminates. The yellow
NOTICE ’Sensor Zone’ LED flashes to indicate the zone of
the malfunctioning sensor. A single flash indicates
If possible, set out reflectors or flares to keep zone 1, the left-hand sensor, and a double flash
other people and vehicles at a safe distance and indicates zone 2, the right-hand sensor. If the system
to guide them around the vehicle. fault indicates a sensor zone not on the vehicle, the
gas detection system needs to be reprogrammed.
If the alarm is false, do not consider the area
clear until emergency responders have declared If the wiring from the control panel to sensor has
the area safe, all alarm indicators are OFF, and been damaged, only the ’System Fault’ LED flashes.
the alarm panel light illuminates green. If a sensor has been disconnected, malfunctioned, or
If smoke or flames are coming from a high the control panel wiring has been damaged, have the
voltage battery, trained emergency responders vehicle serviced. Do not operate the vehicle without
should use large amounts of water to cool the a functioning gas detection system.
battery. Battery fires can take up to 24 hours to To reprogram the gas detection display:
extinguish. Emergency responders should
consider allowing the battery to burn in place. 1. Press the ’System Reset’ and ’Silence’ buttons at
the same time for at least ten seconds.
Do not tow a vehicle until all fires have been
extinguished and the high-voltage batteries are 2. Release the buttons when the alarm sounds and
no longer giving off heat. After a fire, do not the ’Systems Normal’ LED flashes. This indicates
store a towed vehicle indoors. you have entered programming mode.

19.13
 In An Emergency

3. Press the ’Silence’ button to cycle through the 5. Wait one minute. If no action is taken for one
different sensor zones. The sensor zone LED minute, the alarm sounds twice to notify
flashes to indicate the current sensor. programming is complete and normal operation
is engaged.
4. If the amber ’Trace Gas’ LED illuminates on the
current sensor zone, this means the current See Table 19.1 for the functions of all lights and
sensor zone is being monitored. Press the ’Test’ buttons on the overhead console.
button to disable/enable monitoring of the current
sensor zone.

USA Pro Shoreline Multizone Detection System Control Module

Item Display Function Action Required
Green System is on and all components
None required.
(illuminated) are operating properly.
’System Normal’ LED Ensure the batteries are connected
Detection system is not and replace any blown fuses. If the gas
Unlit
functioning. detection system is still not functioning,
immediately replace the system.
’Trace Gas’ Yellow Use caution and watch the control
Minor gas concentration detected.
Concentration LED (illuminated) panel.
Dangerous gas concentration at
or above 50% of the LEL have
been detected. Quickly bring the vehicle to a safe
Red Lower Bar stop. Apply the park brake, turn off the
(illuminated) The buzzer alarm sounds. ignition, exit the cab, and call
’Significant’ Gas emergency responders.
Concentration LEDs The green ’System Normal’ LED
goes out.
Immediately bring the vehicle to a safe
Dangerous gas concentration at
Red Upper Bar stop. Apply the park brake, turn off the
or above 50% of the LEL present
(illuminated) ignition, exit the cab, and call
for over 1 minute.
emergency responders.
Off Sensors are functioning properly. None required.
If paired with gas concentration LED,
this indicates which sensor is
’Sensor Zone’ LED Specifies sensor zone. Single registering the gas concentration.
On (flashing) flash designates zone 1. Double
flash designates zone 2. If paired with ’System Fault’ LED, this
indicates which sensor is registering as
non-operational.
Off Sensors are functioning properly. None required.
If only the ’System Fault’ LED is
flashing, verify the wiring from the
control panel to the sensor.
’System Fault’ LED A system component has
On If the ’Sensor Zone’ LED is flashing,
malfunctioned.
verify the designated sensor is
connected and operational. Replace
damaged sensors immediately.
Reset the system only after the gas
has cleared and emergency
’System Reset’ Switch — Resets the system after an alarm.
responders have declared the vehicle
safe.
Yellow Indicates the system has been
’System Reset’ Switch None required.
(illuminated) successfully reset.
LED
Off Normal condition. None required.

19.14
In An Emergency

USA Pro Shoreline Multizone Detection System Control Module

Item Display Function Action Required
Pressing the switch illuminates all
’Test’ — the control panel LEDs and Test the system daily.
transfers all I/O contacts.
’Silence’ Switch — Silences the alarm buzzer. Press to silence the alarm buzzer.
Quickly bring the vehicle to a safe
Yellow Indicates the buzzer is active but stop. Apply the park brake, turn off the
’Silence’ Switch LED (illuminated0 silenced. ignition, exit the cab, and call
emergency responders.
Off Normal condition. None required.
Table 19.1, USA Pro Shoreline AMGaDS III Plus Control Module Functions

Sensor False Positives • System Reset: press the ’System Reset’ switch
to transfer I/O contacts and turn off the yellow
alarm ’Silence’ LED.
NOTICE
Daimler Truck North America (DTNA) does not
Test the System Daily
recommend cleaning or disinfecting a vehicle
with products that contain silicone. Silicone- NOTICE
based chemicals and cleaners may disable the
sensors. Daimler Truck North America (DTNA) strongly
recommends that all operators follow California
Harsh chemicals and extremely high Code of Regulations (CCR) inspection
temperatures may damage the sensors. requirements, regardless of where the vehicle is
Puncture of or damage to the seal located inside operated. Per Title 13 CCR § 935 (2), gas
the sensor housing will significantly shorten the detection systems should be tested three times
sensor life. per calendar year at equal intervals. The testing
procedure should simulate the same operating
Periodic testing is required to verify sensor environment in which the vehicle is used.
operation.
Test results validating the performance of the gas
The sensors are sensitive to all hydrocarbon vapors. detection system within the parameters
An alarm may be triggered by cleaning products, established by the component manufacturer and
paint, polish, lacquer, gasoline, silicone, silicone NFPA 52 should be maintained as a permanent
spray, or other chemicals. The sensors may also part of the vehicle service records. Use of
detect hydrogen fumes from an overcharged 12V alcohol, propane, and other harsh liquids or
battery. gases are not acceptable methods for testing.
If the alarm buzzer goes off but it is determined that Press the ’Test’ button on the control panel daily.
the high-voltage batteries are not involved in a high- The system will proceed with a self-diagnostic test
thermal event, check for recent use of chemicals or a that will include illumination of the ’Trace Gas,’
battery charger. ’Significant,’ and all other sensor LEDs. It will also
sound the piezo buzzer. Listen to verify the buzzer
Resetting the Control Module alarm goes off and watch to see that all lights
Do not attempt to reset the system until the gas has illuminate or flash.
cleared, and, if called, emergency personnel have Test the sensors three times per calender year, after
declared the vehicle safe. any system component has been replaced, and if the
vehicle was involved in an accident or fire.
• Silence: If an alarm has been activated by
cleaning chemicals or a fault, pressing the The gas detection system sensors must be tested
’Silence’ switch will silence the alarm buzzer. regularly by a trained technician, using certified test

19.15
 In An Emergency

equipment that satisfies CCR § 935 (2) or NFPA 52 Battery fires can take up to 24 hours to
regulations. extinguish. Emergency responders should
consider allowing the battery to burn in place.
DTNA recommends the highest level of safety
validation if there are multiple validation requirements Do not tow a vehicle until all fires have been
in the state or locality where the vehicle is operated extinguished and the high-voltage batteries are
or domiciled. no longer giving off heat.
After a fire, do not store a towed vehicle indoors.
In Case of a High-Voltage
If a thermal event is detected inside a high-voltage
Battery Thermal Event battery when the vehicle is on, the following things
will happen:
The vehicle is equipped with a thermal event
detection system to spot thermal events inside the • The red high-voltage battery thermal event
high-voltage batteries. telltale, shown in Fig. 19.22, appears in the
dynamic telltale section of the driver display.
Gas detection sensors that identify external off-
gassing associated with high-voltage battery thermal • A red warning message, shown in Fig. 19.23,
events back-up this system. The gas detection appears in the center of the driver display
sensors are always active, even when the vehicle is screen.
off. For more information, see the Combustible Gas
Detection System section in this chapter.
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
systems in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop
or avoid starting the vehicle if a high-voltage thermal
event is detected.
07/29/2022 f612179

DANGER Fig. 19.22, High-Voltage Battery Thermal Event Telltale

When fire is involved, consider the entire vehicle

energized and DO NOT TOUCH any part of the
vehicle. Doing so could result in severe personal
injury or death.
Emergency responders should protect
themselves with full personal protective
equipment (PPE).

WARNING
A damaged high voltage battery can create rapid
heating of the battery cells.
If smoke is coming from a high voltage battery
assume that it is heating. Leave the area. Avoid 06/30/2022 f611989
breathing in the smoke. Breathing in the smoke
could result in severe personal injury. Fig. 19.23, Thermal Event Warning Message

The warning message must be acknowledged before

NOTICE it will close.
If smoke or flames are coming from a high The vehicle will continue to operate in the case of a
voltage battery, trained emergency responders thermal event occurring in only one battery pack.
should use large amounts of water to cool the However, the driver is strongly advised to bring the
battery. vehicle to a safe stop, apply the park brake, turn the
keyswitch to off, hit the eStop button, and exit the

19.16
In An Emergency

cab within five minutes of seeing the thermal popup

warning. A failure resulting in a thermal event in one
Dealing With a Submerged
battery pack can spread to all packs. Vehicle
If smoke or flames from the area of the batteries are
visible, do not approach the batteries for any reason. DANGER
Do not attempt to use a fire extinguisher or other
methods to put the fire out. Move a safe distance Handling a submerged vehicle without
from the vehicle, fifty to one hundred feet if possible, appropriate training and personal protective
and upwind of any smoke. Then call emergency equipment (PPE) could result in serious injury
services. and death.
A battery fire will produce a thick, dark smoke that The removal and de-energizing of a partially or
can impair visibility. If possible, set out reflectors or completely submerged vehicle should always be
flares to keep other people and vehicles at a safe handled by trained emergency responders
distance and to guide them around the vehicle. outfitted with the required PPE.

In Case of Fire in the Cab WARNING

Do not disable the high-voltage system by
DANGER cutting through an emergency responder cable
cut point if the cable is submerged.
When fire is involved, consider the entire vehicle
energized and DO NOT TOUCH any part of the Submersion in water (especially salt water) can
vehicle. Doing so could result in severe personal damage low and high voltage components.
injury or death. Cutting a submerged cable can result in an
electrical short and subsequent fire once the
Emergency responders should protect vehicle is no longer submerged. This could
themselves with full personal protective cause serious injury or death
equipment (PPE).
WARNING
WARNING
Damaged high voltage batteries can produce
Do not allow flames, sparks, or any other heat flammable gas and fire which can lead to serious
sources (such as cigarettes or light bulbs) to injury or death.
contact materials in the cab. Any materials in the
cab in contact with these heat sources could Vent the passenger compartment once the
cause serious personal injury or vehicle damage. vehicle out of the water.
Do not store a recovered vehicle indoors.
NOTICE The high voltage system of the eCascadia is isolated
After a fire, do not store a recovered electric from the chassis. When undamaged, the system will
vehicle indoors. not energize the surrounding water, even when fully
submerged.
When a fire in the cab is detected, quickly bring the
vehicle to a safe stop, apply the park brake, and turn If in the vehicle when it is submerged, exit the
off the vehicle. If possible, hit the eStop button on vehicle if it can be done safely. To minimize risk,
the dash prior to exiting the cab. avoid contact with a submerged high voltage system
and batteries. If possible, hit the eStop button on the
According to data from the National Highway Traffic dash prior to exiting.
Safety Administration, the incidence of fire in heavy-
and medium-duty trucks is rare. In addition, Federal When in a safe location, immediately contact
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard #302 limits the emergency services.
flammability of specified materials used inside the Emergency responders will check for damage and,
cab. However, most materials can burn. after removing the vehicle from the water, disable the
high-voltage system.

19.17
 In An Emergency

Emergency Responder Cable

Cut Point
If first responders are unable to access the eStop
button on the dash, the high-voltage system can be
disabled by cutting through one of the two cable cut
points.
A cable cut point is located below and toward the
back of each cab door; a right-hand cable cut point is
shown in Fig. 19.24. Each cable cut point is marked
with a yellow first responder cable cut tag decorated
with cable cutters and a fire helmet.

10/04/2021 f547652
1. Bottom of Right-Hand Cab Door
2. First Responder Cable Cut Point

Fig. 19.24, Emergency Responder Cable Cut Point

19.18
 20
Emissions Information
Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Greenhouse Gas Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Emissions Information

Noise Emissions
Every eCascadia is equipped with an acoustic
vehicle alerting system (AVAS). The AVAS makes the
minimum noise possible to alert pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other non-motorized road users of the
presence and approach of the vehicle.
Each vehicle is equipped with two AVAS speakers.
One is located at the front of the vehicle as shown in
Fig. 20.1 and the other is attached on the inside rear
of the right-hand frame rail. Fig. 20.2 shows the
location on a 6x4 vehicle with a fifth wheel.

09/15/2021 f121054

Fig. 20.2, General Location of Rear AVAS Speaker

been ordered with a backup alarm, this beep will

sound like an electric alarm clock. If the vehicle is
ordered with no backup alarm, the reverse beep alert
will sound like someone regularly striking a high-
pitched key on a piano. The back-up volume is set
by the factory and cannot be changed; vehicle speed
does not affect the back-up sound volume.
Any deactivation of AVAS imperils the safety of other
road users and is strongly discouraged.
09/15/2021 f121055

Fig. 20.1, Location of Front AVAS Speaker Greenhouse Gas Emissions

Each vehicle has a defined AVAS sound, built upon Model year 2013 and later vehicles must meet
the vehicle noise profile, which cannot be adapted to requirements as specified by EPA10, GHG14,
personal preferences. GHG17 and GHG21 regulations. See Table 1.1 and
Table 1.2 in Chapter 1 for additional information on
The AVAS generates noise when the key is in the what EPA and GHG regulations apply to different
ON position and the park brake is released. While eCascadia model years.
driving or when the vehicle is in neutral, sound is
broadcast through the front speaker. When the Model year 2013 and later vehicles are equipped
vehicle is in reverse, sound is broadcast through the with components that increase energy efficiency such
rear speaker. as low-rolling resistance tires, vehicle speed limiters,
and aerodynamic devices such as the hood, cab side
When speeding up, the volume of the AVAS sound extenders, and chassis side fairings.
increases until maximum volume is reached at about
19 mph (30 km/h). This volume is maintained until It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter
approximately 60 mph (97 km/h) at which point it components that would bring the vehicle out of
turns off. It turns on again when the vehicle slows compliance with certification requirements [Ref: 42
down to around 20 mph (32 km/h). U.S.C. S7522(a) (3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility
to maintain the vehicle so that it conforms to all EPA
The rear speaker will broadcast a beeping sound regulations.
when the vehicle is in reverse. If the vehicle has

20.1
 21
Telematics Information
Telematics Information and Terms of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Telematics Information

Telematics Information and optimize the performance, use, reliability and

safe operation of your vehicle. These services
Terms of Use are enabled by the telematics information we
receive from your vehicle and will likely be
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or more made more effective in the future by the use of
devices that gather certain information (listed below) that telematics information and similar
about the vehicle and the environment in which it is information we receive from other DTNA
operating. These devices may periodically send this vehicles.
information (’telematic information’) to Daimler Truck
North America LLC (DTNA). Additionally DTNA and • To make your vehicle safer and to improve
its dealers may manually retrieve ’telematics its performance. Depending on the type of
information’ from devices on the vehicle for the devices installed on your vehicle, DTNA may
purposes described below. periodically update your vehicle’s on-board
software to improve the performance and safe
Telematics Information We Collect use of the vehicle. We may need to obtain
certain telematics information to ensure the
and Why We Collect it effectiveness of these updates.
The ’telematics information’ we collect may • To monitor and manage the health and
include, but is not limited to, the following efficiency of your vehicle. Telematics
information about the vehicle: information from your vehicle may be used by
• performance DTNA and its affiliates, dealers, and service
providers to more effectively diagnose and
• operation resolve problems with your vehicle and to help
• location you maintain it.
• speed • To improve your customer service
experience. Telematics information may be
• trips used by DTNA and its affiliates, dealers, and
• travel history service providers to provide you a more
efficient and effective customer service
• stop and idle times experience in conjunction with vehicle service,
• fuel consumption maintenance, field service campaigns and
recalls.
• fault codes
• For product development and product
• diagnostic information improvement. Telematics information may be
analyzed and used to identify and resolve
• steering performance
performance and safety issues and to develop
• braking performance improvements to our products that will benefit
you and our future customers.
• air bag deployment
• To develop more meaningful product
• seatbelt use marketing. Telematics information may be
• decelerations used to provide more customized and
meaningful information to our customers
• other information relating to the performance, regarding products and services that best
operation, health and safety of the vehicle. satisfy their operational requirements and
DTNA gathers this information to improve the improve the performance of their businesses.
performance, operation, health and safety of your • To help match our customers with the right
vehicle and other DTNA vehicles and products. products. Telematics information may be used
Information is gathered: to develop future products and services that
• To enable your subscription services. DTNA best satisfy the operational requirements of our
and other third party service providers have customers.
developed a variety of applications and
services that are now available to you to

21.1
 Telematics Information

What We Do With Telematics unauthorized use, access, disclosure, distribution,

loss, or alteration.
Information and Who We Share it
With Your Consent
DTNA may use telematics information for any By continuing to provide to us, or allowing us to
purpose allowed by law, including but not limited to receive or retrieve, telematics information through the
using the information for any of the purposes devices on your vehicle, you consent to its collection
described in this chapter. DTNA may share and use as described in this chapter.
telematics information with its service providers,
Although some information may be transferred to and
affiliates, subsidiaries, dealers, and distributors, but
only for lawful business purposes. This may include processed in countries without laws providing the
same level of data protection as your country, our
third parties who process information on behalf of
DTNA, third parties who you authorize directly to use and disclosure of your information is subject to
these terms of use regardless of where your
receive information from us, and law enforcement
information is transferred.
agencies pursuant to applicable law.
If you have subscribed to a subscription service
DTNA may also combine telematics information it
obtains from your vehicle with data from others, such as Virtual Technician or Detroit Analytics,
the Telematics Terms and Conditions for that
anonymize and de-identify that aggregated data, and
use and disclose that aggregated data and service will apply to DTNA’s collection, storage,
use, and sharing of the data covered by those
derivatives of it indefinitely and for any purpose
whatsoever, including sharing it with third parties for Telematics Terms and Conditions.
any purpose without restriction. DTNA will be the
exclusive owner of all rights, title and interests in and Your Rights
to all aggregated data. You will not have any rights in You may ask DTNA to discontinue receiving and
any aggregated data or any derivatives or proceeds retrieving telematics information from the devices on
of it. DTNA shall not have any obligation to provide your vehicle. If you do so, you will be unable to
any aggregated data to you or to compensate you for receive telematics subscription services relating to
any use or disclosure of any aggregated data. your vehicle and remotely receive important vehicle
software updates, among other things. If you are
Collection Method interested in that option, please contact DTNA at:
The telematics information may be transmitted [email protected].
automatically or manually from the devices on your
vehicle to DTNA or Detroit Diesel Corporation (DDC) Privacy Statement Changes
through diagnostic tools, including but not limited to DTNA reserves the right to amend these terms of
DDC DiagnosticLink. use from time to time. Changes will be reflected in
the online version of this document, which can also
Safeguards be found at: https://dtnacontent-
dtna.prd.freightliner.com/content/dtna-servicelit/
DTNA will use reasonable data security systems and
search/home-page.html. By continuing to provide
procedures in an effort to protect telematics
to us, or allowing us to receive or retrieve,
information from unauthorized use, access,
Telematics Information through the devices on
disclosure, distribution, loss or alteration. We do this
your vehicle, you consent to and accept those
through physical, electronic and procedural
changes.
safeguards that are designed to protect the
confidentiality, integrity and availability of telematics NOTE: These terms of use do not apply to
information. However, no security system is perfect. aftermarket telematics devices that may be
DTNA cannot guarantee that telematics information provided by others or configured to send
will not be hacked, deleted, intercepted, or altered. information to someone other than DTNA or its
DTNA will also require other parties to whom affiliates, dealers or service providers.
telematics information is disclosed to take reasonable
steps to protect the telematics information from

21.2
Telematics Information

Frequency Bands and

Maximum Transmission Output
Wireless Applications on the Vehicle
Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output
Component Service Frequency Band Transmission Output
LTE FDD Band 2
LTE FDD Band 4
4G
LTE FDD Band 5 0.25 W (Power Class 3)
LTE
LTE FDD Band 7
LTE FDD Band 17
UMTS Band 1
UMTS Band 2
3G
UMTS Band 4 0.25 W (Power Class 3)
CTP2019DTNA UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA
UMTS Band 5
UMTS Band 8
GSM 850 MHz
2 W (Power Class 4)
E-GSM 900 MHz
2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE
DCS 1800 MHz
1 W (Power Class 1)
PCS 1900 MHz
WLAN (IEEE 802.11b) 2.4 GHz band 20 mW
WLAN (IEEE 802.11g/n) 2.4 GHz band 20 mW
Bluetooth 2.4 GHz band 10 mW
GPS / GLONASS 1575 and 1602 MHz Receive only
Table 21.1, Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output

The Common Telematics Platform

The Detroit Connect Platform is the connectivity
module of Daimler Trucks North America. It receives
and transmits data in real time and is the interface
for all connectivity-related services. Both the Detroit
Connect Platform and a valid agreement is required
for use of the Detroit Connect services.
Vehicle antennas (WLAN/BT/CellularNetworks) are
located inside and behind the dashboard on the
passenger side. In both locations, the shortest
possible distance between the antennas and any
human or animal body part inside the vehicle cabin is
greater than 8 in (20 cm).
Therefore Daimler Trucks North America LLC
declares that the radio equipment type
CTP2019DTNA is in compliance with Directive 2014/
53/EU.

21.3
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

A Daily Pre-Trip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Accessing the Back of the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
Accessing Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Exiting Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
Activating the Hazard Warning Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Cleaning and Disinfecting Cab
Adjustable Steering Column Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Cleaning and Disinfecting
Adjusting the Aim of a Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Chemicals to Avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Cleaning and Disinfecting
High-Touch Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Air Brake System, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Cleaning and Disinfecting
Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Air Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
Dashboard and Touch
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 Screen Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 Cleaning the Cab Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Cleaning the Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
B Cleaning Mordura® and
Other Cloth Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Before Checking the Headlight Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3
Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Combustible Gas Detection
Brake and Traction Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.9
How the System Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.11
C Resetting the Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.15
Sensor False Positives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.15
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Test the System Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.15
CB Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Component Gross Vehicle
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Weight Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Crash Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Universal Serial Bus (USB)
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 D
Fan Knob and Recirculation Daily Pre-Trip Inspections and
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Mode Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Front Box Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
Canada Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Mid-Frame Area Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 Suspension and Slack
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Caring for External Chrome Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Charging the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Antilock Braking System+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Charging Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Hill Start Aid Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Dual Port Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Preconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Programming the Vehicle to Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Dealing With a Submerged
Single Port Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.17
Checking the Aim of the Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.1
Headlights 15.1 Detroit Assurance Active Brake
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Assist 5 (ABA5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5

I-1
 Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Activating/Deactivating Warnings When Changing
Active Brake Assist 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Active Brake Assist 5 Warnings When Turning
Collision Warning and Right for Stationary
Emergency Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Active Brake Assist 5 Warnings When Turning
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Active Brake Assist 5 Safety Detroit Assurance Tailgate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Detroit Assurance Active Lane Detroit Assurance Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Assist (ALA) with Auto Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Detroit Assurance Vehicle
Active Lane Assist Activation Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Bendix Forward Facing
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Multipurpose Camera 2
Active Lane Assist Functions (MPC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Rain/Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Active Lane Assist Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 eAxle 2-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Active Lane Assist Safety Autoneutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 DCDL Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
Detroit Assurance Adaptive DCDL Switch and ICU
Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Adaptive Cruise Control Gear Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Recommended Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Adaptive Cruise Control
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Selected Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Detroit Assurance Collision
Mitigation System (CMS)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
E
Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Electric Vehicle Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Detroit Assurance Lane Electric Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Electric Vehicle Cooling
Activating or Deactivating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Lane Departure Warning The Instrumentation Control
(LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 Unit (ICU) and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Cleaning the Windshield in Electric Vehicle Power
the Area of the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Functions and Activation Cab Electrical and Electronic
Conditions for Lane Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Departure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 Electronic Stability Control
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Safety Notes on Lane Emergency High-Voltage
Departure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Disconnect Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Detroit Assurance Side Guard Emergency Responder Cable
Assist (SGA) and Active Side Cut Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.18
Guard Assist 1 (ASGA1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Activating or Deactivating Noise Emission Control
Side Guard Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Vehicle Emission Control
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Sensor Monitoring Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Energy Waste Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
SGA Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 Entering and Exiting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Side Guard Assist Activation Entering the Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 Entering the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Warnings for Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21 Exiting the Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

I-2
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

Exiting the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
ePowertrain Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
I
Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 ICC5 Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Active Driver Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
External Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Application Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
A-Pillar Turning Vane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
F Batter and eDrive Coolant
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Climate Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Fifth Wheel Slide Control Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Digital Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 eAxle Oil Temperature
Fontaine Fifth Wheel Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 ICC5 Chassis Status
Holland Fifth Wheels Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 ICC5 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 Instrument and Infotainment
Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Screen Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 Primary and Secondary Air
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.11
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Fifth Wheel Slide Control
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Suspension Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Trailer Application Air
Frequency Bands and Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Maximum Transmission Trailer Suspension Air
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
The Common Telematics ICC5 Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Basic Driver Display
Wireless Applications on the Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
ICC5 OFN Steering Wheel
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
G ICC5 Infotainment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Connecting and
Greenhouse Gas Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Disconnecting a Phone
Using Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
H Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
High-Voltage Battery Phone Connection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
Phone Contacts and Call List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Hill Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Horn Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Sound System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Using a Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
ICC5 Instrument and
Infotainment Screen Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

I-3
 Index

Subject Page Subject Page

ICC5 Infotainment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 eAxle Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Front Box Inspection and
ICC5 Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Mid-Frame Area Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9
ICC5 Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Multifunctional Stalk Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Single-Finger Swipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 Driving Program Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 eAxle 2-Speed Transmission
Touching and Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 Direction Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Touching, Holding and Gear Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 Recuperative Braking
In Case of a High-Voltage Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Battery Thermal Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.16
In Case of an Under-Inflated or
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
N
In Case of Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.17 National High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Indicators, Warnings, and Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Warnings, Indicators, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
O
Instrumentation Cluster Opening and Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Start Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Opening the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Opening the Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Operating the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
ISRI Basic High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
ISRI Elite High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Driving Modes and Energy
ISRI Premium High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Hot-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
J Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Predicted Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Jump Starting an eCascadia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Starting the Vehicle After an
Extended Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
K Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Tips for Extending Vehicle
Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Optional Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
L
Lifting and Lowering the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.8
P
Lowering a Vehicle with Air Passenger Safety Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.9 Indicators (telltales) and
Raising a Vehicle with Air Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.8 PasSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Limitations of Detroit Assurance Periodic Inspections and
ABA5 and ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Maintenance, General
Low-Voltage Battery Disconnect Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Cold Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
M High Temperature Derate
and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Misuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections Powernet Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8

I-4
Index

Subject Page Subject Page

R Front Towing Hookup With
Removable Tow Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4
Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Rear Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.8
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Use of Tow Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4
RollTek Rollover Protection Trailer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 U
Using the Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
S Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Fob Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.1
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
SafetyDirect® by Bendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Bendix Forward Facing
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 V
The Bendix SafetyDirect Vehicle Protection Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Combustible Gas Detection
Sears Atlas II Deluxe High Back System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
eDrive Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Sears Sentry High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
eMotor Overspeed Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
ePowertrain Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Seat Belt Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
High-Voltage Battery
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Thermal Event Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 High-Voltage Battery
Tether Belt Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
Shutting Down the High-Voltage Low Range Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Low State of Charge and
Sitting Posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Low Range Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Smart Battery Shut-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Low State of Charge
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 State of Charge and Range
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Vehicle Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
Air Suspension Height Emergency Shutdown
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
Standard Shutdown
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
T
Telematics Information and
Terms of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
W
Collection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Washing and Polishing the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Privacy Statement Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Keeping Your Vehicle
Looking New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Protecting Vehicle Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Telematics Information We
Collect and Why We Protecting Your Vehicle’s
Collect it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
What We Do With Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
Telematics Information and and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Who We Share it With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Front Box Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
Your Consent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Your Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Windshield Wiper and Washer
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6

I-5
 Index

Subject Page
Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Wipers and the Rain/Light
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6

Z
ZF™ Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7

I-6